JP7232059B2 - slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize according to the display result of a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

As a slot machine of this type, there has been proposed one in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate in a game state in which the winning of a special combination is carried over (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-167627 A

The slot machine described in Patent Document 1 is configured such that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in a game state in which winning of a special combination is carried over, but no consideration is given to a configuration having a plurality of special combinations. .

The present invention is a slot machine provided with a plurality of special prizes and improved in a configuration in which a game value grant rate is appropriate in a game state in which a determination to allow the occurrence of some special prizes is carried over. intended to provide

The slot machine of claim 1,
Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information that can be individually identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player;
a numerical value update means capable of updating numerical values in the advantageous section;
specific advantageous state control means for controlling to a specific advantageous state based on the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means reaching a specific value;
a specific value determining means for determining one of a plurality of values as a specific value when controlling to the advantageous interval;
with
The numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means includes a first numerical value and a second numerical value,
The specific advantageous state control means controls to the specific advantageous state based on the first numerical value reaching a first specific value, and the specific advantageous state based on the second numerical value reaching a second specific value. control to
The specific value determining means respectively determines the first specific value and the second specific value when controlling to the advantageous section.
It is characterized by

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention as well as the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It can be anything.

1 is a front view of a slot machine of an embodiment to which the present invention is applied; FIG. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of a reel. 1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating a medal selector. It is a figure which shows the memory map of ROM of a main-control part, and RAM. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game area and a non-game area. It is a figure for demonstrating a game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing data to be initialized when settings are changed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a situation when shifting from a RAM initialization state to a normal state; It is a diagram showing a situation when a special winning combination is won in the RAM initialization state. It is a figure which shows winning suggestion production|presentation in a normal state. It is a diagram showing a modified example of the situation when the special combination has won in the RAM initialization state. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 1, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 1, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 2, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 2, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 3, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 3, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 4, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 4, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 5, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 5, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 6, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 6, 3-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the internal lottery target combination (setting values 1 to 6, 2-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the internal lottery target combination (setting values 1 to 6, 2-coin bet game); FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining technical matters related to the internal lottery target combination; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining technical matters related to the internal lottery target combination; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a game assistance display; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an execution mode of navigation notification and navigation effect; It is a figure which shows the flow of a game in a normal area and an advantageous area. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a situation when an advantageous section transition combination is won in a normal section. It is a figure which shows the transition of AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the transition of the production|presentation in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the content of the production|presentation performed in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the execution condition of the production|presentation performed in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the execution probability of the production|presentation performed in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the setting value suggested in the ED production|presentation pattern in AT state of a 1st form. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a lighting state of an AT-related display section in the AT state of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the lighting state of the AT-related display section in the AT state of the first embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating the control which concerns on the continuous production|presentation in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure for demonstrating the control which concerns on the continuous production|presentation in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure for demonstrating the control which concerns on the continuous production|presentation in AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the transition of AT state of a 2nd form. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing winning probabilities of a navigation stock lottery and an additional state lottery executed in the AT state of the second form; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing winning probabilities of a reduced game number lottery executed in the AT state of the second mode; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing features of a plurality of states that constitute the AT state of the second form; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control content of initial setting processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of main processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the control contents of group information setting processing (general role) performed by the main control unit; FIG. 4 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 4 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of continuous data processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a continuous data processing table; FIG. It is a flow chart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of error processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal insertion signal processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal sensor processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the contents of control of medal sensor check processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the state transition of the medal insertion signal for determining normal passage of medals in medal insertion signal processing and medal sensor check processing; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball output control process which a main control part performs. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing control details of operation information signal output processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the control contents of data processing for role ratio monitoring performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of each state counting process performed by the main control unit; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing the control contents of the role product ratio update process performed by the main control unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining update statuses of a cumulative total buffer, a 6000 times calculation buffer, and a total cumulative calculation buffer; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the control contents of a continuous accessory ratio update process performed by a main control unit; It is a flow chart showing the control contents of the instructed role product ratio update process performed by the main control unit. FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of AT state management processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining a net increase number counter; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of timer interrupt processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of time monitoring update processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of sensor monitoring processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the control contents of sensor monitoring processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing the details of control of test signal output processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing the details of control of timer update processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the control contents of display monitor output data selection processing performed by a main control unit; FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of counter update processing performed by a main control unit; It is a diagram for explaining the installation position of the gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a gaming machine information display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a display test pattern of the gaming machine information display; It is a figure for demonstrating the alerting|reporting aspect of alerting|reporting during area display LED lighting. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of notification during lighting of area display LED.

A mode for implementing a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on an embodiment.

[Mode 1]
The slot machine of form 1-1 is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to an advantageous state (increase state) in which the rate of imparting game value (medal payout rate) per game is higher than in the normal state (non-AT state);
a specific state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a specific state (decrease state) in which the rate of giving game value per game is lower than that in the advantageous state after the advantageous state (increase state) ends;
Advantageous state transition means (main control unit 41) capable of transitioning to the advantageous state (increased state) in the specific state (decreased state);
normal state transition means (main control unit 41) for shifting to the normal state (non-AT state) when the specific state (decrease state) is not shifted to the advantageous state (increase state);
with
When shifting to the advantageous state (increase state) in the specific state (decrease state), the period from control to the specific state (decrease state) to transition to the advantageous state (increase state) is a plurality of periods It is characterized by being one of the periods (1G to 11G).
According to this feature, after the end of the advantageous state, the specific state is controlled to the specific state in which the rate of giving the game value is lower than that of the advantageous state, and the specific state can be shifted again from the specific state to the advantageous state, and the specific state is started. After that, the period until the transition to the advantageous state again will be one of the multiple periods, so you can expect to transition to the advantageous state again until the longest period of the multiple periods has passed. can.

The slot machine of form 1-2 is the slot machine according to form 1-1,
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
When the number of loops is 0 and the specific state transitions to the advantageous state, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state (in the decrease state after the end of the first increase state The period until transition to the increase state) is the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state when the loop count is 1 and the specific state transitions to the advantageous state ( It is characterized by a high ratio of shorter periods than the period from the decrease state after the end of the second increase state to the increase state).
According to this feature, when the loop to the advantageous state has not been performed even once after the end of the advantageous state, the control is performed to the specific state until the next transition to the advantageous state rather than the case where the loop has already been looped to the advantageous state once. The period during which the game is held tends to be shortened, and it becomes easier to move to the next advantageous state without reducing the gaming value that increased in the advantageous state, so a large amount of game money is collected in the initial stage of the loop between the advantageous state and the specific state. value can be obtained.

The slot machine of form 1-3 is the slot machine according to form 1-2,
When the number of loops is 0 and the specific state transitions to the advantageous state, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state (in the decrease state after the end of the first increase state It is characterized by the highest ratio of 1 game (1G) during the period until transition to the increase state.
According to this feature, after the end of the advantageous state, when the loop to the advantageous state is not performed even once, it is easy to shift to the next advantageous state in one game, and the game value increased in the advantageous state is not reduced as much as possible. It will be easier to transition to the next advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 1-4 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
When the number of loops is a times, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state in the case of shifting to the advantageous state in the specific state (decrease after the end of the second to fourth increase states state until transition to an increased state) is the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state when the number of loops is b times and the specific state transitions to the advantageous state. There is a high percentage of periods that are longer than the period (the period from the end of the increase state after the 1st and 5th times until it shifts to the increase state from the decrease state),
When the specific state cannot be shifted to the advantageous state when the number of loops is a (when there is no navigation stock remaining in the reduced state after the end of the second to fourth increased states), the number of loops is a. Conditions for granting a benefit more than when the specific state cannot be shifted to the advantageous state at b times (when there is no navigation stock remaining in the reduced state after the end of the increased state after the 1st and 5th times) It is characterized by preferential treatment (probability of winning Navistock).
According to this feature, in the specific state after looping to the advantageous state a times, the period until transition to the advantageous state again tends to be longer than in the specific state after looping to the advantageous state b times. If it is not possible to transition to the advantageous state b times, the condition for granting the privilege will be treated more favorably than the specific state after looping to the advantageous state b times, so the period of the specific state after looping to the advantageous state a times will be longer. It is possible to expect both the transition to an advantageous state and the granting of benefits.

The slot machine of form 1-5 is the slot machine according to form 1-4,
When the specific state cannot be shifted to the advantageous state when the number of loops is a (when there is no navigation stock remaining in the reduced state after the end of the second to fourth increased states), the number of loops is a. The advantageous state is the benefit rather than the case where the transition to the advantageous state cannot be made in the specific state at b times (when there is no navigation stock remaining in the decreasing state after the end of the increasing state after the first and fifth times). It is characterized by a high percentage of decisions to transfer to Navistock again (probability of winning Navistock).
According to this feature, even if the period of the specific state becomes longer after looping to the advantageous state a times, it is possible to make the player expect to transition to the advantageous state again.

The slot machine of form 1-6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
In the advantageous state (fifth increased state) when the number of loops is c times, the game is played more than the advantageous state (increased state up to the fourth time) until the number of loops is (c-1) times. Controlled to be advantageous for the player (the winning probability of the added state is high and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous added state (2) is high),
From control to the specific state (decrease state) before transition to the advantageous state (fifth increase state) when the number of loops is c times until transition to the advantageous state (fifth increase state) During the period, the number of loops is controlled to the specific state (reduced state) before transitioning to the advantageous state (increased state up to the fourth time) until the loop count is (c-1) times, and then the advantageous state ( It is characterized by a high percentage of cases with a longer period than the period until transition to a state of increase up to the fourth time).
According to this feature, the specific state before shifting to the advantageous state when the number of loops is controlled to be more advantageous to the player than the previous advantageous state is (c-1) times. Since the period tends to be longer than the specific state before shifting to the advantageous state until the time, it is possible to expect the transition to the advantageous state when the number of loops is c times, which is relatively advantageous over a long period.

The slot machine of form 1-7 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-6,
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
In the advantageous state (fifth increased state) when the number of loops is c times, the game is played more than the advantageous state (increased state up to the fourth time) until the number of loops is (c-1) times. Controlled to be advantageous for the player (the winning probability of the added state is high and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous added state (2) is high),
When the number of loops is c times, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state when shifting to the advantageous state in the specific state (in the decreasing state after the end of the fifth increasing state In the period until transition to an increased state), when the number of loops is (c-1) and the state transitions to the advantageous state in the specific state, the state is controlled to the specific state and then transitioned to the advantageous state. It is characterized by a high percentage of periods that are shorter than the period up to (the period from the decrease state after the end of the fourth increase state to the increase state).
According to this feature, when the number of loops controlled to be more advantageous for the player than the previous advantageous state is c times, the specific state after the advantageous state ends is when the number of loops is (c-1) times. Since the period tends to be shorter than the specific state after the end of the advantageous state of , a game value of a large amount starting from the advantageous state when the number of loops between the advantageous state and the specific state is c times, which is particularly advantageous. can be obtained.

The slot machine of form 1-8 is the slot machine according to form 1-6 or 1-7,
In the advantageous state (fifth increased state) when the number of loops is c, compared to the advantageous state (up to the fourth increased state) when the loop count is (c-1), The rate of being given the right (Navistock) to move to the above advantageous state again is high (easy to win additional state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the number of loops reaches c in the loop between the advantageous state and the specific state, it can be expected that the loop between the advantageous state and the specific state will continue thereafter.

The slot machine of form 1-9 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
The specific state (decrease state) is the ratio (navigation notification probability ) is low.
According to this feature, it is possible to change the rate of giving game value in the advantageous state and the specific state depending on the rate of notification of the operation mode for generating the given prize.

The slot machine of form 1-10 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-9,
setting value setting means (main control unit 41) for selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player;
The currently set setting value is suggested by the period from control to the specific state (reduced state) to transition to the advantageous state (increased state) (it is possible to set 6 depending on the number of continuous games in the reduced state). suggesting sex)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, attention can be paid to the period until the specific state transitions to the advantageous state again.

The slot machine of form 1-11 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
Before the start of the specific state (decrease state), it is determined whether or not to shift again to the advantageous state (increase state) in the specific state (decrease state), and the advantageous state in the specific state (decrease state) (Increase state) when it is decided to shift again to the above-mentioned loop count, the period from control to the specific state (decrease state) to the transition to the advantageous state (increase state) is set to a plurality of It is characterized by being selected from periods (1G to 11G).
According to this feature, before the start of the specific state, it is possible to determine in advance whether or not to transition to the advantageous state again, and in the case of re-shifting to the advantageous state, it is possible to determine the period until the transition to the specific state. can simplify the control after being controlled by

The slot machine of form 1-12 is the slot machine according to form 1-11,
As the period from control to the specific state (decrease state) to transition to the advantageous state (increase state), the ratio of selecting a period shorter than the specific period with the highest rate of selection according to the number of loops It is characterized in that the ratio of selecting a period longer than the specific period is higher than the specific period.
According to this feature, after the start of the specific state, it is expected that the transition to the advantageous state will occur even after a specific period in which the rate of selection in the loop between the advantageous state and the specific state is the highest according to the number of loops. can be done.

The slot machine of form 1-13 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 1-1 to 1-12,
In the loop state (AT state),
A loop number counting means (main control unit 41) for counting the number of loops in which the advantageous state transition means transitions to the advantageous state (increase state) without being transitioned to the normal state (non-AT state);
In the advantageous state (fifth increased state) when the number of loops is d, the game is played more than the advantageous state (increased state up to the fourth time) until the number of loops is (d−1). Controlled to be advantageous for the player (the winning probability of the added state is high and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous added state (2) is high),
When the number of loops is 0 and the specific state transitions to the advantageous state, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state (in the decrease state after the end of the first increase state The period until transition to the increase state) is, when the number of loops is from 1 to (d−1) times and the transition to the advantageous state is performed in the specific state, the control is performed to the specific state and then the advantageous state. (the period from the decrease state after the end of the 2nd to 4th increase state to the increase state).
When the number of loops is d, the period from control to the specific state to transition to the advantageous state when shifting to the advantageous state in the specific state (in the decreasing state after the end of the fifth increasing state The period until transition to the increase state) is, when the number of loops is from 2 times to (d−1) times and the transition to the advantageous state is performed in the specific state, the control is performed to the specific state and then the advantageous state. (the period from the decrease state after the end of the 2nd to 4th increase state to the increase state).
When the number of loops is between 2 and (d-1) times, the transition to the advantageous state is not possible in the specific state (when there is no navigation stock left in the reduced state after the end of the 2nd to 4th increased states ), when the number of loops is 0 and d or more, the transition to the advantageous state cannot be made in the specific state (the navigation stock remains in the decrease state after the end of the increase state after the first time, the fifth time, etc.). It is characterized by a higher percentage of decisions to move to the above-mentioned advantageous state again (navistock winning probability) than when there is no case).
According to this feature, if the loop to the advantageous state has not been performed once after the end of the advantageous state, the transition to the next advantageous state is made more than the case where the loop has already been looped to the advantageous state from 1 time to (d−1) times. The period during which the specific state is controlled until the game is activated tends to be shortened, and the game value increased in the advantageous state is not reduced, making it easier to move to the next advantageous state. A specific state after the end of the advantageous state when the number of loops is d, which is controlled more favorably for the player than the advantageous state up to that point, is the loop Since the period tends to be shorter than the specific state after the end of the advantageous state when the number of times is from 1 to (d−1) times, the loop number of d times is particularly advantageous in the loop between the advantageous state and the specific state. A large amount of game value can be acquired starting from the advantageous state of Furthermore, in a specific state after looping from 1 to (d−1) times to an advantageous state, it is more advantageous than a specific state that has not looped to an advantageous state even once or a specific state after looping to an advantageous state d or more times. In addition to the fact that the period until transitioning to the state again tends to be long, in a specific state after looping from 1 to (d-1) times to the advantageous state, it is advantageous if it is not decided to move to the advantageous state again Since the rate at which it is decided to re-enter the state is relatively high, even if the period of the specific state after looping from 1 to (d−1) times to the advantageous state becomes longer, it is possible to re-enter the advantageous state. can be expected, and the loop state can be expected to continue to an advantageous state when the number of loops is d, which is particularly advantageous.

[Mode 2]
The form 2-1 slot machine is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
bet amount setting means (main control unit 41) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types of bets including the first bet amount (3) or the second bet amount (2) according to the player's selection;
Predetermining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize;
When the pre-determining means determines that the special winning (BB1, BB2) accompanied by the transition to the special game state is permitted, and the special winning (BB1, BB2) does not occur, the special winning carry-over means (main control unit 41) for carrying over the decision to allow the occurrence of (BB1, BB2) to the next game or later;
with
A first carryover state (inside BB2) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special winning (BB2) to be determined is carried over on condition that the first bet number (3) is set ), the game value grant rate (medal payout rate) is not appropriate, and the second special winning (BB1) is determined on the condition that the second bet amount (2) is set. In the second carry-over state (during BB1) in which the decision to allow the occurrence of .
It should be noted that, in the second carryover state, the game value grant rate is appropriate, in the second carryover state, the non-carryover state or the first carryover state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special winning is not carried over. A configuration in which the rate of giving game value is higher than that, a configuration in which a privilege can be granted in the second carryover state, but a configuration in which no privilege is granted in the non-carryover state or the first carryover state, In the second carryover state, It includes a configuration in which a privilege is granted under a condition that is more favorable than the non-carryover state or the first carryover state.

The slot machine of form 2-2 is the slot machine according to form 2-1,
In the second carryover state (inside BB1), the second special The feature is that winning (BB1) does not occur.
According to this feature, the game value is provided in the first carryover state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special winning to be determined is carried over on the condition that the first bet amount is set. For gaming in the second carry-over state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the second special winning to be determined on the condition that the odds are not appropriate and the second bet amount is set is carried over In the configuration in which the value provision rate is appropriate, after the transition to the second carryover state, the second special bet is set regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set. It is possible to maintain the second carryover state in which a game value imparting rate is appropriate without shifting to a special game state due to the occurrence of a prize.

The slot machine of form 2-3 is the slot machine according to form 2-1 or 2-2,
A first special game state (BB2) that shifts due to the occurrence of the first special winning (BB2) and a second special game state (BB1) that shifts due to the occurrence of the second special winning (BB1). Winning (A in BB, B in BB) to be determined by (internal lottery) is common, and the pre-determining means in the first special game state (BB2) and the second special game state (BB1) It is characterized by the fact that at least some of the winning prizes (A in BB, B in BB) to be determined by (internal lottery) have different probabilities of occurrence.
According to this feature, the game value is provided in the first carryover state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the first special winning to be determined is carried over on the condition that the first bet amount is set. For gaming in the second carry-over state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the second special winning to be determined on the condition that the odds are not appropriate and the second bet amount is set is carried over In the configuration in which the value provision rate is appropriate, the occurrence of the first special prize results in control to the first special game state, and the occurrence of the second special prize results in control to the second special game state. However, the winning to be determined by the pre-determining means is common in the first special game state and the second special game state, and the pre-determining means is the same in the first special game state and the second special game state. By making the probability of occurrence of at least a part of the winnings to be determined by different, the winnings to be determined by the pre-determining means between the first special game state and the second special game state , the game value giving rate in the first special game state and the game value giving rate in the second special game state can be adjusted.

The slot machine of form 2-4 is the slot machine according to form 2-3,
setting value setting means (main control unit 41) for selecting and setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player;
In at least one of the first special game state (BB2) and the second special game state (BB1), occurrence of at least some of the winnings (A in BB, B in BB) to be determined is allowed. It is characterized in that the probability of
According to this feature, without changing the winning to be determined by the pre-determining means in the first special game state and the second special game state, for each set value in the first special game state or the second special game state It is possible to adjust the rate at which game values are given.

[Mode 3]
The form 3-1 slot machine is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling an advantageous section that can be controlled to an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player;
Numerical value update means (main control unit 41) capable of updating the numerical value (the number of games transitioning to the ED/the number of net increases in medals) in the advantageous section;
The numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means (the number of games transitioning to ED/the number of net increases after shifting to the AT state) reaches a specific value (the number of games transitioning to ED = the fifth prescribed number/the number of net increases after shifting to the AT state > the number of net increases after shifting to the AT state). specific advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to a specific advantageous state (ED state) with 3 prescribed number);
Any value from a plurality of values (1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200/1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400) when controlling to the advantageous section is a specific value (fifth specified number / third specified number) specific value determination means (main control unit 41),
It is characterized by having
According to this feature, after being controlled to the advantageous section, the specific value to be controlled to the specific advantageous state changes due to the arrival of the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means, so that the control is performed to the advantageous section. Each time, by changing the period until the control to the specific advantageous state is performed, it is possible to increase the interest associated with the control to the advantageous section.

The slot machine of form 3-2 is the slot machine according to form 3-1,
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), the ratio (navigation notification probability) at which the operation mode for generating the award winning (small winning combination) accompanied by the provision of game value (medal) is notified is higher than the specific advantageous state. It is characterized in that the rate at which the operation mode for generating the award winning is notified in an advantageous state (AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state) is different from the rate (navigation notification probability).
According to this feature, by changing the period until it is controlled to a specific advantageous state, the timing of transition to a specific advantageous state becomes ambiguous, but by being controlled to a specific advantageous state To estimate the possibility of being controlled to a specific advantageous state from the frequency of notification of the operation mode for generating a given prize, since the state and the rate of notification of the operation mode for generating the given prize are different. can be done.

The slot machine of form 3-3 is the slot machine according to form 3-1 or 3-2,
Specific advantageous state suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a specific advantageous state suggestive effect (ED start effect, ED effect) suggesting that the specific advantageous state (ED state) is controlled in the specific advantageous state (ED state). (sub control unit 91),
The specific advantageous state suggesting effect (ED start effect, ED effect) may not be executed even after being controlled to the specific advantageous state (ED state).
According to this feature, since the specific advantageous state suggesting effect may not be executed even after being controlled to the specific advantageous state, the specific advantageous state is controlled even in a situation where the specific advantageous state suggesting effect is not executed. can be expected.

The slot machine of form 3-4 is the slot machine according to form 3-3,
Pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize,
In the specific advantageous state (ED state), when it is determined by the pre-determining means that the occurrence of the specific winning (FC1 to FC4 winning) is permitted, the specific advantageous state suggestive effect (ED start effect, ED effect) is characterized by determining whether or not to execute
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player expect that the specific advantageous state suggesting performance is executed when it is determined that the occurrence of the specific winning prize is permitted, that is, the player is expected to be controlled to the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 3-5 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
Specific value suggestion effect execution means (sub control unit 91) for executing a specific value suggestion effect (navigation effect B) suggesting the possibility that the specific value is a value that is relatively easy to reach among a plurality of values. It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the specific value suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled to the specific advantageous state at an earlier stage.

[Mode 4]
The form 4-1 slot machine is
Equipped with a variable display unit (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means (main control unit 41) for controlling an advantageous section that can be controlled to an advantageous state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player;
a first counting means for counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval;
a second counting means for counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval;
with
The first count value (the number of games in the advantageous section) by the first counting means is updated regardless of whether or not the specific condition (three bets and RT1) is established,
The second count value (the number of games transitioning to the ED) by the second counting means is updated when the specific condition (three bets and RT1) is established, and is updated when the specific condition is not established. is not updated to
The first count value is used when determining the end condition of the advantageous section (end condition 1 of the advantageous section),
The second count value is characterized in that it is used when determining conditions (ceiling value, false ceiling value, third ED transition condition) relating to awarding of benefits in the advantageous section.
According to this feature, as the number of games for determining the conditions for ending the advantageous interval, the first count value updated regardless of the conditions occurring during the advantageous interval is used, thereby making the advantageous interval excessively long. On the other hand, the number of games for judging the conditions for granting the privilege uses the second count value that is not updated unless the specific conditions are satisfied, so that it is possible to play the game under the recommended conditions. can be encouraged.

The slot machine of form 4-2 is the slot machine according to form 4-1,
At the end of the advantageous interval, both the first count value (the number of games in the advantageous interval) and the second count value (the number of games transitioning to the ED) are initialized.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the event of the finished advantageous section from affecting the next advantageous section.

The slot machine of form 4-3 is the slot machine according to form 4-1 or 4-2,
When the second count value (the number of games transitioning to ED) reaches a specific value (fifth specified number), a specific advantageous state (ED state) is maintained until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It is characterized by comprising state control means (main control unit 41).
According to this feature, when the number of games in which the specific condition is satisfied in the advantageous interval reaches a specific value, it is possible to control the specific advantageous state to be continued until the end condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied.

The slot machine of form 4-4 is the slot machine according to form 4-3,
Remaining game number suggesting means (sub control unit 91) for suggesting the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous interval in the specific advantageous state (ED state);
The number-of-remaining-games suggesting means is characterized by suggesting the number of remaining games based on the first count value (the number of games in the advantageous interval).
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest an accurate number of remaining games in a specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-5 is the slot machine according to form 4-3 or 4-4,
Advantageous states other than the specific advantageous state (AT1 state, AT2 state) when the second count value (the number of games transitioning to ED) reaches a predetermined value (ceiling value) smaller than the specific value (fifth specified number) Advantageous state control means (main control unit 41) for controlling to
According to this feature, the second count value can be shared between determination of the transition condition for the specific advantageous state and determination of the transition condition for the advantageous state other than the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-6 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-3 to 4-5,
When the second count value (the number of games transitioning to ED) reaches a predetermined value (temporary ceiling value) smaller than the specific value (fifth specified number), an advantageous state other than the specific advantageous state (AT1 state, AT2 state) ) is provided.
According to this feature, it is possible to share the second count value for determining the conditions for transitioning to the specific advantageous state and determining the conditions for determining advantageous states other than the specific advantageous state.

The slot machine of form 4-7 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-6,
Any of a plurality of types of bets including the first bet (3) or the second bet (2) can be set by the player's selection,
By playing the game with the first number of bets, the game value provision rate (medal payout rate) becomes appropriate,
The specific condition is established by playing the game with the first bet number (3).
According to this feature, since the second count value is not updated unless the game is played with the first number of bets, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the first number of bets at which the gaming value award rate is appropriate. .

The slot machine of form 4-8 is the slot machine according to any one of forms 4-1 to 4-7,
Equipped with game state control means for controlling to a plurality of game states,
By controlling to the specific game state (RT1) among a plurality of game states, the game value imparting rate (medal payout rate) becomes appropriate,
The specific condition is established by being controlled to the specific game state (RT1).
According to this feature, since the second count value is not updated when the control is not performed to the specific game state, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game in the specific game state in which the game value imparting rate is appropriate.

The slot machine of form 4-9 is the slot machine according to form 4-3 or 4-4,
a third counting means for counting an increase in the game value during the advantageous section (a net increase in the number of medals after shifting to the AT state);
The third count value (net increase number counter value) by the third counting means is used when determining the end condition of the advantageous section,
The third count value (net increase number counter value) is characterized in that it is updated regardless of whether or not the specific condition (three bets and RT1) is established.
According to this feature, since the third count value is updated even when the specific condition is not satisfied, the end condition of the advantageous interval is determined by taking into account the amount of increase in gaming value in the game in which the specific condition is not satisfied. can judge. That is, even if the game is played without satisfying the specific condition, the establishment of the condition for ending the advantageous interval cannot be delayed.

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, comprises a housing 1a with an open front surface and a front door 1b rotatably pivoted on a side end of the housing 1a. there is Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) on which a plurality of mutually identifiable symbols are arranged in a predetermined order and in equal numbers are arranged horizontally. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in a see-through window 3 provided approximately in the center of the front of the slot machine 1. Each of them is displayed in the top, middle, and bottom three stages, and arranged so as to be visible from the player's side. In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, each reel has a plurality of identifiable symbols (“Red 7”, “Blue 7”, “White 7”, “BAR”, “Watermelon”, “Cherry a”). , "Cherry b", "Bell", "Replay", and "Plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is exemplified, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, or a configuration using four or more reels may be used. . In this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R form a variable display section that variably displays symbols, but the variable display section may be other than the reels. It may be possible to change the pattern by moving the belt on which is arranged. Also, in this embodiment, the variable display section is configured with a physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured with an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, there are a medal inserting section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by the player). ) determined according to the gaming state (in this embodiment, 2 or 3 for RT0, RT1, and RT2, and 3 for BB1 and BB2, which will be described later). In this embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the number of bets (three coins), the medals stored as credits and the medals used to set the number of bets are settled (the amount used to set the credits and the number of bets) return of the medals), a start switch 7 operated when starting the game, and stop switches 8L, 8C operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. , 8R are provided so as to be operable by the player.

On the front of the slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 1, a credit indicator 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and the content of an error is displayed. A game auxiliary display 12 that displays an error code, operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., a 1 BET LED 14 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 1, A 2BET LED 15 lights to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 2, a 3BET LED 16 lights to indicate that the number of bets has been set to 3, and a specific number of bets (two in this embodiment) are set. State display LED 17 for notifying by lighting that the special combination (BB1 in this embodiment) that can be won in the game is controlled to the internal medium state (RT1 in this embodiment) that is carried over, and the start switch 7. A start enable LED 18 lights to indicate that the game start operation is valid, a section display LED 19 lights to indicate that the section state is controlled to an advantageous section, and lights to indicate that the replay game is in progress. A game display unit 13 provided with a replaying LED 20 is provided.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. Left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 3) are provided inside the 8R, respectively, to notify by lighting that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective. is provided.

In addition, on the front of the slot machine 1, a liquid crystal display 51 capable of displaying images, etc., an AT display section 61 for notifying an AT (assist time) state, which will be described later, by lighting up, An AT2 state display unit 62 for notifying the AT2 state by turning on a lighting mode, an AT1 state display unit 63 for notifying the AT1 state by turning on a lighting mode, which will be described later. A CZ (chance zone) state display unit 64 is provided for notifying that the state is in the CZ (chance zone) state by turning on a lighting mode, and an additional state display unit 65 is provided for notifying that the state is an additional state described later in the AT state by turning on a lighting state. AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are provided with AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e (see FIG. 3) corresponding to each. there is Hereinafter, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the CZ state, the additional state, and the later-described ED state may be collectively referred to as an AT-related state.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key. A setting value display 24 that displays the setting value at that time, a door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion part 4, A channel switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout port 9 side provided in the , detects the medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Further, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating or stopping the aforementioned reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in accordance with a control signal from the main control section 41, and a control unit from the main control section 41 are provided. A hopper unit 35 is provided for paying out medals from the medal pay-out port 9 according to a signal.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, there is a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state. A reset/setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball payout rate) of the internal lottery, and a power switch 39 operated when the power is turned on/off are provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, in a state in which the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is arranged below the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A game machine information display 50 is arranged (see FIG. 77). The gaming machine information display device 50 can visually recognize display contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. A store clerk or the like can recognize the game information based on the game history in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and an effect control board 90. A game is controlled by the game control board 40, and a game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. Control of the production according to is performed.

The game control board 40 includes the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the reel sensor of the reel unit 34 (not shown). , a payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the hopper unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches are input. .

In addition, the game control board 40 includes the aforementioned credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch effective LED 21, left , Middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electrical components and game control board 40 The game machine information display 50 is driven under the control of the main control section 41 mounted on the game control board 40 .

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 which is composed of a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, a ROM 41b, a RAM 41c, and an I/O port 41d, and which performs game control.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a for calculation. The plurality of registers includes registers such as accumulator registers, flag registers, general purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, and program counters. Among these registers, the accumulator register, the flag register, and the general-purpose register each include a front register and a back register configured to be paired (hereinafter, the front register and back register may be simply referred to as registers). be). The main CPU 41a executes various instructions included in the program, such as calculation instructions and readout instructions, to update the values of predetermined registers and store data in the RAM 41c specified by the values (addresses) of predetermined registers. It is possible to update the values (data) stored in the area.

In addition, the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is configured so that its state changes so as to indicate the operation result by the instruction executed by the main CPU 41a. Then, the main CPU 41a can be made to perform processing according to the result of calculation by the preceding instruction.

In addition, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and in order to reduce the processing load of the main CPU 41a, the flag register has an arithmetic instruction executed by the main CPU 41a. The state changes according to the result, but the first bit (hereinafter referred to as first zero flag Z), and a second bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a second zero flag TZ) whose state changes according to the result of the operation of an operation instruction, and whose state changes even with a specific instruction. ) and so on. In each process included in the game program, which will be described later, when proceeding with the process based on the instruction, the value of the bit other than the second zero flag included in the flag register is referenced to make judgments. , and second zero flag bit values are not referred to for determination.

The main control section 41 also transmits various commands to the sub-control section 91 . A command sent from the main control section 41 to the sub-control section 91 is sent only in one direction, and no command is sent from the sub-control section 91 to the main control section 41 .

The I/O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R from the output ports 0 and 1. Control signals for the left/middle/right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R and control signals for the passage switching solenoid 30 can be output from the output port 3, and control signals for the hopper motor 34b and external output signals can be output from the output port 3. , the control signals of the credit display 11, game auxiliary display 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, status display LED 17, start effective LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, and BET switch effective LED 21 are sent from output port 4 and output port 5. A test signal can be output from an output port 6, a test signal and an external output signal can be output from an output port 7, and a command can be output from an output port 8 and an output port 9.

In addition, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing corresponding to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and changes the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process to migrate step by step according to the situation. The main control unit 41 also executes timer interrupt processing (main) at regular time intervals (approximately 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time taken for the processing to be repeated according to the control state in the main processing and the execution time of the timer interrupt processing (main). Therefore, at least one cycle of processing that is always repeated according to the control state is performed between the current and the next timer interrupt processing (main).

In this embodiment, an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41 is a save instruction that saves the values of the registers that the main control unit 41 has in a stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , the values of the registers saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of saving, and set in the register corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register and a return instruction for returning the state of to the state when it was saved by the save instruction.

The save instructions are a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all the registers that the main control unit 41 has. and a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the value of the register in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. , it is possible to save the value of the register in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers that the main control unit 41 has, and Among them, a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and restoring the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for the flag register in which the calculation result is stored is included. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-game program, call the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program, and store it in the corresponding register It is possible to set and restore.

The effect control board 90 is connected to the above-described liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting sound, effect devices such as the effect LED 57 that is used for effect and visible from the player side, and AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e. , the output state of these production devices can be controlled by a sub-control section 91 mounted on the production control board 90 . The sub-control section 91 receives commands transmitted from the main control section 41 and performs various controls for effecting.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in a lottery such as an internal lottery that affects the degree of advantage for a player. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 decreasing the value in order, lowering the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the degree of advantage decreases stepwise.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37 . When the setting key switch 37 is turned on to turn on the power, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to the setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when the operation is further performed from the setting value 6, the setting value is changed to 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control section 41, and the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. Only the store clerk who has a predetermined key among the store clerk of the installed amusement shop can operate. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation, it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37, even among game store clerks. Further, the reset switch 23 does not need to open the front door 1b, but requires key operation using a predetermined key, so that it can be operated only by a store clerk who has a predetermined key. Also, the reset/setting switch 38 normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state.

When a game is played on the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 or the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the bet amount using credits. When a prescribed number of bets determined according to the gaming state is set, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. 1, in this embodiment, is horizontally aligned in the middle of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). ) is enabled, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the maximum number of medals among the specified number corresponding to the game state is exceeded, the amount is added to the credits. Also, in this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are rotated and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are continuously varied. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotating, the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R are controlled to stop, and the rotation of the reels is stopped. The game is stopped, and the symbols on the relevant reel are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms (milliseconds) in this embodiment) from when each stop switch is operated. is done. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and 80 (rotations) x 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel, for example, 21 frames) = 1680 symbols are changed, so the predetermined maximum Until the stop delay time (190 ms) elapses, a maximum of 4 frames worth of symbols can be drawn. In other words, in the stop control, the pattern displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the pattern displayed up to four frames ahead, a total of 5 frames (withdrawal range) are displayed. can be selected and led out to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by operating the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, a winning combination won in an internal lottery, which will be described later, is selected. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames ahead from the symbol when the stop switch is operated, the relevant symbol is pulled onto the pay line LN, and the rotation of the reel whose stop switch is operated is stopped. On the other hand, when the symbols constituting the winning combination won by the internal lottery are not within the withdrawal range, the symbols constituting the winning combination not won by the internal lottery are displayed on the winning line LN. In order not to stop upward, it is possible to draw a pattern that does not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN, and to stop the rotation of the reel for which the stop switch is operated.

In addition, in the stop control, when winning of a special winning combination (BB1 and BB2 in this embodiment) is carried over, a small winning combination (in this embodiment, a common multi-sheet bell, etc.) is won by an internal lottery. When a special combination and a minor combination are won at the same time, control is performed so that the constituent symbols of the winning minor combination are preferentially drawn to the winning line LN within the aforementioned drawing range, and the winning is achieved. When the constituent symbols of the minor winning combination cannot be drawn into the winning line LN, the constituent symbols of the winning special winning combination are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN. Therefore, in a game in which a special role and a minor role are won at the same time, it is difficult to win the winning special role.

In addition, in the stop control, when winning of a special combination (BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) is carried over, a replay combination (replay 1A in this embodiment, etc.) is won by an internal lottery, When the special combination and the re-game combination are won at the same time, the constituent symbols of the winning re-game combination are preferentially drawn to the winning line LN. The symbols constituting the replay combination on each of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are arranged within a predetermined drawing range, and when the replay combination is won, the symbols constituting the replay combination are always drawn into the winning line LN. Become. Therefore, in a game in which a special role and a replay role are won at the same time, the winning special role cannot be awarded.

In addition, in the stop control, the winning of the special combination (BB1 and BB2 in this embodiment) is carried over, and the prescribed number corresponding to the winning special combination (2 in the case of BB1, 2 in the case of BB2). In a game where the number of bets is set to 3, it is possible to draw the symbols constituting the winning special role into the winning line LN, but the prescribed number does not correspond to the winning special role. In a game in which the number of bets of is set, control is performed so as not to draw the constituent symbols of the winning special combination into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game in which a special role is won, the special role is not won unless the specified number of bets corresponding to the winning special role is set. . As a result, in RT1, which is a gaming state in which the winning of a specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the game is played by selecting the number of bets of three (first number of bets), and by the internal lottery Even if the combination of BB1 is not won, the specific special combination (BB1) is not won, and the game state can be maintained at RT1.

When all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, one game is finished, and a combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination is displayed on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and is stopped on the winning line LN. In this case, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player according to the winning and added to the credits. Also, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). In addition, when a symbol combination accompanied by a transition of the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 in this embodiment) on the winning line LN stops as a result of the display of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. The game state is shifted to a game state corresponding to the combination of symbols.

In this embodiment, the game is started when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels are stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing the game starts when all the controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the type of winning combination (hereinafter referred to as winning combination) is determined according to the gaming state, and there is no need to set a small combination involving the payout of medals and the number of bets. There are a replay combination in which a replay that enables the start of the next game is provided, and a special combination involving transition to a game state (special state) advantageous to the player. In the following, the small combination and the replay combination are collectively referred to as a general combination. In order to generate a prize for each combination determined according to the game state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for the combination. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow the winning of each combination before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the predetermined number When the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the number of bets set, a random number is used to determine.

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for the small winning combination and the replaying combination are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag is complete, and becomes invalid in a game in which the combination of winning winning combinations is complete. That is, once the winning flag of the special role is won, even if the combination of roles allowed by the flag cannot be arranged, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It's becoming

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the order of stop operation, the operation timing), it is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. A winning combination and a replaying combination (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigable combination) can be won. The navigable role may be, for example, a role in which the stop mode is more advantageous than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, rather than the stop mode in which the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. , and a winning combination in which, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, the rate of stopping in an advantageous stop mode is higher than in the case where the stop operation is performed in another operation mode. In addition, the advantageous stop mode includes not only the stop mode accompanied by awarding of medals, but also the stop mode accompanied by a transition to an advantageous game state, a stop mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous game state is avoided, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation information that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the internal lottery, by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT), which is a possible notification period. When the right to be controlled by the AT is granted to the player, the main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT. Then, when the AT is controlled, by winning the navigation target role, the navigation notification is executed, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R (for example, pressing order, operation timing, etc.) are notified using the game auxiliary display device 12, and a command capable of specifying an operation mode advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, whereby the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 or the like is used to execute a navigation effect. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode notified by the navigation notification and the navigation performance, the navigation target role won by the internal lottery can be surely won.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a game auxiliary display 12 capable of displaying the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, and navigation information. Although it is a configuration for notifying navigation information, it may be configured to provide a dedicated display capable of displaying only navigation information, and to notify navigation information using the dedicated display in the control of navigation information.

[About Medal Selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be described with reference to FIG. In the following description, the front side of the medal selector 29 is defined as the medal selector 29 viewed from the rear side of the front door 1b.

The medal selector 29 is configured in a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. The left side wall of the main body is provided with an outflow port 142 through which medals can flow out from the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a side, and the lower side wall of the main body is provided with a medal payout port from the inside of the main body. A discharge port 143 capable of discharging medals to the outside on the 9 side is provided. Inside the main body of the medal selector 29, there is formed a substantially L-shaped medal flow path communicating from the inflow port 141 to the outflow port 142 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), the side walls of this medal flow channel are inclined forward from bottom to top so that the upper end of the flowing medals is tilted more forward than the lower end. there is Further, a substantially S-shaped token flow downstream passage is formed in communication from the inflow port 141 to the discharge port 143 . Hereinafter, among the medal flow downstream channels inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow channel on the inlet 141 side is the medal inflow channel 29a, the flow channel on the outflow port 142 side is the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal receiving channel 29b is on the outlet 143 side. The channel is called a medal return channel 29c.

The medal selector 29 is designed to determine the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of inserted medals. After being detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal receiving flow path 29b inside and passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the outflow port 142 is drained from The medals are guided to the hopper tank 34a via the medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, after flowing in from the inflow port 141 , the fake medal is dropped into the medal return channel 29 c while flowing down the medal inflow channel 29 a , flows down the medal return channel 29 c , and is discharged from the discharge port 143 . be. The medals are returned to the lower tray from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1) through a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29 .

At the confluence of the medal inflow channel 29a, medal receiving channel 29b, and medal return channel 29c, a channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is excited. In conjunction, before the medal flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flows into the medal receiving channel 29b, the medal is forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow channel 29a, and the medal is returned. A channel switching plate 147 is swingably provided for allowing the flow to flow into the channel 29c.

The flow path switching plate 147 opens the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a as shown in FIG. It is possible to swing so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c are in communication with each other. When the channel switching solenoid 30 is energized, that is, when medal reception is permitted, the upper part of the channel switching plate 147 is directed leftward in the figure (arrow A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 forms the bottom surface of the medal inflow flow path 29a, the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed, and the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed. and the medal return channel 29c are configured to be able to swing so as not to communicate with each other. With such a configuration, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is energized, medals flowing from the inlet 141 and flowing down the medal inflow flow path 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147, It flows into the medal receiving channel 29b and flows out from the outlet 142. As shown in FIG.

Further, on the upstream side of the medal inflow channel 29a, an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting the passage of medals that have flowed in from the inflow port 141 is provided. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are provided for detecting passage of ejected medals.

Among the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c detect the passage of medals when the medals pass between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion, and the light receiving portion detects that the light from the light projecting portion is blocked. The inserted medal sensor 31b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of the medal by detecting the movement of the movable piece 180 that operates in conjunction with the passage of the medal with the detector 183 . Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c may be referred to as an inserted medal sensor 3. Further, the range in which passage of medals is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be called a detection range A in some cases.

Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be described. A movable piece 180 of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of the lower portion of the medal selector 29 on the downstream side of the medal receiving channel 29b so as to be able to appear and retract into the medal receiving channel 29b. Further, a detector 183 is installed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180 outside the medal receiving channel 29b. The detector 183 has a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion provided in a detecting portion 183a. The movable piece 180 is provided at the end portion of the movable piece 180 by retracting the tip portion 180b of the movable piece 180 from the medal receiving passage 29b when the medal passes through the medal receiving passage 29b. The detected portion 180a is inserted between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a. passage is detected. On the other hand, the movable piece 180 is biased so that the tip portion 180b of the movable piece 180 protrudes into the medal receiving passage 29b when the medal does not pass through the medal receiving passage 29b. In this state, the detected portion 180a of the movable piece 180 does not enter between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the detecting portion 183a, and the light emitted from the light projecting portion of the detecting portion 183a to the light receiving portion can be blocked. Therefore, the passage of medals is not detected by the detector 183 .

[Regarding the memory area and program of the main control part]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having memory areas for storing predetermined programs and data.

FIG. 5 is an address map of the program/data area in the ROM 41b and the usable area in the RAM 41c. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the program/data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a game data area for storing game data used by the game program, and a non-programming area. Includes a use area 1, a non-game program area storing a non-game program unrelated to the progress of a game, a non-game data area storing non-game data used by the non-game program, and an unused area 2. .

It should be noted that the progress of the game means the progress of a series of processes that constitute the game, and in the case of a slot machine, at the stage where the game can be started by setting the number of bets, the game is started and the reels are rotated. a step of stopping the reels and deriving the display results; and a step of giving values such as medals according to the display results.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used by the non-game program as work, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area where the game program saves data. It includes an area that can be referenced by the program, an area that cannot be referenced by the game program, and a non-game stack area where the non-game program saves data. In this embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are separately provided in different areas, but the game program and the non-game program may share one stack area.

The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is an area which is surplus with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more that is not used by either the game program or the non-game program. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to discontinuous areas with the unused area 4 interposed therebetween, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area not related to the progress of the game are allocated. The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in storage area.

Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as the game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as the non-game area. . Also, the unused areas 1 and 2, the unused areas 3 and the unused areas 4 may be collectively referred to as unused areas.

[Instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program and subroutines that are called during execution of other programs.

In addition, as a call instruction that causes the main control unit 41 to call and execute a program stored in the program/data area, a CALL instruction, a CALLV instruction, an RST instruction, and the like are included.

A CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine. When calling a subroutine by a CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the designated address. After the end of the subroutine, the caller address stored in the stack area, that is, the program of the caller main routine or subroutine that executed the CALL instruction is returned.

CALL instructions include normal CALL instructions and CALLV instructions, which are special CALL instructions. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that calls a subroutine by specifying an address by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address, whereas a CALLV instruction calls only a low-order address. This is an instruction to call a subroutine by specifying an address based on a preset high-order address and a designated low-order address in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. can be called.

The RST instruction is an instruction for specifying values corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses to call and execute a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to the specified values. A subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to an instruction or CALLV instruction. When calling a subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the specified value. After the end of the subroutine, the caller address stored in the stack area, ie, the main routine or subroutine that executed the RST instruction, is returned to.

A jump instruction is an instruction to move to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the program at the move destination. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction and the RST instruction, even if the program after movement ends, the original program will not be restored.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines with a particularly high frequency of use are stored in an area whose start address is a specific value (eg, 00H) in the game program area of the ROM 41b. On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when calling a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address is a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby using the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored at the combined address of the upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, upper addresses constituting part of the addresses used when calling subroutines that are used particularly frequently in the game program are set in the vector table in advance as specific values, and based on the specific values set in the vector table. Since the address is specified by the It is possible to reduce wastefulness of programs for specifying addresses.

In this embodiment, the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction store the start address of the subroutine of the game program. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL instruction, by using the CALLV instruction or RST instruction in a game program, the data volume of the game program can be reduced. ing. In addition, in the vector table area and specific address area of the ROM 41b, the start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored, and the start of the non-game program is not stored. The program is called so as not to hinder the reduction of the data capacity of the game program.

Of the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines with a particularly high frequency of use are stored in a non-game program area of the ROM 41b in which the top address is a specific value, and a CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine to be called by the CALLV instruction and specifying only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when the main control unit 41 calls the subroutine in which the upper address of the starting address is the specific value, these subroutines , it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling.

Also, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

Also, not limited to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, or the like, and by specifying the rest of the address, the subroutine With a configuration using a special CALL instruction that can specify the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying the address when calling the subroutine. In addition, by assigning an identification value smaller in data volume than an address to each of the plurality of areas that make up the vector table area, setting the subroutine storage address to each of these areas, and designating the identification value, the identification Even with a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce program waste for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. .

The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by the input of a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), and an illegal access reset. The set values, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program etc. are actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (unused If the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area set by the program nor FFFFH, it will not start. This makes it possible to prevent in advance that unintended processing is executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt or the like.

An LD instruction is included as a read instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program/data area. The LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored at an address specified in a main routine or subroutine to a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

LD instructions include normal LD instructions and LDQ instructions, which are special LD instructions. A normal LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address. By designating only the lower address, the ROM 41b or the RAM 41c is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the specified lower address. This is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area and store the read data in a specified register. Compared to a normal LD instruction, the specified data can be stored in a specified register with a smaller amount of data. It becomes possible.

When reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, can be used to read all addresses (upper and lower parts) indicating the specific area. It is possible to read the data in the specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address instead of specifying it. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to the normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both a high-order address and a low-order address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for

Among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, the game data with a particularly high frequency of use is stored in an area having a specific value in the top address of the game RAM area, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( Q register) as the upper address of the game data, and when the main control unit 41 reads out the game data, by specifying only the lower address using the LDQ instruction, the game data is read out. A program for reading game data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction for reading data by specifying both an address and a lower address, and for specifying an address when reading these game data. waste can be reduced.

In addition, the main control unit 41 can change the value set in a special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine. In setting, a specific value is set in a special register (Q register), which indicates the top address of game data that is frequently used by the game program. Also, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved, and when returning to the game program, the value set in the special register (Q register) is saved. It is set again to the value it was previously set to. As a result, when the game program is running, a specific value indicating the head address of game data frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register). Using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read game data with a high frequency of use.

As a special LD instruction, the high-order address used for reading by the LDQ instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (eg, Q register), such as a vector table area. Part of the address is specified using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the waste of programs for specifying addresses when reading data. Further, for example, by allocating an identification value with a data amount smaller than an address to each of a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, setting a data storage address for each of these areas, and specifying an identification value, To reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data even in a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to an identification value. can be done.

In this embodiment, the Q register is configured to store the same value as the value used in the specific program as the specific value, but it may be configured to store a value different from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-specific program is called, the value different from the value used in the specific program as a specific value in the Q register, which is a value different from the value used in the specific program, is the top address of the storage area where the data with high frequency of use in the non-game program is stored. By storing a value and using the LDQ instruction when calling data in a non-specific program, the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced.

A game program is a program related to the progress of a game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game if the process based on the program is not executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that does not relate to the progress of the game, and even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the processing based on the program, the game can be progressed. It is a program for executing processing.

In the game program, any instruction including special CALL instructions such as CALLV instruction and RST instruction, and special LD instruction such as LDQ instruction may be used for the CALL instruction and LD instruction described above. can be used to specify an address and call a subroutine, and a special LD command can be used to read specific game data and non-game data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c.

In the non-game program, the normal CALL instruction is used for the aforementioned CALL instruction, but the CALLV instruction, which is a special CALL instruction, is not used, and the address is specified using the normal CALL instruction. Although a subroutine may be called, a special CALL command is not used to call the subroutine, so that the game program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by the non-game program.

In addition, in the non-game program, the normal LD instruction and the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, may be used for the above-mentioned LD instruction. It is also possible to read subroutines and data using special LD instructions.

Thus, in this embodiment, the start address of the game program subroutine is stored in the vector table area and specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the special CALL instructions such as the CALLV instruction and the RST instruction. A game program can be called by using a special CALL instruction. When it is possible to call only the game program by the special CALL instruction in this way, the game program is called by the non-game program by using the special CALL instruction by the non-game program, resulting in unintended game play. or the game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, the non-game program calls the program by the normal CALL instruction without using the special CALL instruction, so that the vector table area and the area of the specific address are not used. progress can be prevented.

Also, in this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register), and can read predetermined game data. By using a special LD instruction even in a non-specific program, game data can be easily read while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

In addition, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the game RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register), making it possible to read predetermined game data. However, when reading the game data with a special LD command, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be specified normally, and unintended data There is a risk that it will be read out. On the other hand, by making the non-game program read data by the normal LD instruction instead of the LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction, the specific value was damaged when the game program was switched to the non-game program. Even in this case, data is read from the non-game program by specifying the game RAM area, so that unintended data can be prevented from being read.

In this embodiment, an instruction that can be executed by the main control unit 41 is a save instruction that saves the values of the registers that the main control unit 41 has in a stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. , the values of the registers saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of saving, and set in the register corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding register and a return instruction for returning the state of to the state when it was saved by the save instruction.

The save instructions are the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) for saving the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41, and and a second save instruction (PUSH AF) for saving the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second save instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing the save instruction in the game program, it is possible to save the value of the register in the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program, and executing the save instruction in the non-game program. , it is possible to save the value of the register in the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program.

The return instruction includes a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all the registers that the main control unit 41 has, and Among them, a second return instruction (POP AF) for setting and restoring the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for the flag register in which the calculation result is stored is included. The first return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 2 bytes, and the second return instruction is an instruction requiring a program capacity of 1 byte. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and returned. It is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-game program, call the value of the register saved from the non-game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-game program, and store it in the corresponding register It is possible to set and restore.

[Regarding the relationship between the game area and the non-game area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and executes the process based on the non-game program. Return to processing based on

As shown in FIG. 6, in principle, the main CPU 41a refers to the game data in the game data area to execute the process based on the game program, and also uses the game RAM area as a work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In principle, the main CPU 41a executes processing based on the non-game program by referring to the non-game data in the non-game data area, and uses the non-game RAM area as work. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

Further, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area when executing processing based on the game program, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. Yes, in executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game data area is not referred to and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

In addition, the process based on the game program can refer to only a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating detection of an abnormality) in the non-game RAM area. Based processing can refer to only specific areas of the game RAM area required for non-game programs (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). In addition, a specific area of the non-game RAM area that can be referred to by the process based on the game program, and a specific area of the game RAM area that can be referred to by the process based on the non-game program can be assigned to consecutive address areas. Although it is preferable, a configuration may be adopted in which a part or all of the addresses are assigned to discontinuous address areas.

As described above, in this embodiment, there are provided a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of a game, a game data area for storing readable game data referred to by the game program, and work data referred to by the game program. is stored in a readable and writable manner, a non-game program area that stores a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, and a non-game program that the non-game program refers to Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referred to by the non-game program is stored in a readable and writable manner are allocated separately, the game program, The game data and the work data of the game program and the non-game program, the non-game data and the work data of the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage areas.

In addition, by dividing the game program area and game data area and the non-game program area and non-game data area, the area occupied in the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It becomes easier to identify the relevant data.

Further, in this embodiment, when executing the game program, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area, and when executing the non-game program, it is possible to refer to the game RAM area. To easily use data used by a non-game program when executing the game program, and to easily use data used by the game program when executing the non-game program. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and it is impossible to update the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the process based on the game program can refer to only a specific area necessary for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating detection of an abnormality) in the non-game RAM area. In the processing based on the non-game program, it is possible to refer only to a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area. Therefore, since the data that the game program can refer to in the non-game RAM area and the data that the non-game program can refer to are restricted to a specific area, it is possible to easily specify the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program. be able to.

[About game status]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 41 selects one of RT0 (non-inside), RT1 (inside BB1), RT2 (inside BB2), and special states (BB1, BB2) as the game state. It is possible to control The gaming state is a state in which the types of replay roles to be selected by the internal lottery and the probability of winning the replay role by the internal lottery are common. Although the probability of winning a replay role differs for each game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the probability of winning a replay role is uniform within the same game state.

RT0 (non-internal) is a state in which winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) is not carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started in a state where the slot machine 1 is shipped from the factory and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c storing data relating to the game state is initialized, the slot machine 1 is first controlled during non-internal operation. . Also, when the special state (BB1, BB2) ends, the state is controlled to RT0. Then, RT0 is transferred to RT1 (inside BB1) or RT2 (inside BB2) when a special role is won in the internal lottery in the RT0 game and the special role is lost. is terminated with In addition, in a game in which a special role is won in an internal lottery, the special role wins and the game is also terminated when the state shifts to the special state (BB1, BB2).

Also, in RT0 (non-internal), it is possible to play the game by setting the number of bets of 2 or 3 as the specified number. BB1 can be won as a special role in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 2, while BB2 can be awarded as a special role in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3. It's becoming By playing a game with two bets at RT0 (non-inside), it is possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), while by playing a game with three bets at RT0, RT2 ( inside BB2).

At RT0 (non-internal), the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in the game within a predetermined period, thereby increasing medals per game during the period. While the payout rate exceeds 100%, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. It has become. As will be described later, at RT0, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% by not announcing an operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

RT1 (inside BB1) is a state in which winning of the special combination (BB1) is carried over. It starts when a special role (BB1) wins in an internal lottery at RT0 (non-internal), and ends when the carried-over BB1 wins.

At RT1 (inside BB1), in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, it is possible to shift the interval state described later to an advantageous interval that is advantageous to the player. In a game in which the number of bets of 2 is set as , there is no transition to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, the AT is controlled so that an operation mode that is advantageous to the player can be notified. As a result, in RT1, the player is prompted to set the number of bets to three as the prescribed number and play the game.

In RT1 (inside BB1), the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player in a game within a predetermined period of time. While the payout rate of exceeds 100%, the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100% because the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. In the period during which the operation mode advantageous to the player is reported, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while in the period during which the operation mode beneficial to the player is not reported. , the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100%. In addition, in RT1 (inside BB1), the probability of winning a small win in the internal lottery is the same as RT0 (in non-inside) and RT2 (inside BB2), which will be described later. The probability of winning a game combination (replay combination in this embodiment) in the internal lottery is set higher than RT0 and RT2. The payout rate of medals per game is high, which is an advantage.

In addition, as described above, the special role (BB1) can win in a game in which the prescribed number of bets (two) is set to be the same as the prescribed number in the game that triggered the winning of the special role, In the game where the prescribed number of bets (3) is different from the prescribed number in the game that triggered the winning of the special role, it is not possible to win, and once it is shifted to RT1 , the game is played with the prescribed number of bets set to 3, so that the special combination (BB1) is not won and the RT1 is continued. In addition, as will be described later, in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 2 in RT1, the probability of not winning any combination in the internal lottery is 0. It is becoming difficult to let BB1, who is in the game, win a prize. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, most of the game is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1). , 1 to 6), determines whether or not to control to AT in RT1, for example, whether to control to AT so that the payout rate of medals according to each set value becomes a value determined according to each set value By setting the probability of winning the AT lottery, etc., the payout rate of medals is set according to the set value, and it is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1). It is

In this embodiment, in RT1 in which BB1 is carried over, as compared with RT2 in which RT0 and BB2 are carried over, the payout rate of medals per game during a predetermined period is higher. Although the ratio is a proper configuration, the right to be controlled can be given to AT in RT1 where BB1 is carried over, whereas the right to be controlled by AT can be granted in RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over. By not granting it, the payout rate of medals is set to be appropriate, and in RT1 where BB1 is carried over, the right to be controlled by AT is granted under conditions that are more preferential than RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over. By doing so, the medal payout rate may be made appropriate.

In addition, since the payout rate of medals is set according to the set value on the premise that it is controlled to RT1 (inside BB1), when the game state is controlled to a game state other than RT1, the payout of medals is performed. There is a possibility that the rate will deviate from the designed payout rate, so it is preferable to control to RT1 as much as possible. For this reason, in the present embodiment, a recommended operation mode recommended to the player and a special It is different from the operation mode of winning a winning combination (BB1). That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode in RT1, the special combination (BB1) is not won.

RT2 (inside BB2) is a state in which winning of the special combination (BB2) is carried over. It starts when the special combination (BB2) wins in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-internal), and ends when the carry-over BB2 wins.

As described above, the special role (BB2) can win in a game in which the prescribed number of bets (three) is the same as the prescribed number in the game that triggered the winning of the special role. In games where the prescribed number of bets (two) is different from the prescribed number in the game that triggered the winning of the role, no prizes will be won, and in RT2, the prescribed number is three. By setting the number of bets and playing the game, it is possible to cause the winning BB2 to win and shift to the special state (BB2).

In RT2 (inside BB2), regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 2 or 3 as the specified number, the interval state is not changed to the advantageous interval, and RT2 is terminated. to move to RT1. As a result, the game is not played as much as possible in game states other than RT1 where the medal payout rate corresponds to the set value as described above, and the medal payout rate is set as designed. .

In addition, in RT2 (inside BB2), in a game in which the number of bets is set to 3 as the prescribed number, it is possible to win the winning BB2, and RT2 is terminated, and BB2 and RT0 are placed. By shifting to RT1 after that, it is possible to control the game state so that the payout rate of medals becomes the payout rate as designed.

The special state includes BB1 which is controlled with the winning of the special role BB1 and BB2 which is controlled with the winning of the special role BB2. The special states (BB1, BB2) are games that are more advantageous to the player than other game states (non-internal (RT0), internal (RT1, RT2) by increasing the probability of winning a small winning combination in the internal lottery). BB1 and BB2 are game states that end when a predetermined termination condition (in this embodiment, the total number of medals paid out exceeds a specified number) is met. is a high probability (1/1) higher than the state not controlled by BB1 and BB2, but the payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%.

BB1 is started when BB1 wins in a game in which special role BB1 wins in the internal lottery of RT0 (non-inside), or when BB1 wins in RT1 (inside BB1). is satisfied (for example, the total number of medals paid out during the special state exceeds a predetermined number). In addition, BB2 is started when BB2 wins in a game in which BB2 wins an internal lottery in RT0 (non-internal), or when BB2 wins in RT2 (inside BB2). , the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, the total number of medals paid out during the special state exceeds a predetermined number, which may be the same condition as the end condition of BB1, or may be a different condition) is terminated. After completion of BB1 and BB2, both are shifted to RT0 (non-internal).

In this embodiment, the special states (BB1, BB2) are configured to be continuously controlled to the same game state. It is composed of a general game and an RB that is transferred when the RB is won and the symbol combination of the RB is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It may be configured to be controlled as much as possible.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a game in which a special role is carried over, if the specified number of bets corresponding to the special role carried over is not set, the special role carried over is not won. It has become. As a result, in RT1, which is a gaming state in which the winning of BB1 is carried over, the game is played with the number of bets of 3 selected, and no combination is won in the internal lottery (not winning). Even if BB1 wins, the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

Further, in this embodiment, when BB1 is carried over and the gaming state shifts to RT1 as will be described later, in RT1 the internal lottery is disabled in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 2. A replay combination or a minor combination is always won without winning, that is, losing, and BB1 is never won by giving priority to control for arranging the winning replay combination or minor combination. More specifically, the constituent symbols of the replay combination are arranged so as to be within the retraction range on any reel, and the constituent symbols of the special combination are arranged within the retraction range of the constituent symbols of the minor combination on any reel. Therefore, BB1 does not line up on the pay line LN and BB1 does not win by giving priority to the control of aligning the winning replay combination or minor combination. Further, as described above, in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to three, control is performed so that BB1 does not win. Therefore, once BB1 is won and carried over, the game state shifts to RT1, and even if the game is played with the number of bets of 2, the number of bets of 3 is set and the game is played. However, RT1 at which the payout rate of medals is appropriate is maintained.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1) in most of the game as described above. Then, in RT1, it is determined whether to control to AT, for example, whether to control to AT so that the payout rate of medals according to 1 to 6) becomes a value determined according to each set value. By setting the probability of winning the AT lottery, etc., the payout rate of medals is set according to the set value, and the payout rate of medals is set appropriately in RT1 (inside BB1). Designed. Then, when the medal payout rate is controlled to RT1 at which it is appropriate, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be lit. Accordingly, by confirming the lighting state of the state display LED 17, it is possible to confirm that the slot machine 1 is in a state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

A predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, the lighting state is controlled by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 41 sets a predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 when it determines that the special combination (BB1) has been won in the internal lottery process that is included in the main process described later and performs an internal lottery. By doing so, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be lit at the start of the game in which the special combination (BB1) is won. Then, when the winning special combination (BB1) wins, by initializing the output buffer of the status display LED 17 and setting the initial value (0), the special combination (BB1) wins at the end of the game. The state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off. To maintain the state in which the predetermined value (1) is set without initializing the output buffer of the state display LED 17 when the special combination (BB1) is not won at the end of the game and winning is carried over. In the state (RT1) in which the winning of the special combination (BB1) is carried over, the state display LED 17 is always maintained in a lighting state.

Further, when the special combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the winning of the special combination (BB2) is carried over, the main control unit 41 stores a predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17. The state display LED 17 is controlled to turn off while maintaining the state where the initial value (0) is set without setting.

Further, when the main control unit 41 controls the slot machine 1 to the setting confirmation state in which the setting value currently set in the slot machine 1 can be confirmed, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 is kept in the state before being shifted to the setting confirmation state. is maintained, and when a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state even during the period of control to the setting confirmation state. It is designed to be

Further, when the game state is controlled to RT1, the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the state display LED 17, and the state display LED 17 is controlled to be lit, the state is changed to the setting change state. Even after the end of the advantageous section, the game state is maintained at RT1 and the state display LED 17 is maintained in the lighting state.

In this way, when a specific winning combination (BB1) is won and carried over, the state display LED 17 is controlled to light up and the state is displayed, so that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is displayed. is set, it is notified that the winning of the specific special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over. In addition, once the status display is started, it continues even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, so even if it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a specific special role ( It can be confirmed that the winning of BB1) is carried over.

In addition, in a game in which a specific special role (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 starts the state display before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, When the winning combination (BB1) is won, the status display is ended, and when the special winning combination (BB1) is not won in the game, the status display is continued. As a result, in a game in which a specific special role (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the state display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective. is confirmed, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R can be operated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8, when the state is changed to the setting change state under the control of RT1, or when the advantageous section ends, etc., a predetermined area of the RAM 41c which is initialized has a section display LED 19. While information about the advantageous section such as the output buffer of is included, information about the game state such as the output buffer of the state display LED 17, the winning flag of the special combination and the flag indicating the game state is not included. After the power is cut off in the state, even if the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed, or if the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section is ended and the section is displayed. can be terminated while RT1 is maintained, so that it is not necessary to perform an operation to set the game state to RT1 each time the display of the advantageous section and the section is terminated.

On the other hand, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when the setting change state is entered while being controlled in a game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1, an output buffer for the state display LED 17, Since information related to the game state is included, if the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed after the power is cut off while the game state is controlled to a game state other than RT1, the game state before the power cut will be restored. If it is controlled to RT2, BB1, BB2, the game state before the power cut-off is not maintained, and RT0, that is, non-internal state is set in any case. Therefore, even if the state is erroneously shifted to RT2, BB1, or BB2, the state can be shifted to RT0 by shifting to the setting change state without performing work for shifting to RT0 by itself.

[Regarding production in non-inside]
As shown in FIG. 9A, when the game state is controlled to RT0 (not inside), the main control unit 41 turns off the state display LED, and the sub-control unit 91 performs the normal effect. Execute. The normal effect is a effect executed in the non-AT state which occupies the majority after the shift to RT1.

In a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (not internal), when the game start operation is performed and BB1 wins the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 executes the control as shown in FIG. controls the state display LED 17 to light up at the start of the game in which BB1 wins. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command capable of specifying the winning of BB1 after the internal lottery. Then, when the sub-control part 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB1, it executes the specific performance of displaying the white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51 while continuing the normal performance.

In a game in which BB1 wins, if a stop operation is performed to prevent BB1 from winning, and when all the reels stop, BB1 does not win and the winning flag of BB1 is carried over, the process shown in FIG. As shown, the main control unit 41 keeps the status display LED 17 in the lighting state. Also, at this time, the main control section 41 transmits to the sub-control section 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 did not win. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB1 has not won a prize, the state where the winning flag of BB1 is carried over by maintaining the state of continuing the specific effect. That is, it is suggested that the game state is RT1 (internal). After that, when the next game start operation is performed, that is, when the internal winning command for the next game is received, the sub-control unit 91 ends the specific effect, while the main control unit 41 starts the next game. Even if the start operation is performed, the lighting state of the state display LED 17 is continued as long as RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained, thereby informing that the game state is RT1 (inside BB1).

On the other hand, in a game in which BB1 wins, when BB1 wins when all the reels are stopped and the win flag of BB1 is not carried over, the main control unit 41, as shown in FIG. , the final stop operation, that is, at the timing after the stop operation of the last reel to be stopped, the state display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off. Also, at this time, the main control section 41 transmits to the sub-control section 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 has won a prize. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning judgment command and specifies that BB1 has won a prize, the sub-control unit 91 displays a special image on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51 in a mode different from the normal presentation. By executing the special performance to cause the game, it is informed that BB1 has won a prize, that is, the gaming state has not become RT1 (inside BB1). After that, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special effect until the special state (BB1) due to the winning of BB1 ends, the special state (BB1) ends, and the game state becomes RT0 (non-internal), Execute normal production again.

In addition, when the game start operation is performed in the state where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), and BB2 wins the internal lottery, the main control is executed as shown in FIG. 10(d). The unit 41 keeps the state display LED 17 in the off state at the start of the game in which BB2 wins. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command that can specify the winning of BB2 after the internal lottery. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB2, it does not execute the specific effect and continues the normal effect.

In a game in which BB2 is won or in a game in which BB2 is carried over, if BB2 wins when all the reels are stopped, the main control unit 41 performs a final stop operation as shown in FIG. 10(e). At a later timing, a winning determination command that can specify that BB2 has won is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. - 特許庁Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB2 has won a prize, the sub-control unit 91 executes a special effect in the same manner as when BB1 specifies that a prize has been won, so that BB2 wins a prize. That is, the game state is not RT1 (inside BB1). After that, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special effect until the special state (BB2) due to the winning of BB2 ends, the special state (BB2) ends, and the game state becomes RT0 (non-internal), Execute normal production again.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 always executes the normal production in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), and executes the special production only when BB1 is won, and the internal lottery including BB2 is executed. The special effect is not executed except when BB1 is won. Therefore, it is possible to specify that BB1 has been won by executing the specific effect when the game start operation is performed.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a winning combination suggesting effect that suggests a winning combination based on the result of the internal lottery specified from the internal winning command when the game state is RT1 (inside BB1). The winning combination indication effect is, as shown in FIG. 11(a), an effect suggesting a winning combination by displaying a color navigation image corresponding to the result of the internal lottery on the liquid crystal display 51, and FIG. 11(b). ), by displaying a red color navigation image (red navigation image), it is suggested that one of the cherry 1 to 3 will be won, and a green color navigation image (green navigation image) is displayed. The winning of the watermelon described later is suggested, and by displaying the yellow color navigation image (yellow navigation image), the winning of the common multi-sheet bell described later is suggested, and the blue color navigation image (blue navigation image) is displayed. As a result, winning of replays 1 and 2, which will be described later, is suggested, and by displaying a white color navigation image (white navigation image), it is suggested that neither a small winning combination nor a replay winning combination is won. Of these, the winning combination suggestion effect in which the white navigation image is displayed is the same effect as the above-described specific effect. That is, the sub-control unit 91 controls the game state to RT1 (inside BB1) as a specific effect to be executed when BB1 is won in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (inside BB1). The same effect as the winning combination suggesting effect that can be executed in the situation where the winning combination is present is executed.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is designed so that the payout rate of medals is appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1) as described above. On the other hand, at the time of shipment from the factory or in a state in which the game state data is initialized, the game state is RT0 (non-internal). , it is necessary to shift the game state to RT1 (during the inside of BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate, but if BB1 wins in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (during non-inside) At the start of the game in which BB1 wins, the state display LED 17 changes from the off state to the on state, and a specific effect is executed in which a white navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby specifying that BB1 has won. Since it is possible to prompt a stop operation in which BB1 does not win a prize, the work of shifting to RT1 (inside BB1) can be efficiently performed.

On the other hand, if BB2 wins in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the status display LED 17 does not turn on at the start of the game in which BB2 wins, and the liquid crystal display 51 Since the specific effect of displaying the white navigation image is not executed, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that BB1 has won although BB2 has won.

Further, the specific effect is the same effect as the winning combination suggestion effect which can be executed in the situation where the game state is controlled to RT1 (during the inside of BB1), and the game state is controlled to RT0 (during non-inside). It is possible not only to suggest that BB1 is won in a situation where the player is in a state where the player is in the BB1 state, but also to suggest that the result of the internal lottery is a loss in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (during the inside of BB1). Waste of production can be omitted.

In addition, in the game in which BB1 wins, if BB1 wins, that is, if it is not possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific effect ends at the timing after the final stop operation of the game. On the other hand, in the game in which BB1 wins, if BB1 does not win after the final stop operation and the winning flag of BB1 is carried over to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific effect continues thereafter. After the final stop operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the transition to RT1 (inside BB1) has occurred depending on whether or not the specific effect continues.

In addition, when BB1 wins, the timing at which the specific effect ends may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing at which the final stop operation is started, the timing at which the final stop operation is canceled, or the corresponding timing. It may be the later timing of the timing at which the reel to be played is stopped.

In addition, when BB1 wins and shifts to the special state (BB1) or when BB2 wins and shifts to the special state (BB2), the mode of performance is different from the normal performance. A special effect is executed to display a special image in the entire display area of , and RT0 (non It is possible to prompt the player to move to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

In addition, when BB1 wins and shifts to the special state (BB1), the special performance is started at the timing after the final stop operation that triggered the win of BB1, so BB1 wins and the special state (BB1). You can clearly recognize that you have moved to

The same applies when BB2 wins and shifts to the special state (BB2), and since the special effect is started at the timing after the final stop operation that triggered BB2 to win, BB2 wins and moves to the special state. It is possible to clearly recognize that the user has shifted to (BB2).

In addition, when BB1 or BB2 wins, the timing at which the special effect starts may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing at which the final stop operation is started, or the timing at which the final stop operation is released. Alternatively, it may be the timing at which the corresponding reel is stopped, whichever is later.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing a special effect of displaying a special image on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that RT0 (during non-inside), which is a prerequisite for moving to RT1 (during inside BB1), is not performed. However, by controlling the lighting mode of the LED to a special mode different from the normal effect, or by controlling the output mode of the sound effect to a special mode different from the normal effect, the RT1 (inside the BB1 It may be a configuration that suggests that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is a prerequisite for shifting to middle). can be prompted to move to RT1 (inside BB1) where

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal) and BB2 is won, the normal effect is continued, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and specifies the winning of BB2 in a situation where the game state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), that is, when the winning flag of BB2 is carried over, It is good also as composition which performs special production. Further, in such a configuration, the special performance may be continuously executed even in RT2 (inside BB2) in which the win flag of BB2 is carried over. With such a configuration, even when the game state is controlled to RT2 (inside BB2), the effect is different from the normal effect, and the special image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. is executed, and by suggesting that it is not RT0 (during non-internal), which is a prerequisite for shifting to RT1 (during BB1's internal), the transition is made to RT0 (during non-internal), Further, it is possible to prompt the player to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

In addition, as described above, in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized in the case of shifting to the setting change state while being controlled in a game state (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1, there is a special prize Since information related to the game state such as the winning flag and the flag indicating the game state is included, after the power is cut off while the game state is controlled to a game state other than RT1, the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed. In this case, if the game state before the power cut was controlled to RT2, BB1, or BB2, the game state before the power cut is not maintained, and RT0, that is, non-internal in any case. For this reason, even if it is shifted to RT2, BB1, or BB2 by mistake, it is possible to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) by resetting the set value without having to shift to RT0 by itself. It is possible to shift to RT0 (non-inside), which is a premise, and it becomes easy to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate. In addition, since the predetermined area of the RAM 41c initialized when the state is changed to the setting change state under the control of RT1 (inside the BB1) does not include information regarding the game state, If the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed after the power is turned off in the state controlled by the internal After shifting to RT1 (inside middle of BB1), even if the setting value is set, there is no need to perform work for shifting to RT1 (inside middle of BB1) again.

[Regarding internal lottery target roles]
The internal lottery winning combination to be selected in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 28. FIG.

The internal lottery target combination includes a plurality of internal lottery target combinations. Each internal lottery target combination includes one or a plurality of winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the winning combinations included in the internal lottery target combination are simultaneously won. .

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 30, internal lottery target roles include Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1. , chance replay 2, watermelon, common 1-piece role, common 3-piece role, common multi-piece bell, multi-piece bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, multi-piece bell 123D, multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-blade 132C, multi-blade 132D, multi-blade 213A, multi-blade 213B, multi-blade 213C, multi-blade bell 213D, multi-blade 231A, multi-blade 231B, multi-blade bell 231C, multi-blade bell 231D, multiple bells 312A, multiple bells 312B, multiple bells 312C, multiple bells 312D, multiple bells 321A, multiple bells 321B, multiple bells 321C, multiple bells 321D, BB1, BB2, A in BB, B in BB is included.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 24, in a game in which a stipulated number of bets is set to 3 for each combination excluding BB1, BB2, A in BB, and B in BB among the internal lottery target combinations, slot machines are used. Regardless of the setting values (1 to 6) set to 1, the lottery is applied when the game state is RT0, RT1, or RT2, and the lottery is not applied when the game state is BB1 or BB2. It has become. In addition, in a game in which the number of bets is set to 3 as the specified number, BB1 among the internal lottery target combinations is set to the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled game state ( RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2) are not subject to lottery. BB2, among the internal lottery target hands, is set to RT0 regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3. When it is controlled, it becomes a lottery object of the internal lottery, while when the game state is controlled to RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 other than RT0, it is not a lottery object of the internal lottery. In addition, among the internal lottery target hands, A in BB and B in BB are set regardless of the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which the number of bets is set to 3 as the prescribed number. When the game state is BB1, BB2, it becomes a lottery object, while when the game state is controlled to RT0, RT1, RT2 other than BB1, BB2, it is not a lottery object of the internal lottery. In addition, the replay 1B among the internal lottery target hands is controlled regardless of the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which the number of bets is set to 3 as the prescribed number. The probability of winning the internal lottery differs depending on the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2). In addition, in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, the probability of not winning any of the internal lottery-targeted hands in the internal lottery (non-winning) is the set value set in the slot machine 1 (1 to 6) Regardless of the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the predetermined probability is greater than 0.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, of internal lottery target roles, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay 2, BB1, Each combination except BB2, A in BB, and B in BB can be played regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which the number of bets is set to 2 as the specified number. When the state is RT0, RT1, or RT2, the lottery will be made. In addition, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 among the internal lottery target roles have a prescribed number of bets of 2. In the set game, regardless of the set values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled game states (RT0, RT1, RT2), the lottery is not applied. In addition, in a game in which the number of bets set for BB1 is set to 2 as the specified number, the gaming state of BB1 is set to RT0 regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When it is controlled, it becomes the lottery object of the internal lottery, while when the game state is controlled to RT1 or RT2 other than RT0, it is not the lottery object of the internal lottery. In addition, in a game in which the number of bets is set to 2 as the prescribed number, BB2 among the internal lottery target hands is the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled game state ( RT0, RT1, RT2) are not subject to lottery. In addition, the replay 1A among the internal lottery target roles is controlled regardless of the setting values (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game in which the number of bets is set to 2 as the prescribed number. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on whether the game state is non-internal (RT0) or internal (RT1, RT2). In addition, in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 2, the probability of not winning any of the internal lottery target hands in the internal lottery (not winning) is the set value (1 to 6) and regardless of the game state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), it is set to 0. When the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the prescribed number is only 3, so the prescribed number of bets is not set to 2, and the internal lottery is performed when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2. A in the BB and B in the BB, which are subject to the lottery, are not subject to the lottery of the internal lottery in the game in which the number of bets is set to 2 as the prescribed number.

When the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the game can be played when the prescribed number of bets is set to 3. Also, as shown in FIGS. When , and when it is BB2, A in BB with payout of 8 medals and B in BB with payout of 1 medal are subject to lottery in the internal lottery. On the other hand, the winning probabilities of A in BB and B in BB differ depending on whether the game state is BB1 or BB2. Specifically, either when the game state is BB1 or when it is BB2, either A in BB or B in BB is won, but when the game state is BB1 , is set high for A in BB with payout of 8 medals, and the payout rate of medals is higher when the game state is BB1 than when it is BB2. This means that BB2 wins when the game is played when the number of bets is set to three. While there is a possibility that the number of bets may increase, BB1 is won when the game is played when the number of bets is set to 2, and in this case, navigation notification is performed as described later. This is to prevent the payout rate of medals from increasing due to the navigation notification, and to prevent the payout rate of medals from being extremely low even if the game is played with the number of bets of two. On the other hand, by making the payout rate of medals when the gaming state is BB2 relatively low, even if the game is played when the number of bets is set to 3 and the navigation notification is performed, This is also to prevent the payout rate of medals from becoming extremely high. In this way, when the game state is BB1 and when the game state is BB2, the winning prize to be the lottery target of the internal lottery is common, and when the game state is BB1 and when the game state is BB2, the internal By making the winning probabilities different between A in BB and B in BB, which are the lottery targets of the lottery, the winnings to be the lottery targets of the internal lottery are changed depending on whether the game state is BB1 or BB2. It is possible to adjust the payout rate of medals in BB1 and the payout rate of medals in BB2.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is BB1 and BB2, only A in BB with the payout of 8 medals and B in BB with the payout of 1 medal are performed. The internal lottery is a lottery target, that is, one of BB A and BB B always wins, but at least when the game state is BB1 and BB2, the internal lottery In a configuration in which target lottery results are the same, if at least part of the lottery results have different winning probabilities, the internal lottery becomes a lottery target when the game state is BB1 and when it is BB2. It is possible to adjust the payout rate of medals in BB1 and the payout rate of medals in BB2 without changing the prize winning, the probability of winning is different for some lottery results, and the winning probability is different for other lottery results. Even if the probability is the same, the same effect can be obtained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, when the game state is BB1, the winning probability of A in BB and B in BB is the same regardless of the set value, but when the game state is BB2, The winning probabilities of A in BB and B in BB are different according to the set value. Specifically, when the gaming state is BB2, either A in BB or B in BB is won. The winning rate is set to be high, and the higher the set value, the higher the medal payout rate. When the game is played with the number of bets of 2, the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value. The higher the set value, the higher the medal payout rate for RT0 to RT2. This is to ensure that the magnitude relationship with the payout rate of medals in ~RT2 is not reversed regardless of the set value. In this way, the prize winning to be the lottery target of the internal lottery is the same when the gaming state is BB1 and BB2, and when the gaming state is BB1, the internal lottery is selected regardless of the set value. The winning probabilities are the same for target A in BB and B in BB, while when the gaming state is BB2, the winning probability for A in BB and B in BB, which are the targets of the internal lottery, is set according to the set value. By making them different, the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB2 is adjusted without changing the prize winning to be the lottery target of the internal lottery between when the game state is BB1 and when it is BB2. be able to.

In this embodiment, when the gaming state is BB1, regardless of the set value, the winning probability is the same for A in BB and B in BB, which are objects of the internal lottery. , A in BB and B in BB, which are objects of lottery in internal lottery according to set values, have different winning probabilities, but when the game state is BB1, they become objects of lottery in internal lottery according to set values. While the winning probabilities are different between A in BB and B in BB, when the game state is BB2, the winning probability is set to be the same for A in BB and B in BB, which are objects of internal lottery, regardless of the set value. Alternatively, whether the game state is BB1 or BB2, the odds of winning may be different between A in BB and B in BB, which are objects of the internal lottery, according to the set value. Even with such a configuration, the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB1 or BB2 can be changed without changing the prize winning to be the lottery target of the internal lottery depending on whether the game state is BB1 or BB2. can be adjusted.

Further, in this embodiment, only A in BB with payout of 8 medals and B in BB with payout of 1 medal are performed when the gaming state is BB1 and BB2. The internal lottery is a lottery target, that is, either A in BB or B in BB always wins. When the game state is BB1 or BB2 in a configuration in which target lottery results are common and the game state is BB1 if the winning probability is different according to a set value for at least part of the lottery results. And when it is BB2, it is possible to adjust the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB1 or BB2 without changing the prize winning that is the lottery target of the internal lottery. The same effect can be obtained even if the winning probability differs depending on the set value for the other lottery results, and the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value for the other lottery results.

As shown in FIG. 27, a predetermined combination number is assigned in advance to each internal lottery target combination. Replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay 2, watermelon, common 1 role, common 3 roles, A value within the range of 1 to 16 is assigned to each combination number of the common multi-bell. In addition, multi-sheet bell 123A, multi-sheet bell 123B, multi-sheet bell 123C, multi-sheet bell 123D, multi-sheet bell 132A, multi-sheet bell 132B, multi-sheet bell 132C, multi-sheet bell 132D, multi-sheet bell 213A, multi-sheet bell 213B, multi-blade 213C, multi-blade 213D, multi-blade 231A, multi-blade 231B, multi-blade 231C, multi-blade bell 231D, multi-blade 312A, multi-blade 312B, multi-blade bell 312C, multi-blade bell 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, and multi-bell 321D are allotted a value within the range of 17-40. The winning combination number of BB1 is 41, and the winning combination number of BB2 is 42. The winning number of A in BB is 43, and the winning number of B in BB is 44.

Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 are replayed as winning hands. In a game that includes a playing role and wins the internal lottery target role, the replaying role wins and the replay is awarded. Hereinafter, replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, and chance replay 2 may be collectively referred to as replay roles. .

In addition, among the internal lottery target roles, watermelon, common 1-card role, common 3-card role, and common multi-card bell each include a small role as a winning role. By winning a prize, a predetermined number (for example, 3 watermelons, 1 common 1-card role, 3 common 3-card roles, 8 common multi-card bells, 8 A in BB, 1 B in BB ) medals are paid out.

In addition, multi-sheet bell 123A, multi-sheet bell 123B, multi-sheet bell 123C, multi-sheet bell 123D, multi-sheet bell 132A, multi-sheet bell 132B, multi-sheet bell 132C, multi-sheet bell 132D, multi-sheet bell 213A, multi-sheet bell 213B, multi-blade 213C, multi-blade 213D, multi-blade 231A, multi-blade 231B, multi-blade 231C, multi-blade bell 231D, multi-blade 312A, multi-blade 312B, multi-blade bell 312C, multi-blade bell 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, multi-bell 321D, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in a predetermined operation mode (in this embodiment, the order of operation) assigned to each role. is operated, among the winning combinations included in each combination, an increasing combination that pays out more medals (eight in this embodiment) than the number of bets (three) is won. When the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode other than the operation mode for the operation mode, the number of medals equal to or less than the number of bets (in this embodiment, one medal) among the winning combinations included in each of the winning combinations is obtained. This is a combination in which the paid-out decreasing combination may win a prize, but in which case none of the winning combinations may win a prize. Therefore, multi-sheet bell 123A, multi-sheet bell 123B, multi-sheet bell 123C, multi-sheet bell 123D, multi-sheet bell 132A, multi-sheet bell 132B, multi-sheet bell 132C, multi-sheet bell 132D, multi-sheet bell 213A, multi-sheet Bell 213B, multi-bell 213C, multi-bell 213D, multi-bell 231A, multi-bell 231B, multi-bell 231C, multi-bell 231D, multi-bell 312A, multi-bell 312B, multi-bell 312C, multi-bell When the bell 312D, the multi-bell 321A, the multi-bell 321B, the multi-bell 321C, and the multi-bell 321D are won, whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in an operation mode corresponding to the type of winning combination. It is possible to change the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out.

Multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell 213B, multi-blade 213C, multi-blade 213D, multi-blade 231A, multi-blade 231B, multi-blade 231C, multi-blade bell 231D, multi-blade 312A, multi-blade 312B, multi-blade bell 312C, multi-blade bell 312D, multi-blade bell 321A, multi-blade bell 321B, multi-blade bell 321C, and multi-blade bell 321D may be collectively referred to as a multi-blade pushing starting role.

When one of the winning combinations of the multiple pressing order is won, there are many operation modes in which the winning combination included in the winning combination of the multiple pressing order can be won, that is, an operation mode that is advantageous to the player. In the sheet bell 123A, the multi-sheet bell 123B, the multi-sheet bell 123C, and the multi-sheet bell 123D, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. It is an operation in order (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-center-right stop operation), and in the multi-blade bell 132A, the multi-blade bell 132B, the multi-blade bell 132C, and the multi-blade bell 132D, the left reel 2L is stopped first. , the right reel 2R is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left and right middle stop operation). 213B, the multi-blade bell 213C, and the multi-blade bell 213D are operated in the operation order of stopping the middle reel 2C first, stopping the left reel 2L second, and stopping the right reel 2R third (hereinafter referred to as In the multi-blade bell 312A, the multi-blade bell 312B, the multi-blade bell 312C, and the multi-blade bell 312D, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, and the right reel 2R is stopped second. , and the left reel 2L is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a middle right/left stop operation). In the sheet bell 231D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-left middle stop operation). ), and in the multi-sheet bell 321A, the multi-sheet bell 321B, the multi-sheet bell 321C, and the multi-sheet bell 321D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped. This is an operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-center-left stop operation) in the order of operations to stop it third.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can shift a later-described game section to an advantageous section when a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in an internal lottery. In a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 2, even if any internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section. In addition, in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, an internal lottery results in an advantage zone non-transfer combination (replay 1A, replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F in this embodiment). , Replay 2) is won, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section, while the advantageous section transition role (in this embodiment, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, watermelon, common 1-card hand, common 3-card hand, common multi-card bell, multi-card order), the game section is shifted to an advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to shift the game section to the advantageous section by winning a predetermined internal lottery target combination in the internal lottery. A lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be performed when the target combination is won, and if the lottery is won, the player may shift to the advantageous section.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control section 41 can transmit to the sub-control section 91 an internal winning command including group information capable of specifying the type of the internal lottery winning combination won in the internal lottery. The group information includes special role information capable of specifying the winning status of the special role and general role information capable of specifying the winning status of the general role. In the special award information of the group information, 0 is set when the special award (BB1, BB2) is not won in the internal lottery, 1 is set when the special award BB1 is won, and 1 is set when the special award BB2 is won. 2 is set when General role information of group information is internal lottery Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, common 1-card role, common 3-card role, common multi-card bell, A in BB, B in BB When any one of them is won, the winning combination number is set, and the winning combination is set by internal lottery. When a winning combination is won, a common 17 is set regardless of which combination included in the multiple winning combination is won, and any general combination is won by an internal lottery. 0 is set when there is none.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can transmit a test signal capable of specifying the combination number of the internal lottery target combination won in the internal lottery to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. The test signal includes special winning combination information capable of specifying the winning status of the special winning combination and general winning combination information capable of specifying the winning status of the regular winning combination. The special role information is set to 0 when the special role (BB1, BB2) is not won in the internal lottery, 1 is set when the special role BB1 is won, and 1 is set when the special role BB2 is won. 2 is set. For the general role information, when any internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, the role number of the winning role is set, and when no general role is won in the internal lottery, 0 is set. is set.

By connecting to the slot machine 1 and automatically performing a simulation test, the testing device can collect medals between specific games (for example, between 400 games, between 1600 games, between 6400 games, and between 17600 games) in the slot machine 1. It is possible to aggregate the total number of inserted and total number of payouts, calculate the payout rate for each specific game, and check whether or not the payout rate falls within a predetermined range of specified values. It is a device.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control section 41 can set a flag category (FC) to which the type of internal lottery target combination won in the internal lottery belongs. The flag category can be used for, for example, an AT lottery, a navigation stock lottery, an extra state lottery, etc., which will be described later. The flag category (FC) is that the result of the internal lottery was not won, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Common 1-card role, Common 3-card role, Common multi-card bell , 0 is set when it is the order of multiple pressings, 1 is set when the result of the internal lottery is chance replay 1, watermelon, 2 is set when the result of the internal lottery is 1 cherry, If the result of the internal lottery is Cherry 2 and Chance Replay 2, 3 is set, and if the internal lottery result is Cherry 3, 4 is set. In this way, the flag category (FC) to which the type of internal lottery target combination won in the internal lottery belongs is set, and a common flag category (FC) is set for a plurality of types of internal lottery target combination. (FC), there is no need to set individual probabilities for all internal lottery target combinations, and it is sufficient to set probabilities for each flag category (FC). In particular, as in the present embodiment, the winning probability in the internal lottery is set high and there are many kinds of internal lottery target roles, such as some re-playing roles and multiple-play winning roles, and non-playing roles with a relatively high winning probability. By setting a common flag category for internal lottery target roles such as winning and common multiple bells, the lottery probability that needs to be set for internal lottery target roles can be greatly reduced.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main control unit 41 can perform navigation notification by controlling the AT. On the other hand, in a game where the number of bets is set to 3 as the prescribed number, the processing related to navigation notification is performed when a predetermined navigation target wins as described later. Navi notification may be performed by In a game in which the number of bets is set to 3, there is a case where navigation notification is executed when, for example, a winning combination of pushing multiple cards wins an internal lottery as a navigation target role.

In addition, in the processing related to the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 determines that the navigation target role has been won in the internal lottery, and when the navigation notification is performed, a stop mode that is advantageous to the player according to the navigation target role is selected. can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when the navigation target role has not been won in the internal lottery, or even if the navigation target role has been won, the navigation notification is made. is not performed, it is possible to transmit to the sub-controller 91 a navigation number that cannot specify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main control unit 41 controls games in which navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, games in which a role other than the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, and internal lottery. 0 is set as the navigation number in a game in which no role is won by the internal lottery. Set up to 6 as the navigation number.

In addition, the main control unit 41 performs a process related to navigation notification, so that a navigation display that can specify a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the navigation target role won in the internal lottery is displayed on the game auxiliary display. 12, it is possible to perform navigation notification for notifying a stop mode that is advantageous for the player. As shown in FIG. 28, there are a game in which navigation notification is not performed even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, a game in which a role other than the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, and any role in the internal lottery wins. In the game in which the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be turned off so as not to display the navigation display, in the game in which the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery and the navigation notification is given, the game is not played. The auxiliary display 12 is controlled to a predetermined lighting state (for example, "12") to display a navigation display corresponding to the winning navigation target combination.

[About navigation notifications and navigation effects]
A mode of navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 and a mode of navigation effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG.

During a predetermined game (from when the reels start spinning to when all the reels stop spinning) in which processing related to navigation notification is performed, the main control unit 41 controls the navigation system that has won the internal lottery. By displaying the navigation display corresponding to the target role on the game auxiliary display 12, it is possible to perform navigation notification for notifying the player of a stop mode that is advantageous to the player in accordance with the navigation target role. Further, the main control unit 41 can transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command including a navigation number that can specify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player at the start of a predetermined game in which processing related to navigation notification is performed. It is possible.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display 51 or the like in a game in which a stop state that is advantageous to the player can be specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41. It can be done using

As shown in FIG. 29, the auxiliary game display device 12 consists of two display devices 12L and 12R that can turn on/off the first to eighth segments respectively. is a display capable of By controlling the predetermined segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode, predetermined numbers (“0” to “9”), symbols (eg, “-”, “.”, etc.), alphabetic characters (eg, “E ”, etc.) in one or two digits, it is possible to display the number of medals paid out (not shown), an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred, and a navigation display that informs by navigation notification. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 30, the main control unit 41 carries out processing related to navigation notification, and during a game in which the navigation number is set to "1", the stop mode that is advantageous for the player is left center right stop operation. During the game in which the navigation display 1 (the display of "12" on the game auxiliary display 12) suggesting that the A navigation display 2 (a display showing "13" on the game auxiliary display 12) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, suggesting that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the left/right center stop operation, and the navigation number is "3". is set, the navigation display 3 (display of "21" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the middle left/right stop operation is displayed as a game auxiliary display. During the game in which the navigator number "4" is set, the navigator display 4 (the game auxiliary display 12 displays " 23") is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to suggest that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the right-left center stop operation during the game in which "5" is set as the navigation number. During the game in which the navigation display 5 (display of "31" on the game auxiliary display 12) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and "6" is set as the navigation number, the stop mode is advantageous for the player. is displayed on the auxiliary game display 12 (indicating that "32" is displayed on the auxiliary game display 12) suggesting that is a right-center-left stop operation.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the sub-control unit 91, during the game in which the navigation number "1" is specified based on the command received from the main control unit 41, stops in a stop mode that is advantageous to the player. is a left-center-right stop operation (for example, display "1" in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8L among the display areas of the liquid crystal display 51, and display corresponding to the stop switch 8C). During the game in which the navigation number "2" is specified by causing the liquid crystal display 51 to display "2" in the area and "3" in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8R, etc.), A navigation image 2 is displayed on a liquid crystal display 51 to suggest that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the left/right center stop operation, and during the game in which the navigation number "3" is specified, the stop advantageous to the player is performed. During the game in which the navigation image 3 suggesting that the mode is the middle left/right stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 and the navigation number "4" is specified, the stop mode advantageous to the player is the middle right/left stop operation. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and during the game in which the navigation number "5" is specified, it is suggested that the stop mode advantageous to the player is the right-left center stop operation. A navigation image 5 is displayed on a liquid crystal display 51, and during a game in which the navigation number "6" is specified, the navigation image 6 is displayed on the liquid crystal display to suggest that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is right-center-left stop operation. It is designed to be displayed on the display device 51 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the navigation notification, as an operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player, the operation order (correct pressing order) is notified. The structure may suggest the operation timings of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player, or the structure that suggests the combination of the operation order and the operation timings of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player. For example, when the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing for a predetermined reel, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the symbol number corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the predetermined reel. By displaying together with the corresponding number or the like, or by displaying the image of the pattern corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the liquid crystal display 51 at the position corresponding to the predetermined reel, it is possible to suggest the operation mode. be.

[About the game section]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control the game section to be either a normal section or an advantageous section.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed, and is started by starting the next game after the advantageous section ends. After that, in the normal section, as described above, the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, and the game is controlled to a gaming state other than the special state (BB1, BB2). The winning game ends. In the normal section, the section display LED 19 is always controlled to be turned off.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the navigation notification may be performed, and is a game section that is more advantageous than the normal section because the navigation notification can be executed. The advantageous section is defined as the winning of an advantageous section transition hand in an internal lottery in a game in which the prescribed number of bets is set to 3 in the normal section and the game is controlled to a gaming state other than the special state (BB1, BB2). It is decided to shift to the advantageous section in , and the next game is started. After that, it ends when predetermined advantageous section end conditions (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are met. In the advantageous section, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized at the start of the game in which the medal payout rate (number of medals paid out/number of bets) can exceed 100% due to the first navigation notification after the start of the advantageous section. A predetermined value (1) different from the value (0) is set, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to light up, thereby starting the section display to notify that the control is in the advantageous section. The output buffer of the section display LED 19 is included in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when the setting change state is entered or when the advantageous section ends. When the advantageous section ends, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized and set to the initial value (0), so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to go out and the section display ends. It's becoming

In the advantageous section, a predetermined navigation condition must be satisfied (in this embodiment, the control is performed in an AT state, which will be described later), the number of bets is set to 3 as the specified number, and the navigation target role is won by an internal lottery. By doing), it is possible to perform navigation notification, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous for the player is notified.

The main control unit 41 then shifts to the AT state in which the AT control is performed when the AT shift condition is satisfied while controlling in the advantageous section. Then, when the AT state is controlled, when the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, the control of the navigation notification (control to display the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation corresponding to the navigation display) It is possible to notify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player by performing control such as transmitting a command that can specify a number, and the advantageous section is compared to the normal section. It becomes an advantageous game section for the player.

End condition 1 is established when the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval) reaches a first prescribed number (1500 games in this embodiment) defined as the upper limit number of games. , The second specified number (in this embodiment, 2395 (upper limit number of 2400) is defined as the upper limit of the net increase in the number of medals after the number of increased or decreased medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the advantageous section. Subtracting the maximum number of payouts (8) in 1 and adding the maximum number (3) used for setting the number of bets) Ending condition 2, the number of games in the advantageous section and a termination condition that can be satisfied regardless of the net increase in number of medals, and an termination condition 3 that is satisfied when a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this embodiment, the AT state termination condition is satisfied) is satisfied. The advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the termination conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied.

In this embodiment, the game section is shifted to the advantageous section by winning a predetermined advantageous section transition combination when the game section is controlled to the normal section. When it is controlled to the normal section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed by winning the advantageous section transition lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the game section is changed to the advantageous section by winning the advantageous section transition lottery. It may be configured to shift to .

[Regarding the flow from normal section to AT state]
Next, the flow until the main control unit 41 performs control from the normal section to the AT state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, when an advantageous zone transition combination is won in a normal zone, the main control unit 41 determines a value from a plurality of predetermined values after the internal lottery and before the reels start spinning. A specified value lottery is performed to determine the value, and the selected specified value is set in the RAM 41c. In the prescribed value lottery, the prescribed value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the type of winning advantageous section transition combination. In particular, when an AT lottery target combination, which will be described later, is won among the advantageous section transition hands, a smaller value is more likely to be determined than when other advantageous section transition hands are won, and the AT lottery is not performed. Even if the AT lottery target combination is won in the normal section, it can be expected that the point value required until the second AT lottery, which will be described later, is performed after shifting to the advantageous section is small.

Next, the main control unit 41 performs an initial value lottery to determine an initial value from a plurality of predetermined values after the specified value lottery and before the reels start rotating, and uses the winning initial value as a point value. It is set in the RAM 41c. In the initial value lottery, the initial value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery, that is, the type of winning advantageous section transition combination. In particular, when an AT lottery target combination, which will be described later, is won among the advantageous section transition hands, a larger value is likely to be determined than when other advantageous section transition hands are won, and the AT lottery is not performed. Even when the AT lottery target combination is won in the normal section, it can be expected that a large initial value is set as the initial value of the point value.

Further, when the advantageous section transition combination is won in the internal lottery, the main control section 41 transmits an internal winning command capable of specifying the winning of the advantageous section transition combination to the sub-control section 91, A prescribed value command capable of specifying the winning prescribed value and an initial value command capable of specifying the winning initial value in the initial value lottery are transmitted to the sub-controller 91, respectively. All of these commands are sent when the game starts.

Further, when the advantageous interval transition combination is won in the normal interval, the main control unit 41 sets the specified value and the initial value as described above, and then makes the transition to the advantageous interval from the next game.

After transitioning to the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 first refers to the value of the ED transition game number counter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the ED transition game number) in each game. The ED transition game number counter is performed in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) after the advantageous interval starts. This is a counter for counting the number of games that have been played, and is also used when determining whether or not a third ED transition condition, which will be described later, has been established. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the ED transition game number counter (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the ED transition game number) has reached the ceiling value (1000 in this embodiment), and the ED transition game number has reached the ceiling value. If so, control is made to the AT state after a premonitory period of a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 sends to the sub-control unit 91 a ceiling reaching command that can specify that the number of games to be transitioned to the ED has reached the ceiling value and a precursor period command that can specify the number of games controlled during the precursor period. Send.

On the other hand, when the number of ED transition games has not reached the ceiling value, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the number of ED transition games has reached the tentative ceiling value (333, 666, 999 in this embodiment). , When the number of ED transition games reaches the tentative ceiling value, a first AT lottery is performed to determine whether or not to control to the AT state. In the 1st AT lottery, the winning probability of the AT state is set higher than in the 2nd AT lottery, which will be described later. It is designed to be expected to be controlled by When the first AT lottery is held, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a first AT lottery result command that can specify the result. Even when the first AT lottery is won, the AT state is controlled after a premonitory period for a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a precursor period command capable of specifying the number of games to be controlled during the precursor period.

In addition, when the number of ED transition games has not reached the tentative ceiling value, and when the first AT lottery is not won, the main control unit 41 determines whether the AT lottery target combination (in this embodiment, the flag category is 1 to 4). It is determined whether or not the role belonging to (cherry 1 to 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon) or replay 1A, replay 2, common single role) was won, and if the AT lottery target role was won, AT A second AT lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to control the state. When the second AT lottery is conducted, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a second AT lottery result command capable of specifying the result. Even when the second AT lottery is won, the AT state is controlled after a premonitory period for a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a precursor period command capable of specifying the number of games to be controlled during the precursor period.

In addition, when the AT lottery target role is not won or when the second AT lottery is not won, the main control unit 41 performs an addition value lottery for determining an addition value to the point value from a plurality of predetermined values. , and the winning value is added to the point value set in the RAM 41c. In the additional value lottery, the additional value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery of the game. In particular, when the AT lottery target role is won, a larger value is likely to be determined than other lottery results, and even if the AT lottery target role is won and the second AT lottery is not won, the points You can expect the value to add up significantly. At this time, the main control section 41 transmits to the sub-control section 91 an addition value command capable of specifying the addition value to be added to the point value.

After adding the point value, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the point value has reached a specified value set in the RAM 41c. , the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery is won, or the point value reaches the specified value set in the RAM 41c.

On the other hand, when the point value reaches the specified value set in the RAM 41c, the main control section 41 performs a third AT lottery to determine whether to control to the AT state. In the 3rd AT lottery, the probability of winning the AT state is set higher than in the 2nd AT lottery, and the point value reaching the specified value is expected to be controlled to the AT state. It's becoming When the 3rd AT lottery is held, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a 3rd AT lottery result command capable of specifying the result.

When the third AT lottery is won, the main control unit 41 performs control to the AT state after a premonitory period of a predetermined number of games. At this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a precursor period command capable of specifying the number of games to be controlled during the precursor period.

Further, after the AT state ends, the main control unit 41 ends the advantageous section and controls the normal section again. At that time, the main control unit 41 initializes the ED transition game number counter and initializes the ED transition game number.

On the other hand, when the 3rd AT lottery is not won, the main control unit 41 conducts the default value lottery and the initial value lottery similar to the case where the advantage zone transition hand is won in the normal zone while maintaining the advantage zone, and wins. The new specified value is set in the RAM 41c, the point value is initialized, and the winning initial value is set again in the RAM 41c as the point value. The lottery, the second AT lottery or the third AT lottery is won and the lottery is repeated until the AT state is controlled.

In addition, in the specified value lottery that is performed when the 3rd AT lottery is not won, the stipulated value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery in the game in which the 3rd AT lottery is performed. If the AT lottery target role is won, it is easier to determine a smaller value than other lottery results, and even if the AT lottery target role is won and the 3rd AT lottery is not won , the point value required until the next 3rd AT lottery is held can be expected to be small.

In addition, in the initial value lottery that is performed when the 3rd AT lottery is not won, the initial value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery in the game in which the 3rd AT lottery is performed. If the AT lottery target role is won, a larger value is likely to be determined than other lottery results, and even if the AT lottery target role is won and the 3rd AT lottery is not won , a large initial value can be expected to be set as the initial value of the point value.

In addition, even if the 3rd AT lottery is not won and the specified value lottery and the initial value lottery are performed, the main control unit 41 can specify the specified value won in the specified value lottery. An initial value command capable of specifying the initial value won in the above is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 respectively.

In addition, when the number of bets is 2 and the gaming state is other than RT1, the ED shift game number counter is not incremented, and the game is played with a smaller number of medals than when the game is played with the number of bets of 3. or the game is played in a game state other than RT1, the ceiling value or the virtual ceiling value is not reached. Further, when the number of bets is 2 and the gaming state is other than RT1, the second AT lottery is not performed even if the AT lottery target combination wins. In addition, when the number of bets is 2, the point value is not added unless the game state is RT1, and the game is played with a smaller number of medals than when the number of bets is 3. The third AT lottery is not performed even if a game is played in a game state other than RT1.

As described above, in this embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, it is performed not only when the second AT lottery is won, which is performed when the AT lottery target combination is won, but also when the number of ED transition games reaches the tentative ceiling value. When winning the 1st AT lottery, or when winning the 3rd AT lottery performed when the points updated in the advantageous section reach a specified value, the AT state is controlled to be advantageous for the player, so the AT is controlled. Even if the lottery target combination is not won, the player can expect to be controlled to the AT state.

Also, when transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section, the stipulated value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the type of advantageous section transition hand that triggered the transition, so the 3rd AT lottery is first performed after shifting to the advantageous section. You can change the period to In addition, since the initial value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the kind of the advantageous section transition combination that triggered the transition to the advantageous section, the point value initially set after transition to the advantageous section can be changed.

Also, after moving to the advantageous section, when the point value reaches the specified value and the 3rd AT lottery is held, if the 3rd AT lottery is not won, the specified value and initial value will be determined again. At that time, the default value that is likely to be determined differs depending on the result of the internal lottery in which the 3rd AT lottery is performed, and the initial value that is likely to be determined in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in which the 3rd AT lottery is performed is different. , After moving to the advantageous section, even if the 3rd AT lottery is not won and the specified value and initial value are determined again, the period until the next 3rd AT lottery is performed can be changed, and the first set It is possible to change the point value.

Also, after shifting to the advantageous section, even if the number of ED transition games that have passed without winning the 1st AT lottery, the 2nd AT lottery, or the 3rd AT lottery has reached the ceiling value, AT Since the state is controlled, it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantageous.

Further, after shifting to the advantageous section, the probability of winning the 3rd AT lottery may be changed according to the number of times the 3rd AT lottery has been performed, and in the case of a specific number of times, it is higher than in the case of another number of times. By increasing the winning probability of the 3rd AT lottery, it is possible to expect that the AT state will be controlled when the point value reaches the specified value for a specific number of times. Furthermore, in the third AT lottery of the predetermined number of times, the AT state may always be won, thereby preventing the player from being extremely disadvantaged.

Further, when the number of bets is 2 and the gaming state is other than RT1, the second AT lottery is not performed even if the AT lottery target combination wins. In addition, when the number of bets is 2, the point value is not added unless the game state is RT1, and the game is played with a smaller number of medals than when the number of bets is 3. The third AT lottery is not performed even if a game is played in a game state other than RT1. In addition, when the number of bets is 2 and the gaming state is other than RT1, the ED shift game number counter is not incremented, and the game is played with a smaller number of medals than when the game is played with the number of bets of 3. or the game is played in a game state other than RT1, the ceiling value or the virtual ceiling value is not reached. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game under the recommended conditions.

In addition, on the condition that the number of bets is 3, the second AT lottery, the addition of the point value, and the update of the ED shift game number counter are performed. You can encourage them to play with numbers.

Also, under the condition that the gaming state is RT1, the second AT lottery, addition of the point value, and updating of the ED shift game number counter are performed, so that the gaming state is RT1 where the medal payout rate is appropriate. can be encouraged to play games.

In addition, when the number of ED transition games reaches the ceiling value, the AT state is controlled, and when the number of ED transition games reaches the temporary ceiling value, the first AT lottery is performed, and as described later, the number of ED transition games is in the AT state. Since it is also used when determining the transition conditions for the ED state after transitioning to the AT state, the number of ED transition games in the determination of the conditions for transition to the AT state and the lottery conditions and the determination of the conditions for transition to the ED state can be shared.

[Notification of point value]
As shown in FIG. 32(a), the sub-controller 91 controls the point display section for displaying the current point value on the liquid crystal display 51 in the normal section to be in a non-display state. In this state, on the side of the main control unit 41, when an advantageous section transition combination is won, an initial value lottery is performed at that time, and the determined initial value is set as a point value in the RAM 41c, and substantially at the same time. An internal winning command capable of specifying winning of the advantageous interval transition combination and an initial value command capable of specifying the initial value won by the initial value lottery are transmitted to the sub-controller 91. , Even if an internal winning command or an initial value command that can specify winning of an advantageous section transition combination is received, at that timing, as shown in FIG. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the sub-control unit 91 receives a command that can specify the winning of the advantageous section transition combination, which is transmitted from the main control unit 41 at the timing after the final stop operation. When the winning determination command is received, that is, at the timing after the final stop operation in the game in which the advantageous section transition hand is won, the point display part is displayed on the liquid crystal display with the initial value specified from the initial value command received in the game as the display value. 51.

From the next game onwards, the game is controlled in the advantageous section, and in the advantageous section, an additional value command capable of specifying the additional value of the points determined by the main control unit 41 is transmitted each time the game is started. Each time the sub-control unit 91 receives an addition value command, the sub-control unit 91 updates the point value displayed on the point display unit to a value obtained by adding the addition value specified by the addition value command.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the 3rd AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and determines that the 3rd AT lottery has been won, the number of games in the precursor period specified by the precursor period command transmitted thereafter control to the Chance Zone (CZ) state. In the CZ state, the sub control unit 91 performs a CZ effect suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning the AT state, and informs that the final game of the precursor period will be controlled to the AT state. Then, when the third AT lottery is won and the CZ effect is performed, the sub-control unit 91 hides the point display unit because the point value is not updated thereafter.

In addition, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the 3rd AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and determines that the 3rd AT lottery was not won, the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of games from a plurality of numbers of games, Control to the CZ state for the determined number of games. Also in this case, the sub-control section 91 performs the CZ effect. Also, if the 3rd AT lottery is not won and the control is made to the CZ state, the main control unit 41 side determines the specified value and the initial value, and the point value is updated in each game. However, the sub-control unit 91 keeps the point display unit in a non-display state until the CZ state ends, so that it is not specified that the player has not won the 3rd AT lottery. After that, when the next game starts after the CZ state ends, the sub-controller 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the point display section with the latest point value at that time as the display value.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 receives the 1st AT lottery result command when the ceiling reaching command is received in the advantageous section, and receives the 2nd AT lottery result command when it is specified that the 1st AT lottery has been won, When it is specified that the second AT lottery has been won, the precursor state is controlled over the number of games in the precursor period specified by the precursor period command transmitted thereafter. The sub-control unit 91 performs an indication effect suggesting the possibility of winning in the AT state in the indication state, and notifies that the AT state will be controlled in the final game of the indication period. Then, when the number of ED transition games reaches the ceiling value and the precursor effect is performed, when the first AT lottery is won and the precursor effect is performed, the second AT lottery is won and the precursor effect is performed. Since the point value will not be updated after that, the point display section is hidden.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the 1st AT lottery result command in the advantageous section and determines that the 1st AT lottery was not won, the sub-control unit 91 receives the 2nd AT lottery result command in the advantageous section, and the 2nd AT lottery. When it is specified that the game is not won, one of the numbers of games is determined from a plurality of numbers of games, and the determined number of games is controlled to a premonitory state. Also in this case, the sub-control unit 91 performs the precursor effect. Further, when the first AT lottery is not won and the state is controlled to the precursor state, or when the second AT lottery is not won and the control is made to the precursor state, the main control unit 41 side updates the point value in each game. However, the sub-control unit 91 keeps the point display unit in a non-display state until the precursory state ends, so that it is not specified that the first AT lottery or the second AT lottery has not been won. there is Thereafter, the sub-controller 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display the point display section with the latest point value at that time as the display value at the start of the next game after the precursory state has ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the game in which the advantageous section transition hand is won in the normal section and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the points are updated during the advantageous section by displaying the point display section. Since the display of the value is started, it can be suggested that the point display section is shifted to the advantageous section by displaying the point display section from the non-display state.

In the present embodiment, the point display portion is displayed from the non-display state to suggest that the point display portion is shifted to an advantageous section, but the point display portion is also displayed in the normal section. In addition, in the normal section, for example, a value other than "--" is displayed in the point display section, while in the game in which it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, "00" is displayed in the point display section. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which a numerical value such as "01" is displayed to indicate that the vehicle is moving to an advantageous section. In addition, the point display part is displayed both in the normal section and the advantageous section, and in the game where it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, decorations that are not applied in the normal section are displayed on the point display section. It is also possible to suggest a transition to an advantageous section by changing the mode of the point display section, such as being displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in a game in which an advantageous interval transition hand is won in a normal interval and it is decided to transition to an advantageous interval, the display of the point value is not started at the timing when the start operation of the game is performed. At the timing after the final stop operation in the game, the point display section is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the display of the point value is started. can be done.

In addition, the timing after the final stop operation in the game in which the advantageous interval transition hand is won in the normal interval and the transition to the advantageous interval is decided may be the timing after the final stop operation, and the final stop operation is started. It may be the timing at which the final stop operation is canceled or the timing at which the corresponding reel is stopped, whichever is later. In addition, when the winning of the advantageous section transition combination is accompanied by the payout of medals, the timing at which the payout of medals is completed may be sufficient.

[About AT status]
Next, the AT state control performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In this embodiment, the AT state of the first mode and the AT state of the second mode, which are different from each other, will be described.

[Regarding the AT state of the first form]
First, the control regarding the first AT state of the first form performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the main control unit 41 sets the number of ED transition games to the virtual ceiling value (333, 666, 999 in this embodiment) in the non-AT state not controlled to the AT state. Win the 1st AT lottery that is executed by reaching the target, the 2nd AT lottery that is executed by winning the AT lottery target role, or the 3rd AT lottery that is executed when the point value reaches the specified value, or shift to ED When the number of games reaches the ceiling value, the AT state is controlled.

The main control unit 41 can perform control in a plurality of states including an AT1 state, an AT2 state, an additional state, and an ED state in the AT state.

When shifting to the AT state, the main control unit 41 first controls to the AT1 state, as shown in FIG. 33(a). In the AT1 state, as shown in FIG. 33(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 100% when winning the winning role of multiple pressing. The payout rate is about 200%, and the average net increase in the number of coins per game is about 3.0. In addition, in the AT1 state, winning a specific role (in this embodiment, a role belonging to flag categories 1 to 4 (cherry 1 to 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon), replay 1A, replay 2, common one-card role) Sometimes, a navstock lottery is held to determine whether or not to grant the navstock, which is the right to control to the AT1 state. The winning probability of Navistock in the AT1 state is set to a low probability (about 1/5 to about 1/40 in this embodiment). At the start of the AT1 state, the remaining number of times of navigation notification is set to 20 times, and the remaining number of times of navigation notification becomes 0, that is, the AT1 state ends when the navigation notification is performed 20 times.

When the AT1 state ends, the main control unit 41 controls to the AT2 state as shown in FIG. 33(a). In the AT2 state, as shown in FIG. 33(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 50% when winning the winning role of multiple pressing. The payout rate is about 133%, and the average net increase in number per game is about 1.0. In addition, in the AT2 state, a navigation stock lottery is conducted when a special combination is won. The winning probability of Navistock in the AT2 state is also set to a low probability (about 1/5 to about 1/40 in this embodiment). The AT2 state ends when the number of remaining games is set to 30 at the start and the number of remaining games becomes 0, that is, when 30 games have elapsed after the start of the AT2 state. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the navigation stock remains at the end of AT2, and if the navigation stock remains, controls the AT1 state again. On the other hand, if there is no navigation stock left, the AT state is terminated and the state is shifted to the non-AT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(a), when the addition state lottery is won in the AT2 state, the main control unit 41 interrupts the AT2 state and controls the addition state. In the additional state, as shown in FIG. 33(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 50% when winning the winning role of multiple pressing. The payout rate is about 133%, and the average net increase in number per game is about 1.0. In addition, in the added state, a navigation stock lottery is performed in all games. The probability of winning the navigation stock in the added state is set to be higher than that in the second AT state (in this embodiment, it is set to about 1/5 except when a special role is won, and 1/1 when a special role is won). In the additional state, either 10 games or 20 games are set as the number of remaining games at the start, and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 10 games or 20 games have passed since the start of the additional state. ends with When the added state ends, the main control unit 41 returns to the interrupted AT2 state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the main control unit 41 is controlled to any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, by satisfying the ED transition condition, the ED state to control. At this time, the main control unit 41 controls the game to the ED state from the next game after the game in which the ED transition condition is established. In particular, when the second ED transition condition described later is satisfied, the game progresses (the reels start rotating) for a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment) at the timing when the game start operation for starting the ED state is performed. is controlled to an ED freeze state that delays In the ED state, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the navigation notification is performed with a probability of 75% when winning the winning role of multiple pressing. The payout rate is about 167%, and the average net increase in number per game is about 2.0. Also, in the ED state, the navigation stock lottery is not performed. In the ED state, the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment) and condition 1 for ending the advantageous section is established, or the number of medals increases or decreases in the advantageous section. It is advantageous if the net increase in the number of medals after the number changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this embodiment). When the section end condition 2 is satisfied, the section ends together with the advantageous section. The number of advantageous interval games used to determine the advantageous interval end condition 1 is counted using an advantageous interval game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c, and the advantageous interval game number counter value is obtained when the number of bets is two. It is updated regardless of whether the bet number is 3 or whether the game state is any of RT0 to RT3. In addition, the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state used when determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is counted using the net increase number counter assigned to the RAM 41c, and the net increase number counter value is It is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3, and whether the game state is any of RT0 to RT3.

It should be noted that although condition 1 for ending the advantageous section is established when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, it may also be established when the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the first specified number. good. Advantageous section end condition 2 is met when the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number. It may be established.

The ED transition condition is the net increase in the number of medals after the increase/decrease in the number of medals in the advantageous section changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is the third specified number (this In the embodiment, the first ED transition condition established by exceeding 1700 to 2200) and the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state are the fourth prescribed number (this embodiment 1600) and the remaining navi stock reaches a predetermined number (eight in this embodiment) or more, and the second ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of bets is 3 in the advantageous section and the gaming state is A third ED transition condition is established when the number of RT1 games (the number of ED transition games) reaches a fifth specified number (1150 to 1400 in this embodiment). The net increase number of medals after being controlled to the AT state used when determining the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition is the net increase number counter value used when determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous section. . On the other hand, the number of ED transition games used when determining the third ED transition condition is counted using the ED transition game number counter assigned to the RAM 41c, and the ED transition game number counter value is calculated when the number of bets is three. It is updated when there is and the game state is RT1, and is not updated when the number of bets is 2 or when the game state is a game state other than RT1.

The main control unit 41 selects one of a plurality of values (1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200 in this embodiment) as the third prescribed number when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. The third specified number lottery is performed, and the winning value is set as the third specified number. It's becoming In addition, the main control unit 41 selects one of a plurality of values (1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400 in this embodiment) when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. The 5th specified number lottery to be selected as is performed, and the winning value is set as the 5th specified number, and the 5th specified number that will satisfy the 3rd ED transition condition varies for each advantageous section. It's like

In any state of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the stop order notified in the game in which the navigation notification is performed and an increasing hand is won, the net increase number counter value is increased. As a result, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied, and the state may transition to the ED state.

In addition, in the AT2 state or the additional state, 50% of the times when winning a multi-push winning role that can increase the net increase in medals, the navigation notification is not performed, but even in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed , when the winning combination is won by itself, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is established by increasing the net increase number counter value, and the transition to the ED state may occur.

Also, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, if a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification wins, the net increase number counter value increases, so that the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be established and transition to the ED state.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, if the navigation stock is won in a game in which a specific role for the navigation stock lottery is won, the remaining number of navigation stocks will be a predetermined number or more. As a result, the condition for transition to the second ED is satisfied, and the state may shift to the ED state.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, the third ED transition condition is established by increasing the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1 in the advantageous section. state may shift.

The first ED shift condition is met when the net increase number counter value exceeds the third specified number, but may be met when the net increase number counter value becomes equal to or greater than the third specified number. Further, the second ED shift condition requires that the net increase number counter value exceeds the fourth specified number, but may also require that the net increase number counter value be equal to or greater than the fourth specified number. Further, the second ED transition condition requires that the number of remaining navigation stocks is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, but may also require that the number of remaining navigation stocks exceeds a predetermined number. The third ED shift condition is established when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth prescribed number, but may be established when the number of ED transition games exceeds the fifth prescribed number.

In one AT1 state, it takes an average of 29.6 games to finish, that is, until the navigation notification is performed 20 times, and the average net increase in the number of cards per game is about 3.0. The average net increase in the number of sheets per session is about 88.8. In addition, in one AT2 state, it takes 30 games to finish, and the average net increase number per game is about 1.0, so the average net increase number per AT2 state is about 30. be. In addition, since one navigation stock remains, control is performed once each in the AT1 state and the AT2 state, so a net increase of approximately 111.8 medals can be expected for each navigation stock. Then, if the second ED transition condition is satisfied, the net increase number counter value exceeds 1600 at that time, and the net increase of about 894.4 can be expected by consuming all 8 navigation stocks. Therefore, the predicted net increase in the number of medals predicted in the future when all the navigation stock is consumed is 2494.4 medals. For this reason, the second ED transition condition is all numerical values (in this embodiment, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100 , 2200) and the number of sheets exceeding 2395, which is the end condition 2 of the advantageous section, is satisfied.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is established by increasing the net increase number counter value when winning a small winning combination involving the payout of medals. In addition, when a specific role is won, the navigation stock lottery is held and the second ED transition condition may be satisfied. Neither the transition condition nor the second ED transition condition can be satisfied. In other words, there are a transferable combination in which the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition can be established, and a transition impossible combination in which neither the first ED transition condition nor the second ED transition condition is satisfied. Then, the sub-control unit 91, in the state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is established, the effect mode when the transferable combination is won, the effect mode when the non-transferable combination is won, may be controlled to be different, and with such a configuration, it is specified whether or not the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition can be satisfied in the game from the difference in the effect mode. be able to.

Thus, in the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the AT state, the ED state is controlled by satisfying the ED transition condition. In this embodiment, after shifting to the AT state, the ED state is satisfied until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by the ED transition condition being satisfied when the net increase in medals and the number of navigation stocks meet predetermined conditions. That is, it is a state in which the AT state is guaranteed to continue until the period during which the AT state can be controlled ends. Therefore, by shifting to the ED state after shifting to the AT state, an increase in medals is guaranteed to some extent, and the game can be played with peace of mind compared to the state in which the end conditions before shifting to the ED state fluctuate. It can be carried out.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the AT state is controlled to the ED state in which the AT state continues until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by satisfying the ED transition condition after shifting to the AT state. At least after the transition to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state. Possible number of medals, etc.) can be guaranteed, and the ED state does not necessarily have to continue until the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied. A configuration in which the ED state ends at 10:00 is also possible.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, control can be performed in a plurality of states including the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, while the ED transition condition is satisfied. After shifting to the ED state by pressing, it is controlled only to the ED state until the AT state ends. After the ED transition condition is established, stable game characteristics can be achieved.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the number of times of navigation (the number of times of navigation notification), which is the termination condition of the AT1 state, is fixed to 20 times. By making a selection or increasing the number of times of navigation when an additional condition is satisfied, the number of times of navigation, which is the condition for ending the AT1 state, may be changed. Also, the AT1 state is configured to end according to the number of times of navigation, but it may be configured to end when the number of remaining games is set to 0 as in the AT2 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of remaining games, which is the condition for ending the AT1 state, varies by selecting from a plurality of numbers of remaining games that are initially set, or by increasing the number of remaining games when additional conditions are met. It may be configured.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the number of remaining games, which is the condition for ending the AT2 state, is fixed at 30 games. By adding the number of remaining games when the condition is established, the number of remaining games, which is the condition for ending the AT2 state, may be varied. Also, the AT2 state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, but it may be configured to end according to the number of times of navigation as in the AT1 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of times of navigation that is initially set may be selected from a plurality of times, or the number of times of navigation may be increased when the additional condition is satisfied, so that the number of times of navigation, which is the condition for ending the AT2 state, may be changed. good.

In addition, in the AT state of the first mode, the number of remaining games, which is the condition for ending the additional state, is selected from either 10 games or 20 games. A fixed configuration is also acceptable. Further, it may be configured such that the number of remaining games is increased when the additional condition is satisfied. Further, the additional state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, but it may be configured to end according to the number of times of navigation as in the AT1 state. In such a configuration, the number of times of navigation, which is initially set, may be selected from a plurality of times, or the number of times of navigation may be increased when the additional condition is met, so that the number of times of navigation, which is the condition for terminating the added state, may be changed. Further, the addition state is configured to be shifted by winning the addition state in the AT2 state, but may be configured to be shifted by winning the addition state in the AT1 state. In addition, the additional state is a configuration in which the winning probability of the navigation stock is set higher than in other states, so that the navigation stock is easily added, but the period during which the AT2 state is controlled, such as the number of remaining games in the AT2 state may be more likely to be added than when is controlled to the AT2 state. Also, if the AT1 state can be shifted to the additional state, the AT1 state control period, such as the number of times of navigation in the AT1 state, may be more likely to be added than when the AT1 state is controlled.

In the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the AT state, as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, there is an AT1 state in which navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% when a multi-press winning role is won, and a multi-press state. AT2 state in which navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50% when winning a winning role, that is, a configuration including a plurality of states with different rates of navigation notification when winning a multiple-push winning role, Until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the medal acquisition amount can be changed.

After shifting to the AT state, as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, there are a first state in which navigation notification is performed when the multiple-press winning combination is won, and a navigation notification is performed when the multiple-touch winning combination is won. In such a configuration, it is possible to change the amount of medals obtained until the ED transition condition is satisfied, and to change the amount of medals obtained between the first state and the second state. You can change the amount of medals you earn.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed, as states from the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, There is a high possibility that the number of net increase in medals will decrease, but even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, in a game where the winning role of multiple pushing is won, if the increasing role is won by itself , the net increase number counter value is increased, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the ED state may occur.

Further, even in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, when a watermelon not targeted for the navigation notification wins, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is established by increasing the net increase number counter value. and may transition to the ED state.

Also, even in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, if the navigation stock is won in a game in which a specific role targeted for the navigation stock lottery is won, the remaining number of navigation stocks becomes a predetermined number or more. As a result, the second ED shift condition is satisfied, and the state may shift to the ED state.

Further, even in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the third ED transition condition is established by increasing the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the game state is RT1 in the advantageous section, and the ED state is established. may shift to

Even in the second state where the navigation notification is not performed, the first ED transition condition, the second ED transition condition, and the third ED transition condition may be satisfied. and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed when winning the winning combination of multiple pressings, is controlled to the first state or to the second state? Regardless of , the state is shifted to the ED state when the ED shift condition is established.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied after shifting to the AT state, navigation notification is performed. In the first state, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning an increasing combination in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, and the transition to the ED state is performed. Even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the increasing combination by itself without being performed, the transition to the ED state may not be performed. can be enhanced.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied after shifting to the AT state, navigation notification is performed. In the first state, when the watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification wins, the ED transition condition is established to shift to the ED state, while in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, navigation notification is not subject Even if the watermelon wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state may not be made. With such a construction, the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed can be further enhanced. .

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied after shifting to the AT state, navigation notification is performed. In the first state, the navigation stock wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the ED state is shifted to. On the other hand, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the navigation stock wins. Even if it is established, it may be configured not to shift to the ED state, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed.

In addition, in the configuration in which the transition to the ED state is not performed even if the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the transition is made to the first state in which the navigation notification is performed thereafter. If so, it will shift to the ED state.

In addition, after shifting to the AT state, as states until the conditions for shifting to ED are established, a first state in which navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning hand of the multiple pressing order, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. In the configuration including and, in the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning combination of multiple pressing, even in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, the additional combination is won by itself. While shifting to the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, by winning an increasing combination by itself, even if the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state is not performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning combination of multiple pressings.

In addition, after shifting to the AT state, as states until the conditions for shifting to ED are established, a first state in which navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning hand of the multiple pressing order, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. and, in the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning order of the multiple pressing, the ED transition condition is established by winning the watermelon that is not the target of the navigation notification. While shifting to the ED state, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the watermelon that is not the target of the navigation notification may be awarded so as not to shift to the ED state even if the ED transition condition is satisfied. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning combination of multiple pressings.

In addition, after shifting to the AT state, as states until the conditions for shifting to ED are established, a first state in which navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning hand of the multiple pressing order, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. and , in the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the winning order of the multiple pressing, the winning of the navigation stock satisfies the ED transition condition, thereby shifting to the ED state. On the other hand, in the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, even if the navigation stock is won and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state may not be performed. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the first part.

In the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, even if the ED transition condition is satisfied, the configuration is such that the transition to the ED state is not performed. If the condition for transitioning to ED is satisfied when transitioning to the state, the transition is made to the ED state.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, a state in which the average net increase in the number of cards per game exceeds 100% due to the execution of the navigation notification, that is, a first state in which the number of medals increases; A second state in which the number of medals does not increase or the number of medals decreases due to the fact that the navigation notification is not performed or the ratio of the navigation notification is low, so that the average net increase in the number of medals per game is 100% or less. In the first state in which medals are increased, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning an increasing combination to be the target of navigation notification, and the state is shifted to the ED state, while the medals are not increased or are decreased. In the second state, even if the incrementing hand to be notified by navigation wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state may not be performed. It can make the state even more interesting.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which medals are increased and a second state in which medals are not increased or decreased as states from the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the medals are increased. In the first state, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification, and the transition to the ED state occurs. Even if a watermelon not to be notified wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state may not be performed, and by adopting such a construction, the excitement of the first state in which medals are increased is further enhanced. can be done.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which medals are increased and a second state in which medals are not increased or decreased as states from the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the medals are increased. In the first state where the navi stock wins, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the ED state, while in the second state where the medals do not increase or the medals decrease, the navi stock wins and the ED. Even if the transition condition is met, the game may not be shifted to the ED state. By adopting such a construction, the interest in the first state in which medals are increased can be further enhanced.

In the configuration in which the transition to the ED state is not performed even if the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state in which the medals do not increase or the medals decrease, the ED transition condition is set when the transition to the first state in which the medals increase is performed. holds true, the state is shifted to the ED state.

In the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the AT state, as a state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the winning probability of the navigation stock is set to a low probability, thereby extending the period of control to the AT state. AT1 state and AT2 state in which the probability of winning the Navistock is set to high, and an additional state in which the control to extend the period of control to the AT state is performed with a high rate. Since the configuration includes a plurality of states with different ratios of control for extending the period of control to the AT state, the period of control to the AT state depends on the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied. can be changed.

After shifting to the AT state, as states until the conditions for shifting to the ED are satisfied, there is a first state in which control can be performed to extend the period of control to the AT state such as navigation stock lottery, and control to the AT state. and a second state in which no control is performed to extend the period in which the AT state is controlled. In addition, the period during which the AT state is controlled can be greatly changed depending on whether the control is performed in the first state or the second state.

In the AT state of the first form, regardless of whether the state is controlled to the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the additional state after the transition to the AT state, the ED state is controlled by satisfying the ED transition condition. There is no need to change the control for shifting to the state according to the state at that time, and the processing for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

In the AT state of the first form, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the highest among the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state that are controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied. Since the average net increase number is set to be smaller than the AT1 state in which a large number is set, it is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing even if the ED transition condition is satisfied after the shift to the AT state and the transition to the ED state is made. can.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, in the ED state, the navigation notification probability (75%) is controlled to be different from the navigation notification probability (100% or 50%) in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state. This is because the average net increase in medals per game in the ED state differs from the average net increase in medals per game in any of the AT1, AT2, and additional states. The amount of increase in medals can be made appropriate according to the

In addition, in the ED state, the navigation notification probability is controlled to be the same as the navigation notification probability in any one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, and the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the AT1 state, The configuration may be the same as the average net increase in number of medals per game in either the AT2 state or the additional state. can be shared.

In the AT state of the first form, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained per AT1 state is about 88.8, and the minimum number of medals that can be obtained per AT2 state is about 30. There is, and the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be acquired per one additional state is about 10. On the other hand, when the largest 2200 is selected as the third prescribed number and the first ED transition condition is satisfied, or when the largest 1400 is selected as the fifth prescribed number and the third ED transition condition is satisfied, the second ED transition condition Although the number of medals that can be expected to be obtained in the ED state is smaller than that in the case where is established, it is possible to expect about 200 medals to be obtained even in this case. In this way, after the ED transition condition is satisfied, the number of medals that can be expected to be obtained in the ED state is the lowest in one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state that are controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied. Since the number of medals to be obtained is larger than the number of medals that can be expected to be obtained, it is possible to heighten interest in being controlled to the ED state.

In the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the advantageous state, the ED transition condition for shifting to the ED state is the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the advantageous section. That is, it is established when the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number (in this embodiment, any one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200). and the second ED transition condition established based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future according to the remaining number of navigation stocks. Not only does the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceed the 3rd specified number, but even if the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is below the 3rd specified number, it will increase in the future. Since the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in medals is satisfied, it may be controlled to the ED state, so the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state is less than the third specified number. It can be made to expect to be controlled to the ED state even in a situation.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future is specified based on the number of navigation stocks, but the number of remaining games in the AT state and the remaining number of navigation notifications are used to determine the number of medals. Further, if the end condition of the AT state is a configuration in which the number of net increases in medals is managed, the configuration in which the predicted number of net increases in medals is specified by the number of net increases in medals that can be obtained thereafter. It is good as

In addition, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form is the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future. The total value of the predicted net increase in the number of medals exceeds the net increase in the number of medals after the actual AT state is controlled, and the third specified number (in this embodiment, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, or 2200), and when the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state is less than or equal to the third specified number, the ED state is controlled. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number.

In addition, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form is the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future. The total value of the predicted net increase number and the net increase number of medals after the actual AT state is controlled exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this embodiment) at which the advantageous section ends. This is a condition that can be established, and by controlling to the ED state in a situation where the net increase in medals after being controlled in the AT state is the third specified number or less, the net increase in medals after being controlled in the AT state It is possible to recognize that the number of sheets exceeds the second prescribed number which is the end condition of the advantageous section.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, after shifting to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, and when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, Although the ED state continues until the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied, the ED state may be ended before the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied after shifting to the ED state. .

In addition, the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form is the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the number of medals that is predicted to increase in the future. The third specified number (in this embodiment, 1700, 1800 , 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200), and the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth specified number (1600 in this embodiment), which is smaller than the third specified number. This is a possible condition, and even if the sum of the number of net increases in medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals that are expected to increase in the future exceeds the third specified number, control to the AT state is possible. Since the ED state is not controlled until the net increase in the number of medals from the start exceeds the 4th stipulated number which is less than the 3rd stipulated number, it is controlled to the ED state at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state. You can prevent it from being lost.

Further, in the AT state of the first form, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the second ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends. is not performed, and when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and control is made to the ED state, it is not determined whether or not the first ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends. After one of the transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is made to the ED state, it is not determined whether the other of the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied, so control is made to the ED state. control can be simplified.

In addition, in the AT state of the first mode, the main control unit 41 controls to the non-AT state and the AT state after shifting to the advantageous section, and furthermore, in the AT state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the AT1 state, the AT2 It is a configuration that can be controlled to the state and the additional state, but regardless of which state is controlled, it is determined whether the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game, and the current state Since there is no need to change the control according to , the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

Until the transition to the AT state, it is not determined whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied. state, it may be configured to determine whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game. Since there is no need to change the control according to , the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the main control unit 41 determines that the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase number counter value updated in the advantageous interval exceeds the third specified number, is satisfied, and When the number of ED transition games reached the 5th specified number, the 3rd ED transition condition is satisfied, and the ED state is controlled, and the 3rd specified number and the 5th specified number , a plurality of values (in this embodiment, for the third specified number, one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200; for the fifth specified number, 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, and 1400) is selected and set, and the third specified number and the fifth specified number that serve as conditions for transition to the ED state can be varied, the period until the ED state is controlled can be changed each time the control is performed in the advantageous section.

Further, in the AT state of the first form, the main control unit 41 can change the period until it is controlled to the ED state. Since the notification probability (75% in this embodiment) differs from the navigation notification probability (50% or 100% in this embodiment) of the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state, the navigation notification is performed. It is possible to infer the possibility of being controlled to the ED state from the frequency of being detected.

[Regarding the production during the AT state of the first form]
Next, the effect in the AT state of the first form will be described. The main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a state command capable of specifying the next game state at the end of the game. The state command can specify whether the state of the next game is a non-AT state or an AT state. state or ED state. Also, in the AT1 state, the number of remaining navigations can be specified, and in the AT2 state and the additional state, the number of remaining games can be specified. Further, when the first to third ED transition conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 41 can specify that the ED transition condition is satisfied and which of the first to third ED transition conditions is satisfied at the end of the game. An ED transition command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . Further, in the ED transition command specifying that the first ED transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to specify the third specified number that satisfies the first ED transition condition. Further, in the ED transition command specifying that the 3rd ED transition condition is satisfied, it is possible to specify the fifth specified number that the 3rd ED transition condition is satisfied.

Then, the sub control section 91 can execute an effect peculiar to the AT state according to the state of the main control section 41 specified from the state command or the ED transition command. Note that the effects peculiar to the AT state include the display mode of the image by the liquid crystal display 51, the sound effects from the speakers 53 and 54, and the effects by the lighting mode of the LED 57 for performance. I will explain the production using.

When the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the AT state in a situation where the non-AT state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT state is specified, the number of bets for the next game is set. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 34(a), an AT state start effect indicating the start of the AT state is executed. In the AT state start effect, an AT start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

At the start of the AT state, the control is first performed in the AT1 state. Therefore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command while the AT start effect is being executed and specifies the game start operation. , as shown in FIG. 34(b), an AT1 state effect peculiar to the AT1 state is executed. In the AT1 state presentation, the AT1 state image peculiar to the AT1 state, the remaining number of navigation notifications, the number of games after shifting to the AT state, the net increase number after shifting to the AT state, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. be.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the AT2 state in a situation where the AT1 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT2 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and starts the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 34(c), an AT2 state rendering peculiar to the AT2 state is executed. In the AT2 state effect, the image is different from the AT1 state image, and the AT2 state image peculiar to the AT2 state, the number of remaining games, the number of games after shifting to the AT state, the net increase number after shifting to the AT state, etc. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the AT1 state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT1 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and starts the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 34(b), the AT1 state rendering is executed again.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying an additional state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of the additional state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command to start the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 34(d), an add-on state effect peculiar to the add-on state is executed. In the add-on state production, the AT1 state image and the AT2 state image are different images, and the add-on state image specific to the add-on state, the number of remaining games, the number of games after shifting to the AT state, and the number of games after shifting to the AT state , etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 .

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the non-AT state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the end of the AT state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives a command as shown in FIG. 34(g). , the result notification effect is executed. In the result notification effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the number of games played after shifting to the AT state, the net increase in the number of games after shifting to the AT state, a message prompting prevention of addiction, and the like. The result notification effect may end at the timing when the number of bets for the next game is set, may end at the timing when the next game start operation is performed, or may continue until the next game ends. The game may end at the timing when the number of bets for the next game is set or at the timing when the game start operation is performed.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command specifying that the second ED transition condition is satisfied in a situation in which any one of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified, When the start of the ED state is specified by establishment, when the internal win command for the next game is received and the operation to start the game is specified, as shown in FIG. to run. The main control unit 41 delays the progress of the game for a predetermined time (two seconds in this embodiment) at the time of the start operation of the next game in which the second ED transition condition is satisfied, that is, the game that starts the ED state. , and the ED start effect is executed during the period controlled to the ED freeze state. In the ED start effect, the ED start image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command specifying that the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition is satisfied in a situation in which any one of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified, When the start of the ED state is specified by the establishment of the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition, even if the internal winning command is received and the game start operation is specified, the state up to that point is the AT1 state. If the AT1 state effect is continued, if the previous state is the AT2 state, the AT2 state effect is continued, and if the previous state is the added state, the added state effect is continued.

Specifically, the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command specifying that the first ED transition condition is satisfied, and if the third specified number specified from the ED transition command is the maximum 2200, the third ED transition condition When the ED transition command specifying establishment is received and the fifth specified number specified from the ED transition command is the maximum 1400, the internal winning of the next game is performed in the same manner as when the second ED transition condition is satisfied. When the command is received and the game start operation is specified, an ED start effect indicating the start of the ED state is executed.

On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 receives the ED transition command specifying that the first ED transition condition is satisfied, and if the third specified number specified from the ED transition command is other than the maximum 2200 , when an ED transition command specifying that the third ED transition condition is satisfied is received and the fifth specified number specified from the ED transition command is other than the maximum 1400, an ED state ( Before the notification), the AT1 state effect, the AT2 state effect, or the additional state effect is continued. That is, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 executes the same mode of presentation as before being controlled to the ED state.

In addition, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 sets the end conditions for the display of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state before shifting to the ED state (displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when shifting to the ED state). If the number of remaining navigation notifications or the number of remaining games becomes 0) is established, the ED start effect lottery is executed when the specific role that is the target of the navigation stock lottery is won, and the ED start effect is performed. When the lottery is won and the internal winning command for the next game is received to specify the game start operation, the ED start performance indicating the start of the ED state is executed.

In this way, the condition for executing the ED start effect after the transition to the ED state (hereinafter referred to as the ED notification condition) is whether the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition is satisfied, or the second ED transition condition is satisfied. It depends on whether the Also, hereinafter, the ED state before the ED notification condition is satisfied is referred to as the ED state (before notification), and the ED state after the ED notification condition is satisfied is referred to as the ED state (after notification).

Further, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the additional state, and the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 can execute a navigation effect when a multiple-press winning combination is won as described later, and a specific combination is selected. It is configured to be able to execute specific role winning indication effects (A) and (B) in the case of winning, but in a game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, there are cases where the winning combination of multiple pressings wins and the navigation effect is executed. , When a particular role wins and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is executed, the ED start effect is given priority and executed, and after the ED start effect ends, the navigation effect and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) are performed. Execute.

Further, in the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied in the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, or ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 does not execute an effect suggesting that the ED notification condition is satisfied. Effects according to the result of the internal lottery of the game and the result of the game are executed, such as a navigation effect, a specific role winning effect (A) and (B), a small role winning effect, a chance effect, etc., which will be described later.

When a predetermined time has passed after the start of the ED start effect (the timing at which the ED freeze state ends in the ED freeze state), as shown in FIG. Execute the ED production. In the ED effect, the images are different from the AT1 state image, AT2 state image, and additional state image. The net increase number, the number of remaining games in the ED state, the remaining net increase number in the ED state, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 . In the ED state, the main control unit 41 calculates the number of games remaining in the ED state by subtracting the number of games in the advantageous interval from the first specified number in which the condition 1 for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied, and calculates the number of games remaining in the ED state. The remaining number of net additions in the ED state is calculated by subtracting the number of net additions of medals after the transition to the AT state from the second prescribed number that is established, and the number of remaining games in the ED state and the number of remaining net additions in the ED state are calculated. is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 transmits the number of remaining games in the ED state and the remaining net increase number in the ED state specified from the ED end condition command in the ED effect. display.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the non-AT state in a situation where the ED state is specified, i.e., when the end of the AT state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives a command as shown in FIG. , the result notification effect is executed. Incidentally, whether the AT state ends in the AT2 state or the ED state, a common result notification effect is executed. It is also possible to execute result notification effects in different modes.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 detects the start of the ED state and satisfies the ED notification condition, regardless of which of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state is specified. A start performance is executed, a common ED performance is executed in the subsequent ED state, and a common result notification performance is executed at the end of the ED state.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 predicts a future increase even when the first ED transition condition is established when the net increase in medals exceeds the third prescribed number after shifting to the AT state and the transition to the ED state is established. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals to be displayed is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, the start of the ED state is identified, and when the ED notification condition is satisfied, a common ED start effect is executed. Then, in the subsequent ED state, a common ED performance is executed, and at the end of the ED state, a common result notification performance is executed.

Further, after the transition to the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the second ED transition condition is satisfied after the net increase in number of medals exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is smaller than the third prescribed number, and the navigation stock is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. In the case of shifting to the ED state as well, after shifting to the AT state, after the navigation stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the number of net additions of medals exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is smaller than the third prescribed number, and shifts to the second ED. When the condition is met and the transition to the ED state is made, the start of the ED state is specified, and when the ED notification condition is met, the common ED start performance is executed, and in the subsequent ED state, the common ED is performed. A performance is executed, and a common result notification performance is executed at the end of the ED state.

In the AT state, the sub-control section 91 can execute a navigation effect, a specific role winning suggestion effect (A), a specific role winning suggestion effect (B), a small role winning effect, and a chance effect.

As shown in FIGS. 35(a) and 35(b), the navigation effect is such that when a game start operation is performed, an image showing the pressing order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is superimposed on a portion of the effect image being displayed. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest an advantageous pushing order for the player. The navigation effects include navigation effects A and B having different effects (for example, the size, color, shape, etc. of an image indicating the pressing order).

As shown in FIGS. 35(c) and 35(d), in the specific role winning indication effect (A), when the game start operation is performed, an image indicating that the specific role has been won is superimposed on a portion of the effect image being displayed. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, it is a production that suggests that a specific role has been won, suggesting the possibility that the navigation stock will be added or the possibility of shifting to the added state, and is executed when the specific role is won. be done.

As shown in FIGS. 35(e) and 35(f), the specific role winning indication effect (B) is a different effect image being displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 when the game start operation is performed. By switching to a specific image that shows the winning of a specific role, in addition to suggesting that the specific role has been won, there is a possibility or addition of Navistock over the specific role winning suggestion production (A) It is a production that suggests that there is a high possibility of transitioning to a state, and is executed when a special role is won.

As shown in FIG. 35(g), the small winning effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by superimposing an image in the shape of the characters "GET!" is an effect suggesting that a prize has been won, and is executed when a multi-press order winning combination is won and a small combination is won by performing a stop operation in the pressing order specified by the navigation effect.

As shown in FIG. 35(g), the chance effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 by superimposing an image in the shape of the characters "CHANCE!" It is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the winning combination will be won or that there is a high possibility of moving to an additional state, and is executed at the end of the game in which the special combination has been won.

As shown in FIG. 36, the sub-control unit 91 controls the multi-press in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the additional state, the ED state (before notification), and the ED state (after notification), which constitute the AT state. A navigation performance A can be executed when a player wins the first part.

In the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the additional state, and the ED state (before the notification), which constitute the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 enables the execution of the navigation effect B when the winning of the winning combination of multiple pressings is performed, and the ED. In the state (after notification), the navigation effect B is not executed when winning the winning combination of multiple pressings.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91, among the states constituting the AT state, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the add-on state, and the ED state (before notification), when a specific role is won, regardless of the type, the special role winning suggesting production is performed. While (A) can be executed, in the ED state (after notification), when a winning combination that cannot be won unless a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing among the specific combinations is won (in the case of a key push) , it is possible to execute a special role winning suggestion effect (A), but if a special role that wins regardless of the timing of the stop operation among the special roles is won (when no eyeball is required), the special role winning Suggestion effect (A) is not executed.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91, among the states constituting the AT state, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the add-on state, and the ED state (before notification), when a specific role is won, regardless of the type, the special role winning suggesting production is performed. While (B) can be executed, in the ED state (after notification), when a specific role is won, regardless of the type of win, the specific role winning suggestion effect (B) is not performed.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 performs the multi-sheet pressing order in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the additional state, the ED state, the ED state (before the notification), and the ED state (after the notification), which constitute the AT state. When winning, a small combination winning performance can be executed by performing a stop operation in a pressing order designated by a navigation performance and winning a small winning combination.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a chance presentation regardless of the type of win of a specific combination in the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, and ED state (before notification) among the states constituting the AT state. On the other hand, in the ED state (after notification), no chance effect is executed when a special combination is won regardless of the type.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), the sub-control unit 91 sets the net increase number counter value to the third specified number (one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200 in this embodiment). If the remaining 50 cards or less until reaching , the ED transition game number counter value is the fifth prescribed number (in this embodiment, one of 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, and 1400). When there are 25 games or less remaining until the game is reached, the navigation effect B is executed with a high probability (1/5 in this embodiment).

Further, the sub-control unit 91, if the value set as the third specified number is 1900 or less, if the value set as the fifth specified number is 1250 or less, the medium probability lower than the high probability (this In the embodiment, the navigation effect B is executed at 1/10).

Further, the sub-control unit 91 exceeds the remaining 50 cards until the net increase number counter value reaches the third specified number, exceeds the remaining 25 games until the ED transition game number counter value reaches the fifth specified number, and reaches the third specified number. When the value set as the specified number exceeds 1900 and the value set as the fifth specified number exceeds 1250, the navigation effect B is performed at a low probability lower than the medium probability (1/15 in this embodiment). Execute.

Therefore, by increasing the ratio of the navigation effect B among the navigation effects A and B, the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition will soon be met, and a small value is set as the third specified number or the fifth specified number. It has been suggested that there is a high possibility that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the ED state at an early stage.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), the sub-control section 91 determines that a specific combination is won in the state before shifting to the above-described ED state (before notification), that is, in a state in which the ED transition condition is not satisfied, and When neither the navigation stock nor the additional state is won, the performance (B) indicating the winning of the specific role is executed at a low probability (1/10 in this embodiment), and the state after shifting to the ED state (before notification). Namely, in the ED state (before notification), when the specific combination is won, the specific combination winning indication effect (B) is executed with a high probability (1/3 in this embodiment).

In addition, the sub-control unit 91, in the state before shifting to the above-described ED state (before notification), that is, in the state where the ED transition condition is not satisfied, wins the specific combination, and wins neither the navigation stock nor the additional state. If not, the chance effect is executed with a low probability (in this embodiment, 1/4), and the state after shifting to the ED state (before the notification), that is, in the ED state (before the notification), the special combination is won. If so, the chance effect is executed with a high probability (1/2 in this embodiment).

For this reason, a specific role winning suggestion effect (B) or a chance effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning the navigation stock or the additional state is executed, and even if the navigation stock or the additional state is not won, the ED state It has been suggested that there is a high possibility that it is controlled by

The sub-control unit 91 selects one pattern from a plurality of types of patterns as the ED effect, and executes the ED effect in a mode according to the selected pattern.

As shown in FIG. 38, the pattern of the ED effect consists of four types of patterns A, B, C, and D, and at least part of the elements constituting the ED effect such as the background of the effect image and characters appearing are different.

The sub-control unit 91 selects one of the patterns A, B, C, and D with a probability corresponding to the set value currently set. , the currently set setting value is suggested.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, pattern A is selected when the setting value is set to an odd number, when it is set to an even number, or when it is set to a high setting (set value of 4 or more). There is a possibility, and it is selected with almost the same probability when it is an odd setting and when it is an even setting, and when it is a high setting and when it is a low setting (setting value 3 or less) Since they are selected with approximately the same probability, when pattern A is executed, both the odd setting and the even setting are highly likely. It is not suggested that it is likely.

Pattern B may be selected when the setting value is an odd setting, even setting, or high setting (setting value 4 or more), and in the case of odd setting In addition, while the probability of selection is higher than in the case of the even setting, the probability of selection in the case of the high setting and the low setting is almost the same, so pattern B is executed. , it suggests that the odd setting is more likely, but does not suggest that the high setting is more likely.

Pattern C may be selected when the setting value is an odd number setting, even number setting, or high setting (set value 4 or more), and when even number setting In addition, while the probability of selection is higher than in the case of the odd setting, the probability of selection is almost the same in the case of the high setting and the low setting, so pattern C is executed. , it suggests that the even setting is more likely, but does not suggest that the high setting is more likely.

Pattern D may be selected when the setting value is an odd number setting, even number setting, or high setting (setting value 4 or more), and in the case of high setting In addition, while the probability of selection is higher than in the case of low setting, the probability of selection in the case of odd number setting and even number setting is almost the same, so pattern D is executed. If it is, it suggests that the high setting is likely, while neither the odd setting nor the even setting is likely.

As described above, in this embodiment, after shifting to the AT state, the ED state is shifted to when the ED transition condition is satisfied, and the ED start effect is executed when the ED notification condition is satisfied after the transition to the ED state. In addition, even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is transitioned to in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, the start of the ED state is identified and the ED notification condition is satisfied. In this case, since a common ED start effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the control is made to the ED state.

Also, after shifting to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of net increases in medals exceeds the third specified number, and the transition to the ED state is also made, the predicted net increase in medals that is predicted to increase in the future will also occur. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, the start of the ED state is identified, and when the ED notification condition is satisfied, the common ED start effect is executed, so that the ED state. It is possible to easily recognize that it is controlled by

Also, after shifting to the AT state, after the number of net increases in medals exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is less than the third prescribed number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, and the second ED transition condition is established, and the transition to the ED state occurs. In this case, after shifting to the AT state, after the navigation stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the number of net additions of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is established and the ED is reached. Also in the case of shifting to the state, when the start of the ED state is specified and the ED notification condition is satisfied, the common ED start effect is executed, so that the control to the ED state can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner. can.

In the ED state, the ED effect is executed, and the ED transition condition is satisfied in any state of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, the state is shifted to the ED state, and the ED notification condition is satisfied. Also in this case, since the common ED effect is executed in the ED state, it is possible to easily recognize that the control is in the ED state.

Also, after shifting to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of net increases in medals exceeds the third specified number, and the transition to the ED state is also made, the predicted net increase in medals that is predicted to increase in the future will also occur. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, the common ED effect is executed by the ED notification condition being satisfied, so that it is easily recognized that the control is made to the ED state. can be made

Also, after shifting to the AT state, after the number of net increases in medals exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is less than the third prescribed number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, and the second ED transition condition is established, and the transition to the ED state occurs. In this case, after shifting to the AT state, after the navigation stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the number of net additions of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is established and the ED is reached. Even in the case of shifting to the state, since the common ED effect is executed when the ED notification condition is satisfied, it is possible to easily recognize that the control is in the ED state.

In addition, when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is performed in any state of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, the ED state is executed. Since the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the state, it is possible to easily recognize the end of the ED state.

Also, after shifting to the AT state, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of net increases in medals exceeds the third specified number, and the transition to the ED state is also made, the predicted net increase in medals that is predicted to increase in the future will also occur. Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is established and the transition is made to the ED state, the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, so that the end of the ED state can be recognized in an easy-to-understand manner. .

Also, after shifting to the AT state, after the number of net increases in medals exceeds the fourth prescribed number, which is less than the third prescribed number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, and the second ED transition condition is established, and the transition to the ED state occurs. In this case, after shifting to the AT state, after the navigation stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the number of net additions of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is established and the ED is reached. Also when shifting to the state, a common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, so that the end of the ED state can be easily recognized.

In this embodiment, the third specified number at which the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the fifth specified number at which the third ED transition condition is satisfied fluctuate, and the sub-control section 91 is controlled to the ED state by the main control section 41 side. Even after the ED start performance is not executed and the ED performance is not executed, it is possible to expect that the ED state is controlled even in a situation where the ED start performance and the ED performance are not executed. .

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 suggests winning of a special role when a special role is won with a higher probability in the state after shifting to the ED state (before reporting) than in the state before shifting to the ED state (before reporting). The production (B) and the chance production are executed, and the specific role winning suggestion production (B) and the chance production suggesting that there is a high possibility of winning in the navigation stock and the additional state are executed, and the navigation stock is executed. Even if the winning state is not won, it can be made to expect that it is controlled to the ED state.

In addition, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 provides an ED start effect at the time of winning a specific role that triggers a navigation stock lottery or an additional state lottery if the AT state is in a state other than the ED state. A lottery is executed and the ED start performance is executed by winning the ED start performance lottery, so when a specific role is won, not only the navigation stock and the additional state are won but also the ED start performance is executed. That is, it can be made to expect that it is controlled to the ED state. In addition, after shifting to the ED state, even if the specific role is won, the navigation stock or the additional state will not be won, but after the transition to the ED state, the winning of the specific role can be used as a trigger for the ED start effect. can.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 increases the execution probability of the navigation effect B of the navigation effects A and B as the fulfillment of the ED transition condition approaches, and the ratio of the navigation effect B of the navigation effects A and B is increased. increases, it can be expected that the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition will soon be satisfied.

Further, when the value set as the third specified number is 1900 or less, that is, when a value that relatively easily satisfies the first ED transition condition is selected as the third specified number, the sub-control unit 91 sets the fifth specified number. When the value set as the specified number is 1250 or less, that is, when a value that relatively easily satisfies the third ED transition condition is selected as the fifth specified number, the navigation effect B of the navigation effects A and B is selected. The probability of execution is increased, and by increasing the ratio of the navigation effect B among the navigation effects A and B, it is possible to expect the transition to the ED state at an earlier stage.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the third prescribed number and the fifth prescribed number were selected in the navigation effect executed after the transition to the AT state, so that the ED transition condition is relatively likely to be satisfied. However, due to the difference in the effect mode of the AT start effect, it is a structure that suggests that there is a high possibility that a value that relatively easily satisfies the ED transition condition was selected as the third specified number or the fifth specified number. It is good as

In this embodiment, the ED start effect is that the ED start image is displayed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the effect suggests that the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51 is used to suggest the start of the ED state. , ED transition conditions are met and control to the ED state can be clearly recognized.

In addition, since the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed in the next game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, the effect at the start of the game can be focused, and the ED start effect is the effect after the game starts. Since it is not affected by the contents, the number of patterns of the ED start effect can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed in the game next to the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied. Even if the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In addition, in the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, instead of the effect that suggests that the ED notification condition is satisfied, the navigation effect, the special role winning suggestion effect (A) (B), the minor role winning effect, the chance effect, etc. Since an effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery of the game and the result of the game is executed, the unexpectedness of the ED start effect in the game following the game in which the ED notification condition is established can be enhanced.

In addition, in the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, when the winning combination of multiple pressings is won and the navigation effect is executed, or when the specific role is won and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is executed, the ED Since the start performance is preferentially executed, it is possible to prevent the unpredictability of the ED start performance from being diminished by the navigation performance or the performance suggesting the winning of the specific role (A).

In this embodiment, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, the additional state, and the ED state (before notification), a navigation effect is executed when a multiple-press winning role is won, and when a specific role is won, a specific role winning suggestion effect (A ) and (B) are executed, while in the ED state (after notification), the navigation effect is executed when the winning of the winning combination of multiple pressings is executed, but when the winning of the specific combination is the specific combination that requires eye pressing, Except when is won, the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is not executed, and in the ED state (after notification), compared to the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, and ED state (before notification) Since the ratio of execution of performances suggesting the results of internal lottery such as navigation performances and performances (A) and (B) suggesting winning of a specific role is low, attention can be paid to ED performances after ED notification conditions are established.

Especially in AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, by winning a special role, the possibility of Navistock being added and the possibility of shifting to the additional state is suggested, but it will shift to ED state. After that, even if the special role is won, the navi stock will not be added, nor will it shift to the extra state, and the importance of recognizing the winning of the special role in the ED state (after notification) is low. By reducing the ratio of execution of the specific role winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) in the state (after notification), the game is played by suggesting the winning of a specific role with low importance in the ED state (after notification). It can reduce the annoyance of people.

In addition, in the ED state (after notification), by switching the effect image being displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a specific image that is different from the effect image and indicates that the specific role has been won, the specific role has been won. The performance (B) suggesting winning of a specific role is not executed, and the flashy performance of switching images during the execution of the ED performance is restricted, so that after the ED notification condition is established, attention is paid to the ED performance. can be made

In particular, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, the specific role winning indication effect (B) is executed, suggesting that there is a high possibility that the navi stock will be added or will shift to the additional state. However, even if the specific role is won, the navigation stock will not be added, nor will it shift to the additional state. By restricting the execution of (B), it is possible to prevent meaningless effects from being performed in the ED state (after notification).

Further, as described above, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, and ED state (before notification), the execution of the navigation effect B makes it possible to expect control to the ED state at an earlier stage. However, after the ED notification condition is satisfied and the ED state is specified, the execution of the navigation effect B is restricted, and meaningless effects are performed in the ED state (after notification). can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, the currently set value is suggested by the pattern of the ED effect executed in the ED state (after the notification), so that it is possible to heighten interest by being controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the pattern of the ED effect indicates whether the current set value is likely to be set to odd numbers, even numbers, or high. However, from the pattern of the ED production, the configuration suggests that there is a high possibility that it is a specific setting value, odd setting, even setting, high setting, specific setting value A configuration in which it is determined that is may be used.

[About the AT-related display part]
Notification of the AT-related state by the AT-related display unit will be described with reference to FIG.

In the AT-related display section, an AT display section 61, an AT2 state display section 62 and an AT1 state display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R, and a CZ display section 64 and an additional state display section 65 are arranged on the reels 2L and 2C. , 2R, and the sub-control section 91 identifies the current state based on the command sent from the main control section 41, and turns on/on the corresponding AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e (see FIG. 3). It is possible to notify the current state by controlling the lights to be turned off.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the main control unit 41 is in the normal state (non-AT state), the sub-control unit 91 controls all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to go out, and the AT display unit 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and added state display section 65 are all turned off. This allows the player or the like to recognize that the current state is not one of the AT-related states but the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal state to the CZ state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn on, while turning off the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58c and 58e. The state is maintained, and only the CZ display section 64 among the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and added state display section 65 is turned on. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the CZ state among the AT-related states.

As shown in FIG. 39(c), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the CZ state to the AT1 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn off and the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c to turn on. On the other hand, the AT-related LEDs 58b and 58e are kept off, and the AT display section 61, AT1 Only the state display portion 63 is in the lighting mode. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT1 state.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the CZ state to the normal state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn off, while maintaining the turned-off state of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58c and 58e. 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65 are all turned off (see FIG. 39(a)).

As shown in FIG. 39(d), when the main controller 41 shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state, the sub-controller 91 controls the AT-related LED 58c to turn off and the AT-related LED 58b to turn on. , the AT-related LEDs 58d and 58e are turned off, and the AT-related LED 58a is turned on. Only the AT display section 61 and the AT2 state display section 62 are lit. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT2 state.

As shown in FIG. 39(e), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the additional state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn off and the AT-related LED 58e to turn on. , the AT-related LEDs 58c and 58d are turned off, and the AT-related LED 58a is turned on. Only the AT display section 61 and the added state display section 65 are lit. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the additional state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the add-on state to the AT2 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58e to be turned off, the AT-related LED 58b to be turned on, and the AT-related LEDs 58c and 58d to be turned off. The state and the lighting state of the AT-related LED 58a are maintained, and the AT display portion 61 and the AT2 state display of the AT display portion 61, the AT2 state display portion 62, the AT1 state display portion 63, the CZ display portion 64, and the addition state display portion 65 are maintained. Only the portion 62 is turned on (see FIG. 39(d)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the AT1 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn off and the AT-related LED 58c to turn on, while turning off the AT-related LEDs 58d and 58e. The state and the lighting state of the AT-related LED 58a are maintained, and the AT display section 61, the AT1 state display among the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the addition state display section 65 is maintained. Only the portion 63 is turned on (see FIG. 39(c)).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the normal state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b to turn off, while maintaining the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e in the off state, and the AT display unit. 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65 are all turned off (see FIG. 39(a)).

As shown in FIG. 39(f), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 then turns on the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, and 58e when the ED notification condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the lighting state of the AT related LEDs 58a and 58c is maintained, and the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65 are all in the lighting mode. Become. As a result, the player or the like can recognize that the current state is the AT state and the ED state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e to light up by satisfying the ED notification condition, while the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b light up. The state is maintained, and the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65 are all turned on (see FIG. 39(f)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the add-on state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d to light up by satisfying the ED notification condition, while the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e light up. The state is maintained, and the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65 are all turned on (see FIG. 39(f)).

That is, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the additional state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 changes the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, and the AT1 state by satisfying the ED notification condition. While maintaining the lighting mode of the display section that is already in the lighting mode among the display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the added state display section 65, the other display sections that are in the light-out mode are set to the lighting mode. Let the part be a lighting mode.

On the other hand, when the ED state shifts to the normal state, the sub-control section 91 controls all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to turn off, the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, and the CZ display. All of the part 64 and the added state display part 65 are turned off (see FIG. 39(a)).

Thus, in this embodiment, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state other than the ED state, all the AT-related display portions do not light up at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display portions light up. Since it becomes a mode, it becomes easy to understand that it has been controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the AT-related display section includes an AT display section 61, an AT2 state display section 62, an AT1 state display section 63, a CZ display section 64, and an additional state display section 65. In a configuration that can be controlled to a plurality of states other than the ED state, it is sufficient if there are two or more AT-related display units corresponding to a plurality of states other than the ED state. It may be composed only of Further, in this embodiment, the AT-related display section is configured to indicate that it is controlled to the corresponding state by turning it on or off. It may be configured to notify that the state is controlled.

In this embodiment, as AT-related display sections, an AT1 state display section 63, an AT2 state display section 62, and an additional state display section 65 are provided corresponding to the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, respectively. It is possible to specify that the AT-related display section is controlled to the corresponding state by setting the lighting mode, and each display section can be used as a light-emitting section for notifying the corresponding state until the shift to the ED state. After the ED state is established and the ED notification condition is satisfied, these AT-related display portions can be used as light emitting portions for notifying the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state that transitions less frequently than the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and the control to the ED state is notified without providing a dedicated display unit for such a state. becomes possible.

Further, in this embodiment, when the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the state is shifted to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 and the additional state display section 65 are turned on while the AT1 state display section 63 remains in the lighting mode. When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and the state shifts to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 remains in the lighting mode, and the AT1 state display section 63 and the additional state display section 65 are in the lighting mode. When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the added state and the state is shifted to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are set to the lighting mode while the adding state display section 65 is kept in the lighting mode. In the case of controlling to the state, it is sufficient to set only the light-emitting portion which is not in the lighting mode to the lighting mode, so the control becomes easy.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the AT related display section includes the AT display section 61 that is lit in any of the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state. Since the lighting mode including the AT display unit 61, which is in the lighting mode regardless of whether it is in the ED state or not, it becomes easy to understand that the control has been performed in the ED state.

In this embodiment, the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, and the AT1 state display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the CZ display section 64 and the additional state display section 65 are arranged on the reel 2L. , 2C, and 2R, the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the additional state display unit 65 are easily visible during the game. Since they are arranged on the left and right sides of 2C and 2R, it becomes easy to understand that they are controlled to the ED state.

Next, a modified example when shifting to the ED state (ED state) in notification by the AT-related display unit will be described with reference to FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state, the AT2 state, or the additional state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 already causes the AT-related display unit to While maintaining the lighting mode of the display section, which is the lighting mode, the other display section, which is the lighting mode, is configured to be in the lighting mode, but in the modification shown in FIG. state or the additional state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the display units that are already in the lighting state among the AT-related display units by satisfying the ED notification condition, and turns off all of the AT-related display units. is turned off, and then all of the AT-related display portions are turned on.

As shown in FIG. 40, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state (see FIG. 40(a)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c when the ED notification condition is satisfied. state, the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, and 58e are kept turned off, and the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the add-on state display section 65 are all turned off. It is set to the extinguishing mode (see FIG. 40(d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to light up, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 40(e)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state (see FIG. 40(b)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b to turn off when the ED notification condition is satisfied. , AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e are kept turned off, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are turned off (FIG. 40). (d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to light up, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 40(e)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the added state (see FIG. 40(d)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e to turn off when the ED notification condition is satisfied. , the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d are kept turned off, and the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and added state display section 65 are all turned off (FIG. 40). (d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to light up, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 40(e)).

As described above, the AT display unit 61, the AT2 state display unit 62, the AT1 state display unit 63, the CZ display unit 64, and the additional state display unit 65 are all turned off once and then turned on. Not only can the player or the like recognize that the state of is the ED state among the AT-related states, but it is easy for the player or the like to clearly recognize that the state has been switched to the ED state.

Also, the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65 may be configured to be in the lighting mode through the blinking mode before being in the lighting mode. With such a configuration, when controlling to the ED state, the light-emitting units that have been in the lighting mode according to the state are temporarily switched to the extinguished mode, and then all the light-emitting parts are switched to the lighting mode through the flashing mode. Since it is in the lighting mode, it becomes easier to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

[Continuous production in AT state]
In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 suggests the possibility of shifting to the AT1 state from five games before the AT2 state ends over the game in which the AT2 state ends, and whether or not to shift to the AT1 state in the final game. A continuous effect is executed to notify the result.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 controls to an effect execution state in which execution of continuous effects is permitted during a period from five games before the end of the AT2 state to the end of the AT2 state, and as shown in FIG. When the second ED shift condition is established in the execution state, the next game is not shifted to the ED state, but the performance execution state, i.e., the next game after the AT2 state is finished, is controlled to shift to the ED state. At this time, when the next game after the effect execution state ends, that is, when the start operation of the game in which the ED state starts is performed, the ED freeze state at the start of the ED state is controlled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41, the sub-control unit 91 executes the continuous production during the period in which the main control unit 41 is controlled to the production execution state, and the second ED transition condition is established during the execution of the continuous production. Even in such a case, the continuous performance is continued, and after the continuous performance is finished, that is, when the main control part 41 shifts to the ED state and the game start operation is performed, the ED start performance is executed, and then the ED performance is executed.

For this reason, when the second ED transition condition is established during execution of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is not interrupted, and the game is shifted to the ED state from the game following the end of the continuous performance, and the next game after the continuous performance is completed. When the game start operation is performed, the ED start effect is executed, and then the ED effect is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during the execution of the continuous effect over a plurality of games, the control related to the ED state is restricted, that is, the control for shifting to the ED state is restricted. can be prevented from being damaged.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 indicates the possibility of transition to the AT1 state, that is, the possibility of the AT state continuing, from five games before the AT2 state ends over the game in which the AT2 state ends. Although it is a configuration that executes continuous effects, if it is a configuration that can execute continuous effects over a plurality of games at least in the AT state, and if it is a configuration that restricts the control related to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effects, the same as the above. It is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being lost due to the interruption of the continuous performance by the control related to the ED state. For example, when a specific winning combination is won in the AT2 state, a continuous effect may be executed to suggest the possibility of shifting to an additional state over a plurality of games. Also, if it is possible to shift to the extra state when the special role is won in the AT1 state, it suggests the possibility of shifting to the extra state over multiple games when the special role is won in the AT1 state. It is good also as a structure which performs a continuous production.

In this embodiment, when the second ED shift condition is met during execution of the continuous performance, that is, during the period when the main control unit 41 is controlling the performance execution state, the ED state is started after the continuous performance is finished. Thus, it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being spoiled by shifting to the ED state during execution of the continuous performance.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is performed, the game is controlled to the ED freeze state that delays the progress of the game when the operation to start the game that transitioned to the ED state is performed. Even if the continuous performance is continued even after the transition to the ED state, it is specified that the state has been shifted to the ED state by being controlled to the ED freeze state on the way, suggesting the possibility that the AT state will continue in the continuous performance. However, in the present embodiment, even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous performance, the ED state is maintained until the continuous performance is completed. , no control to the ED freeze state during the continuous performance, and establishment of the ED transition condition during the continuous performance is not specified.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game during the advantageous interval, regardless of whether the effect is being executed. When it is determined that the second ED transition condition is satisfied in the performance execution state, the ED state is not controlled until the performance execution state ends, and the ED state is controlled when the performance execution state ends. However, by not determining whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied when the main control unit 41 is in the production execution state, even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous production, the continuous production It may be configured so as not to shift to the ED state until the effect is completed. With such a configuration, the main control unit 41 makes unnecessary judgments in the effect execution state in which transition to the ED state is restricted. You don't have to.

Further, in this embodiment, as a configuration for restricting the control related to the ED state during execution of the continuous performance, it is a configuration for restricting the transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous performance, but as shown in FIG. When the second ED transition condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 performs control to transition to the ED state from the next game regardless of whether or not the continuous effect is being executed, and when the game start operation is performed. While controlling to the ED freeze state, the sub-control part 91 continues the continuous performance being executed even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance, the state is shifted to the ED state, and the ED freeze state is controlled. However, the ED start performance may be executed when the next game start operation is performed after the continuous performance has ended, and the ED performance may be started subsequently. There is no need to perform special control on the side of the main control part 41 for execution, and even if the second ED shift condition is established during execution of the continuous performance and the state shifts to the ED state, the continuous performance continues and the continuous performance continues. Since the ED start performance is executed after the end and the ED performance is started, the continuous performance is not interrupted even if the ED state is shifted to while the continuous performance is being executed, and the interest of the continuous performance is lost. can be prevented.

In the present embodiment, when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the game start operation is performed in which the game transitions to the ED state, the ED freeze state is controlled to delay the progress of the game. is established and the game transitioned to the ED state may be configured not to control the ED freeze state. Even in such a case, even if the sub-control unit 91 is configured to continue the continuous performance being executed, the progress of the game is not delayed during the execution of the continuous performance, so the continuous performance can be continued without a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the configuration in which the second ED transition condition is established during execution of the continuous production, and even when the second ED transition condition is established and the state is shifted to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 continues the continuous production being executed. It is preferable to change the part, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suggest a shift to the ED state by the continuous performance by changing the content of the continuous performance. In particular, it is preferable to change the effect result initially notified in the final game of the continuous effect to the effect result of shifting to the ED state. It can be connected to the start effect and the ED effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a configuration for restricting the control related to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect, it is a configuration that restricts the transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous effect, but as shown in FIG. When the continuous production is executed, the sub-control unit 91 establishes the second ED shift condition during the execution period (5 games) of the continuous production, and if there is a possibility that the condition is established, that is, the medal after the AT state shift exceeds the fourth prescribed number of 1600, and there is a possibility that the navigation stock number will be 8 or more, the continuous effect control period is controlled until the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and during that period By not executing the continuous performance, the control related to the ED state may be restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, and with such a configuration, the second ED shift condition is established during the execution of the continuous performance. If there is a possibility, the continuous performance is not executed, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being spoiled by shifting to the ED state during the execution of the continuous performance.

[Regarding the AT state of the second form]
Next, a description will be given of the second type of AT state control performed by the main control unit 41 . It should be noted that the AT state of the second mode includes the same configuration as the AT state of the first mode, such as the ED transition condition, and here, the configuration different from the AT state of the first mode will be described. In addition, descriptions of modified examples of configurations common to and similar to the AT state of the first mode are omitted here because they can also be applied to the AT state of the second mode.

As shown in FIG. 44( a ), the main control unit 41 has an increase state, a decrease state (end), a decrease state (continue), an additional state (1), and an additional state (2) in the AT state of the second form. , and ED states.

When shifting to the AT state, the main control unit 41 first controls the increase state as shown in FIG. 44(a).

In the increasing state, as shown in FIG. 44(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 100% when winning the winning role of multiple pressings. The payout rate is about 200%, and the average net increase in the number of coins per game is about 3.0. In the increase state, a navigation stock lottery for determining whether or not to grant the navigation stock, which is the right to control to the increase state, and an add-on state lottery to determine whether to control to the add-on state are performed. In the increasing state, the number of remaining games is set to 25 at the start and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 25 games have elapsed after the start of the increasing state, or the additional state lottery is performed before the remaining number of games becomes 0. ends by winning the

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the number of remaining games reaches 0 and the increasing state ends, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the navigation stock remains at the end of the increase state. If there are no remaining, control to the decrease state (end). On the other hand, when the navigation stock remains, control is performed to reduce (continue).

In the decrease state (end) and decrease state (continue), as shown in FIG. 44(b), navigation notification is not performed, and the payout rate of medals per game is about 66, although it varies slightly depending on the set value. %, and the average number of net additions per game is about -1.0. In other words, medals will decrease. Also, in the decrease state (end) and decrease state (continue), the navigation stock lottery and the additional state lottery are performed. In the reduced state (end), the number of remaining games is set to 11 at the start and the number of remaining games becomes 0, that is, 11 games have passed since the start of the reduced state (end), or the number of remaining games is 0. It will end by winning the navigation stock lottery or winning the extra state lottery before it becomes. In addition, when the reduced state (continuation) starts, the number of remaining games is determined to be one of 1 to 11, and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 1 to 11 games have passed after the start of the reduced state (continuation). Alternatively, the game ends when the winning state lottery is won before the number of remaining games reaches zero.

As shown in FIG. 44A, when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the decrease state (end) ends, the main control unit 41 ends the AT state and controls to the non-AT state. On the other hand, when the navi stock is won and the reduced state (end) ends, the number of remaining games is determined to be one of 0 to 3, and when 0 is determined as the number of remaining games, the navi stock is selected. Consumes one and controls it to increase again. When the number of remaining games is determined to be 1 to 3, control is made to decrease (continue), and when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the decrease (continue) is terminated and the number of remaining games is increased again. Control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(a), when the number of remaining games is 0 and the decreasing state (continuation) ends, the main control unit 41 consumes one navigation stock and returns to the increasing state. Control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the main control unit 41, in any of the increase state, decrease state (end), and decrease state (continue), when the extra state (1) is won, , control to add state (1), and when winning in add state (2), control to add state (2).

In the additional state (1) and the additional state (2), as shown in FIG. 44(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 100% when winning the winning combination of multiple pressings. Although different, the payout rate of medals per game is about 200%, and the average net increase in the number of medals per game is about 3.0. In the additional state (1), a navigation stock lottery is conducted. At this time, the winning probability of Navistock is treated more favorably than the increase state, decrease state (end), and decrease state (continue), and relatively more Navistock wins can be expected. In addition, the addition state lottery is not performed. In addition state (1), 10 is set as the number of remaining games at the start, and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, when 10 games have elapsed after the start of addition state (1), the game ends. Further, the additional state (2) is ended when the number of remaining games is set to 25 at the start and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 25 games have elapsed after the start of the additional state (2). For this reason, the addition state (2) is more likely than the addition state (1) to be treated preferentially over a long number of games, so the navi stock lottery will be performed. ) is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 44(a), when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the additional state (1) or the additional state (2) ends, the main control unit 41 restarts the game without consuming the navigation stock. Control to increase state.

Thus, in the AT state of the second mode, an increasing state in which the medals increase due to the navigation notification and a decreasing state in which the medals decrease without the navigation notification are repeatedly looped alternately. In the AT state, the payout rate of medals in the increase state and the decrease state is changed depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification.

In addition, in the AT state in the second mode, the increasing state in which the medals increase due to the navigation notification and the decreasing state in which the medals decrease without the navigation notification are repeatedly looped alternately. In the AT state of the second embodiment, the first state and the second state having different probabilities of navigation notification are alternately looped. The medal payout rate in the second state may be varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the main control unit 41 selects any one of an increase state, a decrease state (end), a decrease state (continue), an additional state (1), and an additional state (2). Even if it is controlled, it is controlled to the ED state by satisfying the first to third ED transition conditions, as in the first mode of the AT state. In the ED state, as shown in FIG. 44(b), navigation notification is performed with a probability of 75% when winning the winning role of multiple pressings. The payout rate is about 167%, and the average net increase in number per game is about 2.0. Further, in the ED state, the navigation stock lottery and the additional state lottery are not performed. The ED state is when the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment) and condition 1 for ending the advantageous section is established, or when the number of medals in the advantageous section is net increased. When the number of cards exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this embodiment), the advantageous interval end condition 2 is satisfied, and the advantageous interval ends.

The winning probability of Navistock in the increasing state is set to low probability 1, as shown in FIG. 44(b). is 1% for stock number 1 and 0% for stock number 2. The winning probability when winning FC1 is 10% for stock number 1 and 0% for stock number 2. The stock number 1 is 30%, the stock number 2 is 0%, and the winning probability when winning FC3 is 79% for stock number 1 and 1% for stock number 2, and the winning probability when winning FC4 is the number of stocks. 1 is 25%, and the number of stocks is 0%. 0.47 pieces.

After shifting to the AT state, the main control unit 41 counts the number of times the increase state is controlled in the AT state. Different probabilities are applied depending on the number of increased states. In addition, here, the winning probability of the navi stock in the decrease state (end) is different according to the number of times of the increase state controlled in the AT state. It is also possible to count the number of loops in the AT state, and to vary the winning probability of the navigation stock in the reduced state (end) according to the number of loops in the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the winning probability of Navistock in the decrease state (end) is the decrease state (end) after 2 to 4 consecutive increase states (after the 2nd to 4th increases in the AT state). is set to a high probability, and after 1 consecutive increase state (after the 1st increase state in AT state) or after 5 consecutive increases (after the 5th increase state in AT state), the decrease state (end) is low. Probability is set to 2.

In the high probability, as shown in FIG. 45(c), the winning probability when winning FC0 is 20% with stock number 1, and the winning probability when winning FC1 to FC4 is 100% with stock number 1. Approximately 0.23 Navi Stock wins can be expected per game after 2 to 4 consecutive increase states (end). The number of navistocks that can be won is about 0.94.

With low probability 2, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the winning probability when FC0 is won is 0% for both stock number 1 and stock number 2, and the winning probability when FC1 is won is 0 when stock number 1 is 0%. 3% for stock number 2, and the winning probability for FC2 winning is 6% for stock number 1 and 3% for stock number 2, and the winning probability for FC3 winning is 7% for stock number 1, Stock number 2 is 2%, the winning probability when winning FC4 is 8% for stock number 1, 4% for stock number 2, and after 1 consecutive increase or 5 consecutive decreases (end) 1 The number of winning navi stocks that can be expected per game is about 0.003, and the number of winning navi stocks that can be expected per game of decreasing state (end) after 1 consecutive increase state or after 5 consecutive states is about 0.03. become individual.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the probability of winning navi stock in the reduced state (continuous) is set to a low probability of 2, and the number of winning navi stock that can be expected per game in the reduced state (continued) is about 0.003 pieces, and the number of navi stocks that can be expected to be won per reduced state (continuation) is about 0.003 pieces to about 0.03 pieces, depending on the number of games.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the probability of winning Navstock in the additional state (1) and the additional state (2) is set to a high probability, and one game of the additional state (1) and the additional state (2) The number of Navistock winnings that can be expected per time is about 0.23, and the number of Navistock winnings that can be expected per additional state (1) is about 2.31, and the additional state (2) per time The number of Navistock winnings that can be expected is about 5.78.

Different probabilities are applied to the winning probability of the additional state in the increase state according to the number of controlled increase states in the AT state. Here, the winning probability of the additional state in the increasing state is different depending on the number of times of the increasing state controlled in the AT state, but the winning of the adding state in the increasing state depends on the number of loops in the AT state described above. Configurations with different probabilities may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the winning probability of the additional state in the increasing state is high in the state of increasing the number of times the last digit is 5 (increase state of the number of times the last digit is 5 in the AT state). It is set to a low probability in the increase state except for the 5th row in the last digit.

At low probability, as shown in FIG. 45(d), the winning probability when winning FC0 is 0% in both of the added states (1) and (2), and the winning probability when winning FC1 is the added state (1). is 0%, the additional state (2) is 2%, the winning probability when winning FC2 is 1% for the adding state (1) and 0% for the adding state (2), and the winning probability when winning FC3 is , Added state (1) is 5%, added state (2) is 1%, and the winning probability when winning FC4 is 53.5% for added state (1) and 1.5% for added state (2). , and the winning probability of the additional state that can be expected per game in the increase state other than the 5th row in the lower digit is about 0.2%, and the increase that can be expected per game in the increase state other than the 5th row in the lower digit. The winning probability of the state is about 5%.

At high probability, as shown in FIG. 45(e), the winning probability when winning FC0 is 0% in both of the added states (1) and (2), and the winning probability when winning FC1 is the added state (1). is 0%, and the added state (2) is 33%. , Added state (1) is 0%, and added state (2) is 75%. The probability of winning the additional state that can be expected per game with the 5th single digit increase state is about 2.8%, and the winning probability of the additional state that can be expected per game with the 5th consecutive increase state of the lower single digit is about 51. .1%. In addition, in the high probability, not only is the winning probability of the added state higher than the low probability, but the winning probability of the added state (2), which can be expected to win more Navistock than the added state (1), is higher. is set to

In addition, in the increase state, in addition to the above, when winning Replay 1A or Replay 2, there is a 100% chance of winning the additional state (1), and when winning the common one-card role, there is a 100% chance of winning the additional state (2). be elected to In addition, in the decrease state (end) and decrease state (continue), the additional state lottery accompanying the winning of FC0 to 4 is not performed, but as in the increase state, the probability of winning Replay 1A and Replay 2 is 100%. Winning the additional state (1) with , and winning the additional state (2) with a probability of 100% when winning the common one-card role. However, the winning probability of replay 1A, replay 2, and common one-card hand is 14/65536 even if totaled, which is extremely small.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled to the decrease state (continue) after the end of the increase state, that is, when one or more navigation stock remains and it is decided to be controlled to the increase state again, At the start of the decrease state (continuation), a decrease state game number lottery is performed to select the remaining number of games in the decrease state (continuation), that is, the number of games until the increase state is controlled again from 1 to 11G.

After the end of the increase state, in the decrease game number lottery in the case of being controlled to the decrease state (continuation), the selection rate of the number of games differs according to the number of times the increase state has been controlled in the AT state and the set value. It should be noted that here, the selection rate of the number of games in the reduced game number lottery is different according to the number of times of the increase state controlled in the AT state. A configuration in which the selection rate of the number of games is different may be used.

Selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decrease state (continuation) after 1 consecutive increase state (after the 1st increase state in AT state) or after 5 consecutive increase states (after the 1st increase state in AT state) is 61% for 1G, 1% for 2G, 6% for 3G, 5% for 4G, 5% for 5G, and 0 for 6G when the set values are 1 to 5, as shown in FIG. %, 7G is 6%, 8G is 5%, 9G is 1%, 10G is 2%, and 11G is 8%. becomes. When the set value is 6, 1G is 60%, 2G is 1%, 3G is 7%, 4G is 4%, 5G is 5%, 6G is 1%, 7G is 6%, 8G is 5%, 9G is 1%, 10G is 2%, and 11G is 8%, the average number of games is about 3.29G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 1G.

The selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decrease state (continuation) after two consecutive increase states (after the second increase state in the AT state) is, as shown in FIG. 1G is 1.75%, 2G is 1.75%, 3G is 70%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 4.5%, 6G is 0%, 7G is 3.5%, 8G is 3.5%, 9G 3.5%, 10G 3.5%, 11G 3.5%, the average number of games is about 4.13G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 3G. Become. When the set value is 6, 1G is 2.5%, 2G is 2.5%, 3G is 70%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 4.5%, 6G is 1%, and 7G is 1%. 3%, 8G 3%, 9G 3%, 10G 3%, 11G 3%, the average number of games is 3.99G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 3G. Also, regardless of the setting value, the selection rate of the number of games of 4G or more, which is higher than 3G, which is the highest selection rate, is higher than the selection rate of the number of games of 2G or less, which is lower than 3G, which is the highest selection rate.

The selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decrease state (continuation) after three consecutive increase states (after the third increase state in the AT state) is, as shown in FIG. 1G is 1.75%, 2G is 1.75%, 3G is 4.5%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 70%, 6G is 0%, 7G is 3.5%, 8G is 3.5%, 9G 3.5%, 10G 3.5%, 11G 3.5%, the average number of games is about 5.44G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 5G. Become. When the set value is 6, 1G is 2.5%, 2G is 2.5%, 3G is 4.5%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 70%, 6G is 1%, and 7G is 1%. 3%, 8G 3%, 9G 3%, 10G 3%, 11G 3%, the average number of games is 5.3G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 5G. Also, regardless of the setting value, the selection rate of the number of games of 6G or more, which is higher than 5G with the highest selection rate, is higher than the selection rate of the number of games of 4G or lower, which is lower than 5G, which is the highest selection rate.

The selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decrease state (continuation) after four consecutive increase states (after the fourth increase state in the AT state) is, as shown in FIG. 4% for 1G, 4% for 2G, 4% for 3G, 4% for 4G, 4% for 5G, 0% for 6G, 2.5% for 7G, 25% for 8G, 25% for 9G, 10G accounts for 25% and 11G accounts for 2.5%, the average number of games is about 7.8G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 8-10G. When the set value is 6, 1G is 3%, 2G is 4%, 3G is 4%, 4G is 4%, 5G is 4%, 6G is 1%, 7G is 2.5%, and 8G is 25%. %, 25% for 9G, 25% for 10G, and 2.5% for 11G.

In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that when control is performed from the decrease state (end) to the decrease state (continue), that is, in the decrease state (end), the navigation stock is won and the control is again performed to the increase state. Also, at the start of the decrease state (continuation), the number of remaining games in the decrease state (continuation), that is, the number of games until the increase state is controlled again, is selected from 0 to 3G. I do. In addition, when 0G is won, control is not performed in the decrease state (continuation), but directly in the increase state.

In the reduced game number lottery when control is performed from the reduced state (finished) to the reduced state (continued), as shown in FIG. Depending on the number of games, the number of games that does not exceed 11 G in total with the number of games in which the navigation stock has been won in the reduced state (end) is selected.

As described above, in the AT state of the second mode, in the configuration in which the increasing state with a high medal payout rate and the decreasing state with a low medal payout rate are repeatedly looped, after the increasing state ends, the increasing state is resumed. If it is determined to be controlled, after the start of the decrease state, the number of games before being controlled again to the increase state fluctuates, so after the end of the increase state, it is decided to be controlled again to the increase state. Until the maximum number of games that can be selected in the reduced state in the case of being set has passed, it is possible to expect a transition to the increased state again.

In this embodiment, the period during which the reduced state (continued) is controlled is selected from a plurality of numbers of games in a reduced game number lottery, so that the period during which the reduced state (continued) is controlled varies. However, by winning the end lottery in the decrease state (continuation), the decrease state (continuation) may be terminated and controlled to the increase state. In such a configuration, the winning probability of the end lottery is A configuration may be adopted in which the period during which control is performed in the decrease state (continuation) is varied by selecting from a plurality of probabilities according to the number of times the increase state is performed in the AT state and the set value.

In addition, in the decreasing state game number lottery, both a number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate and a number of games greater than the number of games with the highest selection rate can be selected according to the number of times of the increasing state. In particular, when the number of games with the highest selection rate is larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate than the number of games with the highest selection rate, that is, after the end of the second consecutive increase state , or after the end of the third consecutive increase state, the selection rate of the number of games larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate is higher than the selection rate of the number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate Since it is set, after the start of the decrease state, it is possible to expect the shift to the increase state even after the number of games with the highest selection rate has passed according to the number of times the increase state has been controlled.

When the number of games with a smaller selection rate than the number of games with the highest selection rate is larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate, that is, after the fourth consecutive increase state, the most selected The selection rate of the number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate is set higher than the selection rate of the number of games larger than the number of games with the highest rate. After the end of the second or third increase state, the selection rate of the number of games larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate is higher than the selection rate of the number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate. may be set high, by doing so, the number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate and the number of games larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate according to the number of times of the increase state and can be selected, in either case, after the start of the decrease state, the transition to the increase state occurs even after the number of games with the highest selection rate has passed according to the number of times controlled to the increase state. can be expected.

In addition, in the decreasing state game number lottery, 6G is not selected when the set value is 1 to 5, but 6G is selected only when the set value is 6. Since the number of games after the end of the game is 6 G until the control is again made to the increase state, it is suggested that the set value is likely to be 6. FIG. That is, after the end of the increase state, the set value is suggested by the number of games until the increase state is controlled again, and attention can be paid to the period from the decrease state to the increase state again. .

It should be noted that the selection of the number of games in the reduced state game number lottery does not imply a specific set value, and the set value is obtained by selecting the number of games in the reduced state game number lottery at a selection rate corresponding to the set value. is likely to be an odd number, is likely to be an even number, or is likely to be greater than or equal to a specific set value. However, attention can be paid to the period until the control is again performed in the increasing state in the decreasing state.

Further, after the increase state ends, whether or not the increase state is resumed is determined by the presence or absence of the navigation stock. If it has been decided whether or not to return to the increasing state, the number of games to be controlled to the increasing state again at the start of the decreasing state is determined by lottery for the number of games in the decreasing state. Therefore, when the increase state is again controlled after the end of the increase state, there is no need to conduct a lottery or the like to determine whether or not to end the decrease state and start the increase state. control can be simplified.

After the end of the increasing state, if it is decided whether or not to be controlled to the increasing state again, and if it is decided to control to the increasing state again, the number of games until being controlled to the increasing state again is determined by the number of games in the decreasing state. If the configuration is determined before the start, the control after being controlled to the decrease state can be simplified. The same effect as above can be obtained even with a configuration in which the number of games to be controlled to the increasing state again is determined before the start of the decreasing state when it is determined to control to the increasing state.

Next, the characteristics of the increase state, decrease state (continuation), and decrease state (end) in the AT state of the second form will be described.

As shown in FIG. 47, in the increase state other than the 5th row of the lower digit, the winning probability of the additional state is low, whereas the 5th row of the lower digit (5th, 15th, 25th) ), the winning probability of the additional state is high, and the increase state of the 5th row of the lower 1st digit is greater than the increase state of the 5th row of the lower 1st digit. can be expected to be elected.

In addition, in the decrease state (continued) after the 1st increase state, and the decrease state (end) after the 5th increase state, the winning probability of Navistock in the Navistock lottery is low. , In the decrease state (end) after the 2nd to 4th increases, the probability of winning the Navistock in the Navistock lottery is high. It can be made to expect that it continues to the 5th row. In particular, as mentioned above, in the state of increasing the last digit 5 times, you can expect to win more Navistock than in other increasing states, so by continuing the increasing state until the 2nd time, It is possible to expect that the increasing state will not only continue until the increasing state, but also that the increasing state will continue thereafter.

In addition, when the control is made to the decrease state (continuous) after the end of the first increase state, the number of games to be controlled to the increase state again is reduced after the end of the second to fourth increase states. In the case of (continuous) control, the average number of games is smaller than the number of games until the increase state is controlled again, and the period from the end of the first increase state to the increase state again is 2. ~ After the end of the 4th increase state, it tends to be a shorter period than the period until it is controlled to the increase state again, and after being controlled to the AT state, the medals increased in the 1st increase state are not reduced. Since it becomes easy to shift to the second increase state, a large amount of medals can be obtained in the initial stage of the AT state in which the increase state and the decrease state are looped.

In particular, since 1G is selected most frequently in the number of games until the increase state is resumed after the first increase state is over, the number of games is the highest. After the increase state ends, it is easy to shift to the increase state again at 1G, and it becomes easy to shift to the second increase state without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state as much as possible.

Further, the increasing state of the fifth row is more advantageous for the player than the increasing state up to the fourth row, and when the increasing state after the fifth row ends, the decreasing state (continuation) is controlled. The number of games to be controlled to the increase state again is the average number of games to be controlled to the increase state again when the control is to the decrease state (continued) after the end of the second to fourth consecutive increases. The number is small, and the period from the end of the increase state after the 5th row until it is controlled to the increase state again is longer than the period from the end of the increase state of the 2nd to 4th row until it is controlled to the increase state again. Since the period is likely to be short, in the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state, a large amount of medals can be obtained starting from the particularly advantageous fifth consecutive increase state.

In particular, the increase state of the 5th line has a higher possibility of winning in the additional state than the increase state up to the 4th line, and since a large amount of Navistock can be expected to win, the AT loops between the increase state and the decrease state. By continuing the state until the fifth increase state, it is possible to expect that the AT state will continue thereafter.

Also, in the 5th streak of increase, you can expect to win a large number of navi stocks, so after the 5th streak onwards, after the end of the increase state, it will take 2 to 4 days to be controlled again to the increase state. After the end of the streak, the period is shorter than the period until it is controlled to increase again, so the accumulated navi stock can be consumed quickly, but a large amount of navi stock is accumulated. In the 2nd to 4th increases, which are unlikely, even if the nav stock is accumulated, the period from the end of the increase to the increase again will be relatively long. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the increasing state will continue.

In addition, in the increase state of the 5th row, the possibility of winning the additional state is higher than in the increase state up to the 4th row, and the addition state (1) and the addition state (2) are higher than the increase state up to the 4th row. Of these, the additional state (2), in which more Navistock can be expected to be won, is set with a higher possibility of winning, so that the increase state of the 5th line is more for the player than the increase state of up to the 4th line. This is an advantageous configuration, but in the 5th row increase state, the configuration is set so that the possibility of winning in the additional state is higher than in the 4th row increase state, and in the 5th row increase state, the 4th row A player with one of the configurations set to have a high possibility of winning in the additional state (1) and the additional state (2), in which more navi stocks can be won than in the increased state up to and including the additional state (2) Alternatively, it may be advantageous to the player by setting the probability of winning the navi stock or the average number of winning navi stocks higher in the fifth increasing state than in the increasing states up to the fourth. Any configuration is acceptable.

In addition, when the control is made to decrease (continue) after the 2nd to 4th increase state ends, the number of games to be controlled to the increase state again is the 1st increase state or the 5th and subsequent increases. After the end of the state, the average number of games is larger than the number of games until it is controlled to the increase state again when it is controlled to the decrease state (continuous). The period until it is controlled tends to be longer than the period until it is controlled to the increasing state again after the end of the first increasing state or the fifth and subsequent increasing states, while the second to fourth times In the decrease state (end) where it is not determined to be controlled to the increase state again after the end of the increase state, it is controlled to be controlled to the increase state again after the end of the first increase state or the fifth and subsequent increase states. Since the conditions for granting benefits are more favorable than the decrease state (end) where is not determined, after the end of the 2nd to 4th increase state, the period until the increase state is controlled again becomes longer. It is possible to expect both of the transition to the increase state again and the granting of the privilege.

In particular, in the decrease state (end) where it is not decided to be controlled to the increase state again after the 2nd to 4th increase states end, after the end of the 1st increase state or the 5th and subsequent increase states Since the winning probability of Navistock is higher than the decrease state (end) where it is not decided to be controlled to the increase state again, after the end of the 2nd to 4th increase state, it will be controlled to the increase state again. Even if the period becomes longer, if Navistock is elected, it can be expected that it will shift to an increasing state again.

In addition, as described above, the increasing state of the fifth row is more advantageous to the player than the increasing state up to the fourth row. is determined, the number of games until the increase state is controlled again, after the end of the increase state up to the third run, if it is decided to control the increase state again, the control is controlled again to the increase state. The average number of games is greater than the number of games until the increase, and the period from the end of the 4th increase state to the increase state again is the period until the increase state is increased again after the end of the 3rd increase state. Since the period is likely to be longer than the period until it is controlled, it can be expected to transition to the relatively advantageous fifth increase state over a long period of time.

In addition, in the AT state of the second form, the end condition of the increase state and the additional state is fixed to a specific number of games, but the number of games to be the end condition can be selected from a plurality of numbers of games, or the additional condition is set. It is also possible to change the end condition by increasing the number of games when the game is established. Also, the increased state and the added state are terminated depending on the number of games played, but the configuration may be such that the termination condition is met depending on the number of times the navigation notification is performed or the number of times a specific winning combination is won.

In addition, in the AT state of the second form, in the decrease state (end) after the end of the second to fourth increase states, the winning probability of the navigation stock lottery is preferentially treated than in the increase state. Even in the decrease state (end), the conditions related to the provision of benefits such as the winning probability of the navigation stock lottery may be preferentially treated than in the increase state. Even if the rate is controlled to a low decrease state, it is possible to expect the provision of benefits.

In addition, in both the decrease state (end) and the decrease state (continue), the conditions related to the provision of benefits such as the probability of winning the Navistock lottery may be preferentially treated compared to the increase state. Therefore, even if control is performed in a decrease state in which the payout rate of medals is lower than in an increase state, it is possible to expect the provision of benefits.

[Regarding the number of games in the advantageous section]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes an advantageous interval game number counter and an ED shift game number counter as counters for counting the number of games in the advantageous interval. The number of advantageous section games counted by the number of advantageous section games counter indicates whether the number of bets is 2 or 3, and whether the game state is RT0 to RT3. The number of ED transition games counted by the ED transition game number counter is updated when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. On the other hand, when the number of bets is 2, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, it is not updated. The main control unit 41 uses the number of games for the advantageous interval, which is updated regardless of the condition, as the number of games for determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous interval, thereby preventing the advantageous interval from becoming excessively long. Therefore, it is recommended to use the ED transition game number that is not updated unless the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1 as the number of games for determining the ceiling value, the tentative ceiling value, and the third ED transition condition. Playing a game can be urged under certain conditions.

The area of the RAM 41c that is initialized at the end of the advantageous interval includes both the advantageous interval game number counter and the ED transition game number counter. It is designed to be Therefore, even after the advantageous interval ends, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon of the finished advantageous interval from affecting the next advantageous interval, such as the number of games in the advantageous interval and the number of games transitioning to the ED being taken over.

Further, in this embodiment, when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, the number of games to be updated to the ED reaches the fifth specified number, and the end condition of the advantageous section is established. Even if the game is played without satisfying the conditions, it is not controlled to the ED state, so it is possible to effectively encourage playing the game under the recommended conditions. .

Further, as described above, the sub control unit 91 displays the number of remaining games in the ED state in the ED effect executed in the ED state, and the number of remaining games in the ED state is calculated based on the number of advantageous interval games. Thus, the number of remaining games in the ED state can be accurately indicated in the ED state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the AT state when the number of ED transition games reaches the ceiling value as described above, and the first AT lottery when the number of ED transition games reaches the temporary ceiling value. ED transition game number is used not only to determine the third ED transition condition, which is the condition for transition to the ED state, but also to determine the conditions for transition to the AT state and the lottery conditions. Thus, the number of ED transition games can be shared between the determination of the conditions for transition to the ED state and the determination of the conditions for transition to the AT state and the lottery conditions.

In addition, the number of ED games used to determine the condition for transition to the ED state, the condition for transition to the AT state, and the lottery condition is updated on the condition that the number of bets is 3. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the number of bets of 3 that makes the payout rate of medals appropriate.

In addition, the number of ED games used for determining the transition condition to the ED state, the transition condition to the AT state, and the lottery condition is updated on the condition that the game state is RT1. It is possible to prompt the player to play the game at RT1 in which the medal payout rate is appropriate.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is provided with a net increase number counter that counts the net increase number of medals after being controlled to the AT state in the advantageous section, and is controlled to the AT state counted by the net increase number counter. The net increase in number of medals from 1 is used to determine the end condition 2 of the advantageous section, whether the number of bets is 2 or 3, and whether the game state is RT0 to RT3. It is updated in any gaming state. In this way, the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state used for determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous interval is updated regardless of the conditions, so that the game in which the number of bets is 2 and the game state are RT1. It is possible to determine the end condition 2 of the advantageous interval by taking into account the increase in medals in games other than RT1, and even if the game is played with a bet number of 2 or the game is played in a gaming state other than RT1, the advantageous interval is not reached. Establishment of end condition 2 cannot be delayed.

[Various processing executed by the main controller]
Control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 executing the game program and the non-game program will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 78. FIG.

[Regarding initial setting processing]
The start-up processing and initial setting processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 . The start-up processing and initial setting processing are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 is activated with the timer interrupt disabled due to the occurrence of a reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b. After start-up, first, the start-up setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all the output ports 0 to 9, and the internal registers provided in the main control unit 41 are set in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Initial setting processing included in the game program initialized based on the built-in register initialization table is performed.

As shown in FIG. 48, the initialization process is started with timer interrupt disabled. In the initialization process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1), and the It is determined whether or not the power failure detection signal is in the ON state (Sa2). Then, when the power failure detection signal is in the ON state, it waits until the power failure detection signal is in the OFF state. After that, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power interruption detection signal becomes OFF, the parity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether or not the parity calculated in step Sa3 is normal (Sa5), and if the parity is normal, fixed data for RAM breakdown diagnosis set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c at the time of power failure is acquired. Then (Sa6), it is diagnosed whether or not the memory contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed based on the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis (Sa7).

If it is determined that the parity is normal in step Sa5, and if the stored content of the RAM 41c is diagnosed in step Sa7, the parity in the RAM 41c calculated in step Sa3 and the result of the diagnosis in step Sa7 are stored in the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality (Sa8). The case where the RAM 41c has an abnormality is the case where the parity is not normal, or the case where the parity is normal but it is diagnosed that there is an abnormality in the stored contents.

Then, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register storing the calculation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area using the second save instruction. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called using the aforementioned CALL command (Sa10).

In the non-game RAM area initialization process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is transferred from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. It is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. Incidentally, when the non-game RAM area initialization processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the game program to that for the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is It may differ from the state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization processing.

After that, specify the start address (first address of the unused area 4) and end address (last address of the non-game RAM area) of the initialization target RAM, and use the start address as the initial value of the specified address. is cleared and then the specified address is updated to the next address until the specified address reaches the end address. area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-game RAM area) is initialized. In addition, in the non-game RAM area initialization process, by specifying the start address and the end address of the initialization object RAM, the capacity of the initialization object RAM is calculated, and the RAM area of the initialization object RAM A configuration may be adopted in which the area from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM is initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started, the values of the registers that have been stored and saved in the non-game stack area are saved in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from the game stack area and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization processing was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, read out the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is terminated. In order to end the non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the non-game RAM area initialization process are restored. After that, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after That is, the state of the register when the non-game RAM area initialization process is terminated may differ from the state of the register saved when the non-game RAM area initialization process is started.

Perform non-game RAM area initialization processing in the step of Sa10, initialize the non-game RAM area of the RAM41c, when returning to the initial setting processing, using the second return instruction described above, the game in the step of Sa9 By sequentially reading the value of the flag register saved in the stack area from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the non-game RAM area initialization processing is performed. state is restored (Sa11). Save processing and return processing of all registers in the non-game RAM area initialization processing in the step of Sa10, and save processing and return processing of the flag register in steps of Sa9 and Sa11 are performed, thereby the non-game RAM region After the initialization process is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the process was performed.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c in step Sa8, and if the register is restored in step Sa11, the fixed data for RAM breakdown diagnosis set in the RAM 41c is cleared (Sa12), and if there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c If there is, set an initialization start address at the time of RAM destruction for designating the address of the game RAM area to be initialized (Sa13). After that, referring to the input port 2, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state (Sa14).

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is ON, setting change processing is performed. In the setting change process, the setting value is confirmed by operating the reset/setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in a predetermined procedure, and the setting change process is started by detecting that the setting key switch 37 has been turned off. and move the game to a state where it can be progressed. In the setting change process, when starting the setting change process, a setting command (start) indicating the start of the setting change process is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and when the setting change process ends, A setting command (end) indicating the end of the setting change process is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 . In the setting change process, when ending the setting change process, the start address of the RAM area to be initialized at the time of setting change is specified, and the process returns to step Sb47 of the main process. Then, by performing the RAM initialization processing in the step of Sb47, the area from the top address of the initialization target RAM area at the time of setting change to the end address of the game RAM area, that is, all the game RAM areas are initialized. It has become so. In addition, it is good also as a structure which initializes all the game RAM areas except the stack area in use of RAM41c. In the RAM initialization process performed after the setting change process is completed, the area to be initialized includes a storage area for storing information on the advantageous section, and the information on the advantageous section is initialized. The area to be initialized does not include a storage area for storing information on the carryover state in which winning of the special combination (BB1, BB2) is carried over, and the information on the carryover state is not initialized. .

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the parity of the RAM calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). , when it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). Also, a reel error counter, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of reel rotation errors detected in the main processing described later, is cleared (Sa17). After that, the address at the time of power failure is set in the stack pointer SP based on the contents stored in the RAM 41c to return the stack pointer to the state at the time of power failure (Sa18), and the port input processing is performed twice consecutively (Sa19). , Sa20).

Port input processing includes input state data (input data indicating the current input state of various switches, input data indicating the current input state of the various switches input to the parallel input port 511 such as detection signals of various switches, and This is a process of updating the confirmed data indicating that the confirmed data is changed from the previous time). Input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input state data of various switches are provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. , input data, definite data, and edge data) are stored in predetermined bits of an input buffer predetermined for each type of switch and each type of input state data. In the port input process, by storing the detection state (ON state or OFF state) of the various switches among the input state data of the various switches as input data in the input port 0 of the parallel input port 511, the input of the various sensors can be performed. Update the data to the detected state at the execution timing of the current port input process. Input data of various switches are stored in predetermined bits of input port 0 corresponding to each switch. In the port input process, when input data is stored in the input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input process and the input data to be stored in the input buffer by the current port input process are By comparing each sensor type, the current input data detection state (ON state or OFF state) is created and stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, while the current and previous input data are different (previous ON state and this time OFF state or previous OFF state and this time ON state) state), create fixed data so as to maintain the detection state of the previous input data, and store it in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 1, so that the various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 update the confirmed data of In addition, in the port input process, when storing the finalized data in the input buffer 1, the finalized data of this time and the last time are compared, and the finalized data of various sensors whose finalized data changed from the OFF state to the ON state is turned OFF. ON edge data indicating that the state has changed from the ON state to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and the determined data changes from the ON state to the OFF state for various sensors whose determined data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 are updated by storing the OFF edge data indicating that it has been done in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2 . The input data, fixed data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers 0-2 can be referred to from game programs and non-game programs.

In addition, in the initial setting process, by performing the port input process twice in succession, when the port input process is subsequently performed, the input states of the various switches after the initial setting process, that is, the slot machine 1 Since the input state data regarding the input state of the detection signals of the various switches is created based on the input state of the various switches after the power supply to the is resumed, the unintended input state may be specified. can be prevented. Also, in the port input process, the final data may be created based on the input data acquired by three or more port input processes (for example, the current, previous, and two previous input data). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by continuously performing the port input process in the initial setting process a number of times less than the number of times of the port input process required to create the finalized data. When the port input process is performed after the initial setting process, the input status data can be created based on the input status of the various switches after the initial setting process is performed.

After performing port input processing in steps Sa19 and Sa20, a predetermined input port is referenced (Sa21) to determine whether or not the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa22). When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section is initialized. Section information initialization processing is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous interval information initialization process, information related to advantageous intervals (output buffer for advantageous interval signal, flag for advantageous interval, output buffer for interval display LED 19, number of games for advantageous interval, net addition of medals for advantageous interval) in the storage area of RAM 41c number of sheets, etc.) is initialized. In the advantageous zone information initialization process, an area where information about the internal winning flag of the special combination (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2), set values (1 to 6), etc. is stored. will not be initialized, and the information on the internal winning flag of the special role and the set value (1 to 6) etc. will be the contents when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped last time. will be maintained.

In this embodiment, in the initial setting process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, is a configuration for initializing the information about the advantageous interval stored in the RAM 41c by the advantageous interval information initialization processing, but the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and turned on. In this case, the information about the internal winning status and the information about the setting value among the information stored in the RAM 41c are maintained without being initialized, and at least the information about the advantageous section is initialized. It is sufficient to have a configuration in which information other than the information on the internal winning status and the information on the set value can be initialized together with the information on the advantageous section.

When it is determined in step Sa22 that the reset/setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after the advantageous section information initialization processing is executed in step Sa23, a return command is issued to indicate that the control state before the power interruption has been restored. After transmission to the sub-controller 91 (Sa24), in the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main), the door command transmission flag indicating that the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is to be transmitted is stored in the RAM 41c. Set in the area (Sa25). In command transmission processing, a door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes. A door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted regardless of whether or not the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed.

After setting the door command transmission flag in step Sa25, all registers are restored to the state before the power failure stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), timer interrupt is set to permitted (Sa27), After completing the initial setting process and shifting to the timer interrupt process (main), the main process executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped is returned to.

On the other hand, in the step of Sa15, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM41c, a game RAM initialization process is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM41c is started from the initialization start address at the time of RAM destruction set in the step of Sa13. Initialize the area to the end of . After that, in the same manner as the processing from Sa9 to Sa11, after saving the value of the flag register in which the flag is set among the registers to the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sa29), the non-game program included in the After calling the game RAM area initialization process (Sa30) and initializing all the non-game RAM areas of the RAM 41c, it returns to the calling source and restores the register saved in the step of Sa29 (Sa31).

After the register is restored in step Sa31, the door command transmission flag is set (Sa32), the timer interrupt is enabled (Sa33), and the RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c is generated. A predetermined register is prepared (Sa34), the initialization process is terminated, and the error process is started.

In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E8) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example, It is set as an error flag that can be referred to in a sensor monitoring process, etc., which will be described later. Also, it controls to display the error code (E8) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E8) prepared in the predetermined register is established. When the RAM abnormality error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state is shifted to the error state, by turning on the power switch 39 while the setting key switch 37 is ON, the state is shifted to the setting change state. By initializing all the game RAM areas, the data abnormality in the RAM 41c can be reliably resolved and the error state can be released. On the other hand, if the power switch 39 is turned ON without turning the setting key switch 37 ON, the abnormality of the RAM 41c is detected again, and the error state occurs again.

As described above, the main control unit 41 first performs the initial setting process after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when the process is started, the process is shifted to any one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. When shifting to these processes, a command capable of specifying the type of processing to be shifted is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. When shifting to timer interrupt processing (main), that is, slot machine 1, the return command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the setting change process is started to shift to the setting change state. A setting command (start) is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 when error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c and the state shifts to an error state.

After the transition from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 goes through the setting change state and returns to the state in which the game can be progressed. When returning to the state, a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is terminated is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, but the return command is not transmitted. In addition, after shifting to error processing due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the processing shifts to the setting change processing as described above and the error state is canceled, thereby returning to a state in which the game can be progressed. The return command is not transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 even when the error processing is terminated and the game is returned to a state in which the game can be progressed.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the activation setting process included in the game program, and performs all the settings according to the activation setting process. Output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

Further, after performing the startup setting process, the main control unit 41 performs an initial setting process included in the game program. In the initial setting process, when it is determined that the RAM 41c has an abnormality, a non-game RAM area initialization process included in the non-game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the initial setting process, a RAM initialization process included in the game program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-game program.

In the initial setting process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, the advantageous section information initialization process is executed to initialize the information on the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. . As a result, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c is initialized as information on the advantageous section, and the slot machine 1 can be started with the section display LED 19 turned off. there is In addition, in the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous interval information initialization process, the output buffer for the advantageous interval signal and the advantageous interval flag as information on the advantageous interval are also initialized. The game state is controlled to the normal section and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state until the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied.

In addition, in the RAM initialization process that is performed after the setting change process is completed, the information on the advantageous section is initialized, but the information on the carryover state of the special combination is not initialized. is changed, the carry-over state of the special role before the setting value is changed is maintained.

[About main processing]
The control contents of the main processing performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. The main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One cycle of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game. Also, the main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processes that are not specifically indicated as being included in the non-game program are included in the game program. Some of the game programs called by the game program call non-game programs.

As shown in FIG. 49, the main control unit 41 first disables the timer interrupt (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). , the address one before the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value is initialized by writing 0 (Sb4), and set from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register and the DE register by Sb58 or Sb87, which will be described later. 0 is written in each storage area of the RAM initialization object size to be initialized sequentially (Sb5).

After that, referring to the current game state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the value corresponding to the game state is read into the A register (Sb6), and a game end command that can specify that one game has ended is issued. The value is set in the D register (Sb7). Then, communication data storage processing is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A and D registers and set in the command queue. For example, if a game state is set in the A register and a game end command value is set in the D register, a game end command containing information that can specify the current game state is generated and set in the command queue. do. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted by command transmission processing included in subsequent timer interrupt processing.

After the communication data storage processing is performed in step Sb8, the value of the flag register storing the operation result is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order using the above-mentioned second save instruction. (Sb9), the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called using the aforementioned CALL instruction (Sb10).

In the RT information output process, first, using the LD instruction described above, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. As in the case of calling the non-game RAM area initialization process described above, when the RT information output process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the stack pointer SP is moved from the game program to the non-game When changing for the program, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the RT information output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the RT information output process is determined by the RT information output process. may differ from the state of the registers when you call

After that, referring to the information about the game state of the slot machine 1 set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, the information about the game state (for example, the state of RT) is sent to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. It is set to output from the output port 7 as a test signal to be output. Then, the values of the registers stored in the non-game stack area and saved when the RT information output process is started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving, and the values corresponding to the order are read out. By setting the register, all the registers are returned to the state when the RT information output process was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when starting the RT information output process, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output processing was started, and the RT information output processing is terminated. In addition, in the same way as when the non-game RAM area initialization process is ended, the RT information output process included in the non-game program is ended, and the RT information output process is started in order to return to the game program. When the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the time, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is cleared by using the LD instruction. Therefore, the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

After performing the RT information output process in the step of Sb10, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the step of Sb9 is sequentially saved from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. It is restored by reading out and setting in the flag register (Sb11). RT information output processing is performed by performing saving processing and restoring processing of all registers inside the RT information output processing in step Sb10 and saving processing and restoring processing of flag registers in steps Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb11, a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal standby time is set in the BC register (Sb12), and the system waits until timer interrupts are performed the number of times corresponding to the value of the BC register. Interrupt BC wait processing is performed (Sb13). In the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt is set to enabled and waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. It repeats until it becomes 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 milliseconds is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the test signal standby time, and in step Sb13, the interrupt BC wait processing is performed. Thus, at least the test signal standby time (16.24 msec) is ensured from after the RT information output process of Sb10 to the next process.

In addition, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the process performed after the interrupt BC wait process can be performed in a state in which the maximum time is secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed. A timer interrupt is prevented from being unintentionally performed during a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC wait process. By performing the interrupt BC time waiting process in the step Sb13, the timer interrupt is unintentionally performed during the processing from the step Se1 to the step Se10 of the game start waiting process performed after the interrupt BC time waiting process. By preventing this, the processing from step Se1 to step Se10 can be performed as a series of processing.

Also, by performing the interrupt BC wait process, the timer interrupt process is reliably performed at least once, so that after each process included in the timer interrupt process is performed, after the interrupt BC wait process A series of operations can be performed. For example, by performing the interrupt BC wait process in the step of Sb13, the port input process included in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, and the input data of various switches and sensors are updated, and the game is started. The process from step Se1 to step Se10 of the waiting process can be performed.

After the timer interruption process is performed, the game start waiting process is performed (Sb14), and the process from the end of control of the previous game to the start of the next game is performed. In the game start waiting processing, processing is performed to set the number of bets according to the insertion of medals or the like, and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, the next game is started. Start processing.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine (internal lottery) whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, winning is allowed based on preset values (1 to 6) in the slot machine 1 and random numbers for internal lottery obtained at the same time as the start of the game by detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is held to determine whether or not to allow the derivation of display results. Then, the winning combination number (including the winning number and losing combination) corresponding to the winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the winning result in the internal lottery can be specified. Also, group information setting processing (general combination) to be described later is performed, and group information (general combination) capable of specifying the type of winning general combination based on the combination number (winning number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. do. In addition, if a special role is won in the internal lottery (including cases where the lottery is won in the internal lottery of the game and cases where the lottery is carried over to the game before the game), An internal winning flag indicating that the special combination (BB1, BB2) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not BB1 has been won, and when it is determined that BB1 has been won, A predetermined value (ON state value: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set in an output buffer (output buffer of the state display LED 17) set in a predetermined area for controlling the lighting state of the state display LED 17. do.

By setting the ON state value to the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be in the lighting state by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing which is performed thereafter. After performing the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the reel rotation process (Sb45), which will be described later, thereby starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R so that all the reels are in a constant speed state. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated under the condition that it becomes, and the interrupt BC waiting process (Sb28 )I do. As a result, the timer interrupt processing is performed at least once during the period, and when the ON state value is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch 8L is activated. , 8C, and 8R are enabled, the state display LED 17 is controlled to light up, and the state notification is reliably started before the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are enabled. It is possible to do so. Also, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, and the status display LED 17 is turned on by subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the status display starts immediately after winning the special combination (BB1), the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid for the time to check whether the status display is being performed. It is now possible to secure enough before it becomes.

Then, after the internal lottery process is performed, a ball output control process for performing a process relating to the game section and a process relating to the navigation notification is carried out as described later (Sb16). In the ball output control process, it is determined whether or not it is an advantageous section based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, and when it is determined that it is not an advantageous section, the number of bets is set to 3. Advantageous section transition-related processing (for example, processing for determining whether or not an advantageous section transition combination has been won in an internal lottery, or processing that is advantageous in an internal When it is determined that the section transition hand has been won, the processing to shift to the advantageous section by setting the advantageous section flag indicating that control is being performed to the advantageous section by continuous data processing, and the transition to the advantageous section processing to perform various settings, etc.), and if it is determined that it is an advantageous section, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the game after the advantageous section starts Renewal by adding one game to the number-of-advantage-section game counter that counts the number of games in the advantageous section, and navigation notification performed under the condition that the number of bets is 2 or the game state is other than RT1. Processing (for example, processing to update the ED transition game number counter for specifying the game to transition to the ED state in which navigation notification control is performed until the end of the advantageous section, or control to a predetermined ball output state) On the condition that the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is set ON data (predetermined value: 1) to control the lighting state, based on the general combination winning number, the winning combination based on the navigation number A corresponding navi number is specified, a process of setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of performing various processes according to the currently controlled ball output state, etc.). The navigation number set in the ball output control process is referred to in the later-described game start command transmission process (Sb22), and a command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-controller 91. In addition, the navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and before the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated by the reel stop control process, Display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation display is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 . In addition, the number of advantageous zone games counter updated during the advantageous zone by the ball output control process indicates that the number of advantageous zone games has reached the specified number of games (first specified number) in the AT state management process (Sb60) described later. It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

After that, as in step Sb11, using the above-described second save instruction, the value of the flag register storing the operation result among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order. (Sb17), disables timer interrupts (Sb18), and then uses the aforementioned CALL command to perform operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program (Sb19), and The operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery is output from the output port to the test device.

In the operation information signal output process, first, in the same way as in the RT information output process, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read out using the LD instruction described above, and stored in the non-game RAM area. to a predetermined area. After that, using the LD instruction, read out the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program, and set it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, thereby resetting the stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 including the above-mentioned flag register are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. Let When the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the game program to that for the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the operation information signal output process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output process is determined by the game program. The state of the register may differ from when the signal output processing is called.

After that, referring to the lottery result of the internal lottery set in the predetermined area of the game RAM area, the process of outputting the operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery is performed. conduct.

Then, in the same manner as in the RT information output process described above, using the first return instruction described above, the values of the registers that were saved when the operation information signal output process was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, All registers are restored to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started. After that, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the operation information signal output process is started using the LD instruction described above and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the operation information signal output processing was started, and the operation information signal output processing is ended. In order to terminate the operation information signal output processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all the registers that had been saved at the start of the operation information signal output processing, When changing the stack pointer SP from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the flag is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. Registers may change state. That is, the state of the register when the operation information signal output process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output process is started.

The operation information signal output process is performed after the ball output control process of controlling the section display LED 19 to light up when a predetermined condition is established to display the section and setting the navigation number. In the signal output processing, the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started.

After the operation information signal output processing is performed in step Sb19, the timer interrupt is set to be enabled (Sb20). Then, as in the step of Sb11, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in the step of Sb17 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. is set in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the operation information signal output processing is performed (Sb21). The operation information signal output process is performed by performing the save process and restore process of all registers in the operation information signal output process in step Sb19 and the save process and restore process of the flag register in steps Sb17 and Sb21. After the process is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

After restoring the register in step Sb21, a game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22), it is possible to specify that one game has started, and to specify various control states at the start of one game. A control state command group including a plurality of commands is set in a command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

After the game start command is processed in step Sb22, the number of the external output signal to be output at the start of the game is read into the A register (Sb25), and the external output signal is output to external devices such as call lamps and hall computers. external output signal processing is performed (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, an external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register is output from a predetermined output port when the external output signal processing is started.

After performing external output signal processing in step Sb26, a value corresponding to a predetermined waiting time for game start is set in the BC register (Sb27), and the system waits until timer interrupts are performed the number of times corresponding to the value of the BC register. Interrupt BC wait processing is performed (Sb28). In the interrupt BC wait processing, the timer interrupt is set to enabled and waits until the timer interrupt processing is performed. It repeats until it becomes 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 milliseconds is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the game start waiting time, and in step Sb28, the interrupt BC time waiting process is performed. At least a game start waiting time (133.28 milliseconds) is ensured from after the external output signal processing of Sb26 to the next processing.

After the interrupt BC waiting process is performed in the step of Sb28, the waiting time effect determination process for controlling the freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed (Sb29). In the waiting time effect determination process, based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game is to be frozen when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started. When it is determined that it is decided to control to the freeze state, a predetermined value is set in the BC register to perform interruption BC waiting processing to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so as to be able to specify that control is to be performed in a frozen state, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination process, if it is determined that it is not determined to control to the freeze state based on the freeze flag, wait without setting the BC register or performing the interrupt BC time waiting process. Terminate the time performance determination process.

After the waiting time effect determination processing is performed in step Sb29, external output signal processing is performed to output an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer (Sb30). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and whether or not it is determined to generate a short freeze (freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined short period, hereinafter sometimes referred to as SF) is determined. An identifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and based on the SF flag value, it is determined whether or not it is decided to generate an SF (Sb32). The SF flag is generated in SF, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process (in this embodiment, when the ED freeze state is controlled in the game following the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied). It is set so that the effect can be specified.

In step Sb32, if it is determined that SF is to be generated, the head address of the SF time setting table in which the period for controlling SF is registered in advance is set in the HL register (Sb33). , addition processing is executed (Sb34). In addition processing, by adding the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition processing to the address value (HL) set in the HL register, the address value (HL) becomes the addition value ( A) Perform processing to advance by the minute. In addition, in the addition process, the data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after adding the addition value (A) is obtained and set in the A register. . By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing addition processing, the period for controlling to SF based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table is set. A set value for setting is acquired in the A register.

After performing the addition process in the step of Sb34, the set value of the SF control period acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, a reel effect number capable of identifying the type of roulette effect is set in the A register (Sb36), and reel rotation start processing is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start process, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value. After that, the B register value is reset to the A register, and the waiting time execution process is performed (Sb37). The waiting time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the value of the A register.

In step Sb32, it is determined that it has been decided to generate SF, wait time execution processing is performed, and after SF is performed, the RAM 41c is used to count the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game. is set in the HL register (Sb39), the one-game-time management timer is referenced based on the HL register value, and the one-game-time management timer is in operation (Sb40). After the initial value (value corresponding to the prescribed time (4.1 seconds) of one game) is set, the one-game-time management timer is decremented by a predetermined value each time the timer interrupt process is performed, and the initial value is It is 1 or more until the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game has passed since the initial value was set, while the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game has passed since the initial value was set. After that, it becomes 0.

In step Sb40, if the one-game-time management timer value is not 0, it is determined that the one-game-time management timer is in operation; Determine that the timer is not running. When it is determined that the prescribed time has not passed since the game was started last time based on the one-game-time managing timer, the one-game-time prescribed time elapses based on the one-game-time managing timer. (Sb40).

As shown in FIG. 50, after the stipulated time for one game has elapsed based on the one-game-time management timer, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb41), and then predetermined set index data at the start of the game is set. is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In the continuous data processing, as will be described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and a continuous data processing table described later. This is a process for performing a process such as a process to By performing continuous data processing with the index data set at the start of the game set in the A register, the initial value (the value equivalent to the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game) is set in the one-game-time management timer. ), a process of setting an initial value (3 in this embodiment) to a stop switch operation counter that counts the number of times the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effectively operated during one game, each stop switch Processing such as setting an initial value to a stop switch operating state flag capable of specifying the operating state of 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed.

The initial value set in the one-game-time management timer by performing the continuous data processing in step Sb43 is referred to in the subsequent timer interrupt processing, and the initial value is set in the one-game-time management timer. Based on this, the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal newly starts counting the predetermined time. In addition, the one game time management timer is decremented each time the counter update process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has passed. updated. When the initial value of the one-game-time management timer is set based on the fact that the one-game-time management timer is set to 0, that is, when reel rotation start processing is started in the previous game, one game is completed. It can be specified that the specified time (4.1 seconds) has passed.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sb43, no reel effect data indicating that effect using reels is not performed is set in register A (Sb44), and reel rotation start processing is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start process, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, in a normal game rotation mode. Thereafter, after timer interrupt is set to be permitted (Sb46), a reel rotation start command is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 to specify that the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is to be started. Processing is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa40 based on the timer for managing one game time that the specified time for one game has passed, the processing of steps Sb41 to Sb47 is immediately performed.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in step Sb47, a reel stop control process for performing reel stop control is performed (Sb48). In the reel stop control process, first, the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and display data for performing navigation display according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, non-display data is displayed). data, and if the navigation number is 1 or more, navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number) is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 . As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled in a display mode according to the display data by subsequent timer interrupt processing. After the display data is set in the output buffer of the auxiliary game display 12, it is determined whether or not the reels under rotation control are rotating at a predetermined constant speed, and if there is a reel that is not rotating at a constant speed. detects a reel error, sets an excitation pattern for accelerating the relevant reel to constant speed rotation, and controls so that all the reels under rotation control are rotated at constant speed rotation. On the other hand, when all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, the acceptance of the stop operation of the reels under rotation control is enabled, and until the player stops the reels with the stop switch. stand by. By enabling acceptance of the stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R of the corresponding stop switches are controlled to be lit by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel on which a stop operation is valid (detection of ON edge data for a stop switch on which a stop operation is valid), a reel on which a valid stop operation is performed. , the reel stop control is performed to stop the reel at a predetermined stop position based on the information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed for the reels under rotation control to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby ending the reel stop processing.

Then, after the reel stop processing is finished, the winning determination processing (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the result of the internal lottery and the symbol combinations stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

Then, after performing the winning determination process in step Sa49, the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sb50), and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt processing has been performed once, the one-time interrupt waiting processing is terminated.

After the one-interrupt wait process is performed in step Sb45, the operation result is stored in the registers provided in the main control unit 41 using the second return instruction as in steps Sb9 and Sb17. The value of the flag register is stored in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area (Sb51), and after setting the timer interrupt to disabled (Sb52), using the CALL instruction described above, the non-game Data processing for role ratio monitor included in the program is performed (Sb53).

In this way, by performing the role ratio monitor data processing (Sb53) after performing the one-interrupt wait processing in the step of Sb50, the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is maximized. In this state, the data processing for role ratio monitoring can be performed, and it is possible to prevent unintentional timer interruption during the data processing for role ratio monitoring. Also, in step Sb52, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, the role ratio monitor data processing is performed in a state in which the timer interrupt is prohibited, and in the subsequent step of Sb54, by canceling the timer interrupt prohibition setting, It is possible to reliably prevent unintentional timer interruption in the middle of role ratio monitor data processing. In addition, in step Sb50, before setting the timer interrupt to the disabled state in order to perform the role ratio monitor data processing, the timer interrupt is prohibited by performing the one-time interrupt wait processing and causing the timer interrupt processing to be performed. When the state (Sb52 to Sb54) is in the state (Sb52 to Sb54), it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being triggered, and when the timer interrupt is disabled (Sb52 to Sb54), it is the timing to perform the timer interrupt. This prevents timer interrupt processing from being performed at unintended timing when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released.

By disabling the timer interrupt in the step Sb52, similarly to the case of disabling the timer interrupt in the step Sb18, the role ratio monitor can be used from the time the flag register is saved in the step Sb51. During the period from the start of data processing until the processing to save the values of all registers, timer interrupt processing is performed, and the state of the register is changed from the state when the flag register was saved. It is designed not to be put away.

In the role ratio monitor data processing, first, in the same manner as in the RT information output processing and the like, the LD instruction is used to read the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and the value of the non-game program is read. Save to a predetermined area in the RAM area. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read, and by setting the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game program. set for the program. Then, using the above-mentioned first save command, the values of all the registers of the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. In addition, when the role ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the game program to the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the role ratio monitor data process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the role ratio monitor data process is determined by the game program. The register status may differ from when the role ratio monitor data processing is called.

After that, each state count process included in the non-game program is performed, and the predetermined period (for example, the period from the current game to 6000 games before, the period from the current game to 175000 games before, etc.) Data relating to the number of medals to be paid out in a section controlled to be advantageous (advantageous section, etc.) is updated.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that had been saved in the non-game stack area when the role ratio monitor data processing was started are saved in the non-game order in the reverse order of saving. By sequentially reading from the stack area and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the role ratio monitor data processing was started. After that, using the aforementioned LD instruction, read out the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the role ratio monitor data processing was started, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring was started, and the data processing for role ratio monitoring is ended. In order to terminate the role ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the values of all the registers that had been saved at the start of the role ratio monitor data processing were restored. Later, when the stack pointer SP is changed from the non-game program to the game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction. may change the state of the flag register. That is, the state of the register when the data processing for role ratio monitoring ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the data processing for role ratio monitoring is started.

After performing the role ratio monitor data processing in step Sb53, the timer interrupt is set to permitted (Sb54). Then, similarly to step Sb11 and step Sb21, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in step Sb51 is sequentially read out from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving. is set in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before performing the data processing for the role ratio monitor (Sb55). By performing the save processing and restoration processing of all registers in the role ratio monitor data processing in step Sb53 and the save processing and restoration processing of the flag register in steps Sb51 and Sb55, the role ratio monitor data After the process is performed, the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb55, the door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is sub-processed in the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main). It is made to transmit to the control section 91 .

Thereafter, an illegal winning check process is performed (Sb57). In the fraudulent winning check process, it is determined whether or not fraudulent winning has occurred based on the combination of symbols stopped on the reel winning line LN and the winning result of the internal lottery, and if fraudulent winning has occurred. Then, the error code is set in the A register to end the fraudulent prize check processing, and when fraudulent prize winning does not occur, the fraudulent prize check processing is performed without setting the error code.

After performing the fraudulent winning check process at Sb57, the winning series end check process is performed (Sb58). In the winning series end check process, it is determined whether or not the player is in a special state (BB1, BB2), and if the special state is in effect, it is determined whether or not the conditions for ending the special state are satisfied in the game. . Then, when it is determined that the conditions for ending the special state are met, processing such as setting a BB end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

After performing the combination end check process in Sb58, the game state setting process is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not BB1 or BB2, which has been won in the internal lottery, has won a prize, and if it is determined that BB1 or BB2 has won, the game state is changed to the winning BB. Processing to shift to the corresponding special state is performed.

After the game state setting process is performed in Sb59, an AT state management process for performing a process regarding a game section and a process regarding a navigation notification is performed (Sb60). In the AT state management process, a process for determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous section based on whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), If it is determined, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2 in the game, update the net increase number counter that counts the number of net increase in medals paid out in the advantageous section. processing, processing of setting an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the advantageous interval is terminated when it is determined that the number of net increases in medals exceeds a second specified number based on the updated net increase counter; A processing for setting an advantageous interval end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous interval games specified based on the above has reached a first specified number, and a state in which the number of bets is 2 or a gaming state other than RT1 Processing related to navigation notification performed on the condition (for example, processing for determining whether the ED transition condition is satisfied, processing for setting an ED transition flag indicating that control is to be performed to the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, ball output various processing according to the state).

The advantageous interval end flag set by the AT state management process is referred to in the later-described processing (Sb70) in the main process, and when the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, Among them, information related to the advantageous interval (e.g., advantageous interval game number counter, net increase number counter, ED transition game number counter, ball output status information, output buffer for interval display LED 19, output buffer for signal during advantageous interval, etc.) is stored. By performing the advantageous interval data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing the predetermined area where the area is, the series of advantageous intervals is terminated. Advantageous section data initialization processing is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized. is terminated. In addition, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the output buffer for the advantageous section signal, so that the advantageous section signal is controlled to be in the OFF state.

After performing AT state management processing in Sb60, batch transmission data storage processing is performed (Sb61), and a plurality of commands to be transmitted to the sub-controller 91 at the end of one game are collectively set in the command queue. . A plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage process are sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After performing batch transmission data storage processing in step Sb61, freeze processing during stop is performed (Sb62). In the freeze-while-stop process, it is determined whether or not it is decided to control to the freeze state when the final stop operation is performed, based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined that the control is determined, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and processing for waiting for the interrupt BC is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set so as to be able to specify that control is to be performed in a frozen state, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the freeze during stop processing, if it is determined based on the freeze flag that it is not decided to control to the freeze state, the BC register is set and the interrupt BC wait processing is not performed. End the freeze process.

After the freeze-while-stop processing is performed in step Sb62, medal payout processing is performed to pay out the number of medals corresponding to the winnings generated as a result of the game (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals that are predetermined for each winning combination are awarded to the player according to the winning that occurs, the number of awarded medals is added to the credits, and the credits reach the upper limit ( In this embodiment, when 50) is reached, the hopper motor 34b is driven and the medals not added to the credits are paid out from the medal payout opening 9. FIG.

After the medal payout process is performed in the step of Sb62, transmission data indicating completion of the medal payout process is set in the A register (Sb64), the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65), A communication data storage process is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A and D registers and set in the command queue. is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout process has ended is generated and set in the command queue.

After the communication data storage process is performed in the step of Sb66, the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and the waiting time effect process is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time effect process, it is determined whether or not it is decided to control to the freeze state at the end of the game based on the data set in the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, and the freeze state is controlled. When it is determined that it is decided to play, a predetermined value is set in the BC register and processing for waiting for the interrupt BC is performed to delay the progress of the game for a predetermined period. In the RAM 41c, the setting address for freezing at the end of the game is set with data capable of specifying that the game is to be controlled into a frozen state when, for example, a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball output control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect process, if it is determined that the data that can specify that the control to the freeze state is not set in the setting address of the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, the setting of the BC register and the interrupt BC To terminate waiting time presentation processing without performing waiting processing or the like.

After the waiting time effect is performed in the step of Sb68, a setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replay combination is stopped on the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. A process of setting the bet amount for replay (in this embodiment, the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to the same bet amount as the prescribed number of the game as replay medals). ), a process of setting a replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of controlling the replaying LED 20 to the ON state (lighting state), and the like.

Then, after the game end setting processing is performed in step Sb69, it is determined whether or not an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the advantageous interval is to be ended is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70). When it is determined that the section end flag is set, an advantageous section data initialization for ending the advantageous section by initializing a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control during the advantageous section is stored. conversion processing (Sb71 to Sb79).

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of partitions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process (2 in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area partitions (Sb71). . Then, the RAM initialization table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas to be initialized (capacity, number of addresses included) correspond to the value indicated by the number of sections. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b storing the set table) is set in the predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, the number of addresses in the area to be initialized is set in a predetermined register (B), and the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) is acquired and used as the RAM address to be initialized. Set in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

After setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A ), a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). After that, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the RAM address to be initialized is advanced by one (Sb76).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the number of remaining addresses is subtracted by 1, and then whether or not the number of remaining addresses is greater than 0 is determined to determine whether or not the range to be initialized has ended. is determined (Sb78). If it is determined in step Sd78 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than 0 and the range to be initialized has not ended, the process returns to step Sb75, and the processing of Sb75 to Sb78 is performed until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. This is repeated until initialization target determination is completed. As a result, a memory area (initialization target range) corresponding to the number of memory areas to be initialized (the number of addresses) from the first address of the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized, which is predetermined in the RAM initialization data table, is expanded. , is initialized with initialization data.

If it is determined in step Sb78 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0 and that the range to be initialized has ended, that is, if all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table have been initialized By subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), 1 is subtracted from the value indicated by the number of partitions in the memory area of the RAM 41c to be initialized (Sb78), and whether or not the value indicated by the number of partitions after subtraction is 0 (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of partitions is not 0, the process returns to step Sb73. and sets it in a predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the area to be initialized, and obtains from the RAM initialization table the value of the top address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D). , after setting the RAM address to be initialized in the predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74), the initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A), and set in the predetermined register (C). After initializing the predetermined area of the RAM 41c with the initialization data by setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address (Sb75) The process of incrementing the value of the predetermined register (C) by 1 to advance the RAM address to be initialized by one (Sb75) is repeated until it is determined that the number of addresses has become 0 in step Sb79. Thus, the memory area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the memory area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating the processing in steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of divisions of the storage area becomes 0, the predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c designated by the number of divisions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of divisions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control during the advantageous interval includes data related to the control of the AT state, and a predetermined area in which the data related to the control during the advantageous interval is stored in the RAM 41c by the advantageous interval data initialization process. is initialized, the data related to the control during the advantageous interval and the data related to the control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous interval ends and the AT state ends.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage areas of the predetermined two sections in the RAM 41c are initialized. A configuration may be employed in which a predetermined one segmented storage area or three or more segmented storage areas in the RAM 41c are initialized.

As shown in FIG. 51, after determining that the advantageous interval end flag is set in step Sb70 and performing advantageous interval data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79), and in step Sb70, advantageous interval end After it is determined that the flag is not set, the currently controlled game section is determined based on whether or not the advantageous section flag indicating that the advantageous section is being controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section (Sb80). The flag during the advantageous section is set when the predetermined number of bets is set to 3 by the ball output control process in step Sb16 described above, and when a predetermined advantageous section transition hand is made in an internal lottery in a game that is not controlled by the BB. It is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c under the condition that the game section is shifted to the advantageous section by winning the lottery.

If it is determined in step Sb80 that the flag during the advantageous interval is set, data (1) indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81). ), and proceed to step Sb82. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous interval flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb82 without setting data indicating the ON state in the output buffer for the advantageous interval signal. When data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section, the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section is the 0 value (OFF state) when initialized by the above-described advantageous section data initialization processing. data) is maintained.

Thereafter, in step Sb82, the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is referenced to determine whether the value of the data set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0: data indicating the OFF state). determine whether or not Then, in step Sb82, if it is determined that the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0), that is, if it is determined that the game interval is not controlled to the advantageous interval, the interval display LED is extinguished. The data number of the hour is set in the A register (Sb83), continuous data processing is performed (Sb84), and then the process proceeds to step Sb85. In the continuous data processing in Sb84, processing for setting the output state of the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state is performed based on the data number when the section display LED is turned off and a continuous data processing table which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set, and the game interval is controlled to be the advantageous interval. If so, the process proceeds to step Sb85 without performing steps Sb83 and Sb84.

At step Sb85, after setting the capacity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized each time one game ends (RAM initialization object size) in the BC register (Sb85), the BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game based on whether or not there is (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game by the aforementioned combination end check process.

Then, when it is determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized each time the special state ends (RAM initialization target size) is set in the BC register. (Sb87), returning to the processing of step Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process returns to step Sb1 without performing step Sb87.

After that, steps Sb1 to Sb87 are repeated. When the main process completes one unit of game control, the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

Thus, the initial setting process and the main process performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment include processes included in the game program and processes included in the non-game program, for example, non-game RAM area initialization process, RT information output, etc. processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, and the like. Then, when calling a process included in a non-game program, each time the process of the corresponding non-game program is called, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is changed to the game program on the calling game program side. It is stored in the stack area and saved, and the value of the stack pointer SP used in the game program is stored in the non-game RAM area and saved on the called non-game program side, and all the main control unit 41 has The value of the register is stored in the non-game stack area and saved. Then, processing corresponding to the called non-game program (for example, processing to initialize the non-game RAM area in the non-game RAM area initialization process, medal sensor check processing in the medal sensor process described later, role ratio monitor to be described later) Each state count processing in data processing, etc.) is performed.

Further, after the non-game program is processed, the main control unit 41 stores the values of all the registers saved in the non-game stack area at the start of the non-game program on the non-game program side. to restore the register to the state at the start of the non-game program, and set the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-game RAM area at the start of the non-game program to the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before calling the non-game program on the calling game program side is transferred to the corresponding flag register. A process is performed to restore the register to the state before the non-game program is called after reading.

Further, when performing various processes according to the non-game program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program using the aforementioned CALL command or the like. Upon completion of each process according to the non-game program, the program returns to the calling game program.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of this embodiment can call RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. included in the non-game program from the main processing included in the game program. It is possible, and the processes included in the non-game program called by the main process (RT information output process, operation information signal output process, role ratio monitor data process, etc.) First, using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the main process, which is the calling game program, is read out and saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-game program and setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program.

Also, the non-game program called by the main process uses the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, and then uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to store all the registers in the RAM 41c. A process of saving to a predetermined area is performed. At this time, in order to set the stack pointer SP for the non-game program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register. , the state of the flag register when the non-game program stack pointer SP is set may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, on the non-game program side, among all the registers saved using the first save instruction, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. , the flag register may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

In addition, the non-game program called by the main process uses the first return instruction (POP ALL) when terminating the non-game program and returning to the main process included in the game program. After restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the process of (1), the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the game program and return to the main process. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction, and the game program shifts from the game program to the main process. The state of the flag register when returning may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program. That is, when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process called the non-game program, while the flag register , the state may differ from the state when the main process calls the non-game program.

Thus, the state of the flag register saved and restored by using the first save instruction and the first return instruction on the non-game program side is the state when the main process calls the non-game program, that is, the main process may be in a state different from the state of the flag register used by the non-game program side, the state of all registers including the flag register provided in the main control unit 41 is protected when the main process calls the non-game program. It is difficult to

On the other hand, in the main processing of the present embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-game program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), the corresponding non-game program Each time the process is called, the main process side of the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store the state of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 in the game stack area and save it. When returning to the main processing from the processing included in the non-game program, the main processing side uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. bring back. As a result, in the main processing, when returning from the processing included in the called non-game program, the state of the flag register can be restored to the state saved when the non-game program was called on the main processing side. , Of the registers returned by the non-game program, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program, while the flag register is in the same state as when the main process calls the non-game program. Even if the state differs from the state when calling , when returning from the non-game program to the main process, the state of all registers can be restored to the state when the main process called the non-game program. It's like

In addition, the process included in the non-game program called from the main process included in the game program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the non-game stack area. Save, and use the first return instruction (POP ALL) to restore the state of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the state saved in the non-game stack area, while the main process is performed by the second save instruction ( PUSH AF) is used to save the state of only the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area, and the second return instruction (POP AF) is used to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. It is designed to return to the saved state. As a result, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second restore instruction, so that the 2-byte first save instruction and the first restore instruction used in the non-game program The capacity of the game program can be reduced compared to the case of saving and restoring the state of the register using instructions. In addition, in the game program, the state of only the flag register among the plurality of registers is saved in the game stack area using the second save instruction. The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced compared to the case of retracting the .

In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of this embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for the determination for proceeding with various processing based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-game program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), the timer interrupt is set to disabled and called. By setting the timer interrupt to be enabled when returning from the processing to the main processing, the timer interrupt is disabled during the period in which the processing included in the non-game program is executed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing (operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.) included in the non-game program, after saving the flag register, the timer interrupt is disabled. When returning from the called process to the main process, the timer interrupt is enabled and then the flag register is restored.

In the main processing and the like included in the game program of this embodiment, it is possible to call the operation information signal output processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing and the like included in the non-game program. is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state in which sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt processing is performed, the processing included in is within the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed. Then, when the main control unit 41 executes the processing in a state in which all the processing included in the processing is completed, but sufficient time is not secured until the next timer interrupt processing is performed, the next timer interrupt processing is executed. Consists of a program with a capacity that may cause the next timer interrupt process to be performed during the execution of the interrupt process because all the processes included in the process are not completed within the time until the interrupt process is performed. It is

Then, in the game program (main processing, game start waiting processing, etc.) of the present embodiment, when calling the non-game program, after the timer interrupt processing is performed by performing the one-time interrupt waiting processing, the non-game program from the game program A series of processes including the process of calling the program are performed, and the non-game program is called. That is, by calling the non-game program with the one-time interrupt waiting process as a trigger, the non-game program is executed in a state in which sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed. ing.

As described above, in the main processing of this embodiment, the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information related to the advantageous section including the buffer is performed, and the advantageous section signal output buffer is initialized to control the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. Continuous data processing is performed (Sb82 to Sb84) based on the fact that the signal output buffer during the advantageous section is set to the initial value (0), and OFF state data is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 to display the section. is designed to end the As a result, the segment display is terminated after the signal during the advantageous segment is turned off, so that it is possible to prevent the segment display from being terminated in a state in which the advantageous segment-related information is not initialized, and the advantageous segment display is completed. It is possible to prevent the end of the section display despite the fact that the signal during the advantageous section is output to the test device due to the medium signal output buffer not being initialized.

In the main processing of this embodiment, an advantageous interval data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) for initializing information about an advantageous interval is performed, and an OFF state is indicated in the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal by the timer interrupt processing that is performed thereafter. When the initial value (0) is set, the signal during the advantageous interval is controlled to be in the OFF state. Thus, by initializing the signal during the advantageous interval when the advantageous interval ends, the signal during the advantageous interval can be turned off without individually setting the output buffers of the signal during the advantageous interval to the OFF state.

In the main processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section based on the flag in the advantageous section set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and if it is determined to be in the advantageous section, the signal in the advantageous section is output. A predetermined value (1) indicating the ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81), and if the predetermined value is set in the advantageous section signal buffer by timer interrupt processing that is performed thereafter, the advantageous section signal is set to the ON state. is controlled by As a result, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section each time the game ends. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section.
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can execute a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. Specific processing (processing by a game program) and special processing (processing by a non-game program) can be performed in the main processing. It is possible to perform timer processing (Sv20) for updating the timer value for use. During execution of specific processing (game program), timer interrupt processing may be executed, one game time management timer value is updated, while during execution of special processing (non-game program), timer Interrupt processing is not executed, and the one game time management timer value is not updated. Thus, by updating the one-game-time management timer value as much as possible, the game can be smoothly progressed, while the one-game-time management timer value is not updated during the period when special processing is being performed. As a result, the process of updating the one game time management timer value and the special process are not mixed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game (Sb40), and the one-game-time management timer value is not the specific value (0), the game is not progressed until it is determined that the one-game-time management timer value is the specific value (0), and the one-game-time management timer value is determined to be a specific value (0), the game is advanced. As a result, the game is not progressed until it is specified that the minimum time has passed based on the timer value for managing one playing time, and the game is progressed when the minimum time has passed, thereby achieving the minimum time per game. can be ensured.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0) (Sb40), execution of timer interrupt processing is prohibited (Sb41), and then continuous data processing is performed. By doing so (Sb43), an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the one game time management timer. As a result, timer interrupt processing is prohibited when the initial value is set to the one-game-time management timer. You can prevent the value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes, as a special process (non-game program), a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b. As a result, during the period in which the medal sensor process to be monitored is being performed, the timer value for managing one game time is not updated, so that the processing for updating the timer value for managing one game time and the detection of fraud are performed. Medal sensor processing is not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, as special processing (non-game program), performs the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative payout number, the total cumulative A role ratio monitor data process for updating the number of continuous accessory payouts is executed. As a result, during the period in which the role ratio monitor data processing for updating the data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is performed, the game time management timer value is not updated. The process of updating the game time management timer value and the role ratio monitor data process related to the performance display of the game machine are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an operation information signal output process (Sb19) for outputting a stop execution position signal to a testing device that tests the slot machine 1 as a special process (non-game program). It's becoming As a result, during the period in which the operation information signal output process for outputting the test signal to the testing device for testing the slot machine 1 is being performed, the game time management timer value is not updated. The process of updating the game time management timer value and the operation information signal output process related to the test of the slot machine 1 do not coexist.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the one game time management timer value is a specific value (0) (Sb40), the set index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data By performing the processing (Sb42), the continuous data processing sets the initial value to the one-game-time management timer value to start counting the minimum time, and sets the one-game-time management timer value to the initial value. is set, the test signal is output. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the one game time management timer value. It is possible to identify whether time is secured.

[Regarding group information setting processing, etc. in internal lottery processing]
Group information setting processing performed by the main control unit 41 in the internal lottery processing will be described with reference to FIG.

The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and sets a winning combination number (winning number) capable of identifying a winning combination (including losing) in the internal lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, group information setting processing (general role) is performed in the internal lottery process, and group information (general role) that can specify the type of general role won in the internal lottery based on the role number (winning number) is specified. , the group information is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The group information is then referenced by the command transmission process at the time of game start performed in the main process, and an internal winning command that includes the group information and can specify the type of general role (including losing) won in the internal lottery. is transmitted to the sub-controller 91 .

As shown in FIG. 52, in the group information setting process (general combination), first, the combination number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the internal lottery process, and can specify the internal lottery target combination won in the internal lottery in the game. (winning number) is read into the A register (Sc1). After that, the head address value of the RAM 41c in which the group information setting table is set is set in the HL register (Sc2), and group information conversion processing is performed (Sc3). In the group information conversion process, group information (0, 16, 17) corresponding to the combination number (winning number, 0 to 40, 43, 44) is specified based on the group information setting table and the A register value, and A Set in a register. If the winning combination number (winning number) is 0 to 15, 43 or 44, 0 is set as the group information, and if the winning combination number (winning number) is 16, 16 is set as the group information, If the winning combination number (winning number) is within the range of 17 to 40, 17 is set as the group information, and if the winning combination number (winning number) is within the range of 41 to 64, 41 is set as the group information. is set.

After performing the group information conversion process in step Sc3, it is determined whether or not the group information set in the A register is 0 (Sc4), and if it is determined that the group information is 0, The combination number is read into the A register (Sc5), the value of the A register is corrected to the value of the combination number, and the corrected value of the A register is stored as group information (general combination) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sc6). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the group information is not 0 in the step of Sc4, the value of the A register set by the group information conversion process is stored as it is in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the group information (general combination) (Sc6). After performing the processing of step Sc6, the group information setting processing (general role) is terminated.

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs the group information setting process (general role), so that internal lottery target roles (loss, replay 1A , replay 1B, replay 1C, replay 1D, replay 1E, replay 1F, replay 2, cherry 1, cherry 2, cherry 3, chance replay 1, chance replay 2, watermelon, common 1 role, common 3 roles, common multi bell) is won, set the role number (winning number, 0 to 16) of the internal lottery target role that has been won as group information (general role), and the role number (winning number) in the internal lottery. If the internal lottery target role (multiple pressing order role) within the range of 17 to 40 is won, set the common 17 as the group information (general role) and use the internal lottery to select the winning number (winning number). 43, 44 (A in BB, B in BB) are won, the winning number of the internal lottery target (winning number, 43, 44 ).

Then, when an internal winning command including the group information (general role) is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 as a winning result of the internal lottery, the sub-control unit 91 selects the individual internal lottery winning in the internal lottery. Although the target role cannot be specified, the type of internal lottery target role won can be specified.

Although not shown, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and stores a winning combination number (winning number) that can specify a winning combination (including losing) in the internal lottery in the RAM 41c. After setting it in the predetermined area, it is determined whether or not the winning combination number (winning number) corresponds to the special winning combination (BB1, BB2). If determined, the value corresponding to the winning special combination (1 for BB1, 2 for BB2) is stored as group information (special combination) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the special combination (BB1 , BB2), 0 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (special combination).

Further, after the internal lottery has been performed in the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41, when the winning combination numbers (winning numbers) indicating the winning results of the internal lottery are 0 to 40, 43, 44, number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a general combination winning number, and when the combination numbers (winning numbers) are 41 and 42, that is, when the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won, the general A value (0) indicating a loss is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the winning combination number.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a common If the group information setting process (general role) is performed and the internal lottery wins the multiple-push order role, it is possible to identify that the multiple-push order role was won in the internal lottery, but the winning role In order to make it impossible to specify the type of winning combination, an internal winning command capable of specifying the group of winning combinations is transmitted. As a result, even if the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set or the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is set, the number of bets will be increased by the internal lottery. is subject to the lottery, and if any kind of the winning combination is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player will change according to the type of winning combination. Even if the number of bets is 3 (1st bet) or 2 (2nd bet) is set, the winning combination with multiple cards is won in the internal lottery. However, since an internal winning command capable of specifying the group of winning multiple winning hands is transmitted so that the type of winning multiple winning winning hands cannot be specified, the number of bets of three is 3. Whether the number of bets (first bet) is set or the number of bets of two (second bet) is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is specified from the internal win command. can be prevented.

In addition, when the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set, and when the number of bets of 2 (second) is set, the internal lottery will be held in order to push the number of cards. When a winning combination is won, an internal winning command is created by a common group information setting process, so the program capacity for command creation can be reduced.

[Continuous data processing]
The control contents of the continuous data processing performed by the main control section 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. The continuous data processing is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main processing or the like included in the game program. Continuous data processing is called from the main processing or the like with the data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing performed in the continuous data processing.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the continuous data processing, first, it is determined whether or not the data number set in the A register when starting the continuous data processing is a number indicating that the data setting processing is to be performed. Determine (Sd1). If it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that a process other than the data setting process is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sd18 to perform a 1-byte data lottery process. The 1-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After the 1-byte data lottery process is performed in step Sd18, the continuous data process is terminated and the process returns to the calling source.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that data setting processing is to be performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), addition processing is performed (Sd3). In addition processing, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored at the address specified by the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the top address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 55). By performing addition processing in step Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the address area of the set data table corresponding to the data number is set in the A register. A relative distance will be set. For example, when data number 1 is set in the A register and addition processing is performed, the index data address m2+1 (reference address m2+data number 1) of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register as shown in FIG. and the relative distance data α(m6-(m2+1)) stored at the address m2+1 is set in the A register.

After performing addition processing in step Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. As a result, for example, when the data number is 1, the head address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to the data number 1 is set in the HL register.

After that, all set counts stored in the address area specified by the HL register value, which is an area within the setting data table, are read into the B register, and the initialization count is read into the C register (Sd5). Then, after the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd6), the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd7). After that, the setting destination address value stored in the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of initializations of the C register is 0 (Sd9), and if it is determined that the number of initializations of the C register is 0, the HL register value is updated by adding 1 ( Sd10), read the set data value stored at the address of the updated HL register value into the A register (Sd11), and determine whether or not the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). If it is determined in step Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd9 that the C register value is not 0, after subtracting 1 from the number of initializations of the C register (Sd16), the exclusive OR of the A register values is calculated to obtain A Data (0) for initialization is set in the register (Sd17). Then, the data for initialization is set in the A register in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13). The Rukoto.

After setting the A register value in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value in step Sd13, the B register is decremented by 1 to update the total set count by 1 (Sd14). After that, it is determined whether or not the total number of remaining set times is 0 based on the value of the B register (Sd15).

If it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is 0 and the total number of remaining settings is 0, then the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the total number of remaining setting times is not 0, the process returns to step Sd7, and the processing of steps Sd7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. This is repeated until the total set number of times to be set becomes 0.

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, when it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in step Sd12, after subtracting 1 from the total number of times the B register is set (Sd19), the BC register value is stored in the RAM 41c. Save to area (Sd20). After that, the setting destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether or not the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). If it is determined that the E register value is not the predetermined wait time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In port output processing, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state (ON state or OFF state) specified by the A register.

If it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is the predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23), and DE After setting the register value in the BC register as the waiting time (Sd24), the interrupt BC waiting process is performed (Sd25). As a result, the timer interrupt process is waited for the number of times set in the BC register.

After the interrupt BC count waiting process is performed in step Sd25, the total set count of the BC register saved in step Sd20 is restored (Sd26). Also, if it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is not the wait time code and port output processing is performed in step Sd29, the processing in steps Sd23 to Sd25 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sd26. , Sd20 restores the total set count of the BC register saved in steps Sd20.

After restoring the total number of times set in the BC register in step Sd26, the B register is decremented by 1 and the total number of times set is decremented by 1 (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether or not the total remaining set count specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28), and if it is determined that the total remaining set count is not 0, the process returns to step Sd20, Each processing of steps Sd20 to Sd28 is performed until it is determined that all the remaining set counts are zero. Then, in step Sd28, it is determined that the remaining set number of times is 0, so that the continuous data processing is terminated and the process returns to the calling source process.

In this way, in the continuous data processing, there is a process of initializing a predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table, and a predetermined area specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table. A process of setting predetermined data specified based on the data processing table, and setting an output signal from a predetermined output port specified based on the data number and the continuous data processing table to an output state (ON state or OFF state). processing, etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 55, when the data number is 1 (set data when the start switch is operated), the maintenance permission flag and the number of payouts displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 are displayed based on the set data table. (upper digits) and the payout number display (lower digits) are initialized. If the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is turned off), output port processing is performed based on the port output code being set, and external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. set, and set the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state. Also, if the data number is 27 (setting data for shifting to an advantageous interval), the advantageous interval (01) is set in the interval state information that can specify the game interval being controlled, The high probability state flag indicating the state is set to high probability state (1).

[Regarding game start waiting process]
The control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The game start waiting process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the game start waiting process, first, the inserted medal number display process is performed (Se1), and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 corresponding to the number of medals inserted in the slot machine 1 are turned ON (lighted state). to control. After that, an error number corresponding to an error code (E1) that can specify that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and a predetermined port input buffer is referred to, It is determined whether or not the hopper tank 34a is full based on the determined data of the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, error processing, which will be described later, is performed (Se4). In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E1) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can be referred to in other processes. set as a valid error flag. Also, it controls to display the error code (E1) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E1) prepared in the predetermined register is met. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the error state is entered, the system waits until the finalized data of the full tank sensor 35a becomes OFF. , an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, the error process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step Se5.

When it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, and when the error processing in step Se4 is completed, the value of the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is changed to a predetermined value. Read into the register (Se5). In the replay medal counter, a value corresponding to the result of the previous game is set by the game end setting processing in the previous main processing, and the replay is granted when the replay combination wins in the previous game. is set to a value (e.g., 3) corresponding to the specified number of bets required to play the game, while if no replay was given in the previous game, 0 is set. is set.

Thereafter, the replay medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether or not the value of the replay medal counter read in step Se5 is greater than 0, that is, whether or not replay is granted. (Se7) If a replay is given, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the medal counter for replay is set as the bet number, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lighting state) to set the prescribed number of bets (3 in this embodiment). is set. Also, it transmits to the sub-controller 91 a number-of-throws-in command capable of specifying the number of medals used for setting the number of bets.

When it is determined that the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in the step of Se7, that is, when it is determined that the replay is not given, and when the replay is given in the step of Se8 and the medal insertion execution process is performed. , performs medal maintenance permission setting processing (Se9). In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the credit value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the credit value does not reach the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the medal insertion unit 4 A medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal maintenance permission setting process is performed in the step of Se9, the process of waiting for one interruption is performed (Se10). By performing one-interrupt wait processing, timer interrupt processing (main) is performed, and the detection state of various switches, the lighting state of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection state of these various switches is updated, subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion/payout error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, and operation input reception processing, which will be described later) can be performed.

After the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed in the step of Se10 and the timer interrupt is performed once, the same input/disbursement error check process as in the step of Sb32 of the main process described above is performed (Se11). Then, based on whether an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether error processing has been executed in the error check processing (Se12).

If it is determined in step Se12 that error processing has been executed in the error check processing, the process returns to step Se10, and the processing of steps Se10 to Se12 is performed again. After that, each process of steps Se10 to Se12 is performed in a state where no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal insertion signal, and in the state where the error execution flag is not set, the process of step Se12 is performed. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the step of Se12 that the error execution flag is not set, medal insertion signal processing is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the state of medal insertion is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. Then, when normal insertion of medals is detected, medals are accepted for setting the number of bets and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when an abnormal insertion of medals is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error processing is performed. After that, the error state is canceled and the error processing is terminated, thereby ending the medal insertion signal processing.

After the medal insertion signal processing is performed in step Se13, various switch operations are validated, and by operating the switches whose operations are validated, operation input acceptance processing is performed to accept operations by the switches. (Se14).

In the operation input reception process, when medals are not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is calculated. is equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the number of bets of 3. When it is determined that the sum of the credits and the set number of bets is equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the number of bets of 3, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to, and the ON edge Determines whether data is set. Then, when it is determined that the ON edge data is set, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set as the bet amount so that the bet amount is 3, and the amount set in the bet amount is set. The number of medals is subtracted from the credit. When it is determined that the ON edge data is not set, the ON state data is set in the output buffer of the BET switch enable LED 21 to control the BET switch enable LED 21 to the ON state (lighting state). On the other hand, the total value of the credit set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is not equal to or greater than the value (3) required to set the bet amount of 3 cards. When it is determined that the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set, neither the process of determining whether the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set nor the process of controlling the BET switch valid LED 21 to the ON state is performed. When it is determined that the sum of the credits and the already set bet amount (set bet amount) is not equal to or greater than the value (3) required for setting the bet amount of 3 cards, the BET switch valid LED 21 remain off. Thus, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet amount of 3 coins, the player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the bet amount of 3 coins (first bet amount). On the other hand, if the remaining amount of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the number of bets of 2 (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the number of two bets is not set, so the game can be prevented from being played with the second number of bets as much as possible.

In addition, in the operation input reception process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, if the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3), the start Acceptance of operation by the switch 7 is validated. Further, when medals are not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, acceptance of operations by the adjustment switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is validated.

In the operation input acceptance process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. After that, the channel switching solenoid 30 is turned off, and the process of switching the medal channel to the medal payout port 9 side is performed. Further, when the operation of the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation of the setting key switch 37 is valid, the setting value display processing for displaying the setting value on the setting value display 24 is performed. Further, when the operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation of the settlement switch 10 is valid, the settlement processing of returning the medals stored in the credit to the player is performed. After performing a process corresponding to the switch or the like whose operation has been detected, the operation input acceptance process is terminated.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in step Se14, it is determined whether or not a valid operation of the start switch 7 has been detected based on the start flag (Se15). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and the valid operation of the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Se16, and LED display processing for controlling the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 is performed. .

In the LED display process, when the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled by the operation input reception process of step Se14, and the operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is not detected, the start enable LED 18 is turned on. (lighting state) and the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective, and if the operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is detected, or if the operation of the start switch 7 is set to be effective. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in the OFF state (extinguished state), and whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid is informed by the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 .

In the step of Se15, when it is determined that a start flag is set in a predetermined register and a valid operation of the start switch 7 is detected, a random number for internal lottery is obtained from the random number circuit 42 and stored in the RAM 41c. A predetermined area is set (Se17). After that, the medal insertion state data that can specify the set number of bets is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start enable LED 18 is set to the OFF state (extinction state) (Se19), and the medal maintenance permission flag is set. It clears from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se20), controls to clear the display of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12 (Se21), terminates the game start waiting process, and returns to the main process. Thereafter, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random number value obtained in step Se17, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are started to rotate in response to detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game will be started.

Thus, in the game start waiting process included in the game program, it is possible to call the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program. After the one-time interruption waiting process for waiting until the second time is performed, the medal insertion signal process is called. As will be described later, in timer interrupt processing (main), port input processing for updating input data of sensors including inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed. is performed, the medal insertion signal processing is called to perform processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main) in the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing. is possible.

In addition, in the operation input acceptance process performed in the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the number of bets already set and the credits can be added to set the number of bets of three. ing. Thus, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set the bet amount of 3 coins, the player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the bet amount of 3 coins (first bet amount). On the other hand, if the remaining amount of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the number of bets of 2 (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, two bets are not set.

In addition, in the operation input reception process performed in the game start waiting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the bet number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3). In some cases, the reception of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled, and when the number of bets of 3 is set and when the number of bets of 2 is set, the start switch is activated. By operating the switch 7, the game can be started.

[About error handling]
The details of error processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The error processing is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program. Error processing is called with an error number corresponding to an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred set in a predetermined register (A register in this embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 57, in the error processing, first, the error number set in the A register at the start of the error processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf1). Then, an error command value indicating that error processing is being performed is set in the D register (Sf2), and communication data storage processing is performed (Sf3). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A and D registers and set in the command queue. For example, if an error number corresponding to an error code is set in the A register and an error command value is set in the D register, an error command containing an error number that can identify the type of error that has occurred is sent. Generate and set in the command queue. The commands set in the command queue are sequentially transmitted by command transmission processing included in subsequent timer interrupt processing.

After the communication data storage processing is performed in step Sf3, a cancelability judgment is performed in which a judgment value (cancelability judgment value) for judging whether or not the occurring error is a cancelable error is defined. The top address of the value table is set in the HL register (Sf4), and the cancellation decision value defined in the address obtained by adding the A register value (error number) to the HL register value is read in the E register (Sf5). ).

After that, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is read into the HL register, and the value of the HL register is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf6).

After that, the address of the output buffer corresponding to the ones place (lower order) of the game auxiliary display 12 is set in the C register (Sf7), and the 7-segment display data storage processing is performed (Sf8). In the 7-segment display data storage process, display data for displaying numbers (in this embodiment, 0 to 9 and non-display) on the 7-segment display set in advance in the ROM 41b and used as the game auxiliary display 12 is stored. The display data is specified based on the specified 7-segment display data table and the value set in the A register at the start of the 7-segment display data storage process, and is stored in the output buffer at the address set in the C register. Set display data. After that, E display data for displaying a predetermined character ("E" in this embodiment) is set in the output buffer corresponding to the tens place (higher order) of the game auxiliary display 12 (Sf9). Display data is set in the output buffers of the 1's and 10's digits of the game auxiliary display 12, and then timer interrupt processing is performed so that the game auxiliary display 12 displays a display mode corresponding to the display data (for example, , “E1”, etc.).

After that, it is determined whether or not the error that has occurred is an error that can be canceled without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1, based on the cancelability judgment value set in the E register (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf10 that the error that has occurred cannot be cleared, the process is stopped and waits. When the processing is stopped, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is temporarily stopped, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned ON to restart the power supply, and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is changed to the setting change state. It is possible to initialize and clear the error state. If the cause of the error is not removed, the error state will be canceled once by shifting to the setting change state when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, but the error will occur again after that. It will be detected and error processing will be performed. An error that cannot be cleared without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, a RAM abnormality error that occurs when a RAM data abnormality is detected. On the other hand, an error that can be cleared without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a medal insertion signal detected by medal sensor processing included in a non-game program described later.

If it is determined in step Sf10 that the error that has occurred can be canceled, the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sf11), the timer interrupt process is performed once, and the output states of various sensors and the like are checked. Wait until updated.

After the one-interrupt wait process is performed in step Sf11, among the input buffers 0 to 2 in which the input state data of various switches (in this embodiment, input data, determined data, and edge data) are stored, The input data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 0 are read into the A register (Sf12), and the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c are extracted (Sf13). Also, the determined data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 is read into the A register (Sf14), and the determined data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 3c and the determined data of the full tank sensor are extracted (Sf15). Then, based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor, it is determined whether or not the error has been cleared (Sf17).

When it is determined in step Sf17 that any of the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, the finalized data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, and the finalized data of the full tank sensor is not a normal value and the error has not been cleared. , the process returns to step Sf11, and the processes Sf11 to Sf17 are repeated. On the other hand, in step Sf17, when it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a-3c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor are all normal values, and the error is cancelled. reads the edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 into the A register (Sf18), and determines whether or not the reset operation by the reset switch 23 or reset/setting switch 38 has been performed (Sf19).

If it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has not been performed, the process returns to step Sf11, and the processes Sf11 to Sf19 are repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has been performed, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the value saved in step Sf6 (Sf20).

After that, clear data (0) is set in the A register as transmission data (Sf21), and using the value of the A register, the error number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to 0 and cleared (Sf22). ). Then, communication data setting processing is performed (Sf23).

When the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, the value of the error command set in step Sf2 is set in the D register. Generate an error command that can specify that the error has been cleared and set it in the command queue.

After the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, the process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sf24), and the error command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process. Then, the error processing is ended, and the processing that was being performed before the error processing was started is returned to.

Thus, in the error processing of this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing can be performed during execution of the error processing, and the timer value for one game time management is updated. As a result, the one-game-time management timer value is updated during execution of the error processing, so that the elapsed state of the minimum time is clocked even during the error processing, and the game can be played smoothly after the end of the error processing. be able to.

In the error processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the reset operation has been performed by the reset switch 23 while the power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued (Sf19), the error processing is terminated. It is possible to terminate without interrupting the power supply. As a result, the game can be restarted smoothly even if error processing is performed.

[Regarding medal insertion signal processing]
Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal process called from the game start waiting process by the main control section 41 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The medal insertion signal process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the medal insertion signal processing, first, in the medal maintenance permission setting processing of the game start waiting processing, a medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is set. (Sg1). Then, if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal processing is ended, and the game start waiting processing of the calling source is returned to. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, reference is made to medal insertion signal state transition data set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg2). The medal insertion signal state transition data is data capable of specifying the state transition of detection signals of the insertion medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals), and medal sensor check included in the non-game program. Through the processing, it is updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c.

Then, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in step Sg2, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is changed from the inserted medal section 4. It is determined whether or not medals are passing (Sg3). When it is determined that the medals are not passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the passage switching solenoid 30 is controlled to the ON state (Sg4), and the medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 are transferred to the medal selector. A hopper provided inside the housing 1a is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 so that the medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 flow down through the medal inflow flow path 29a and the medal reception flow path 29b in the housing 29 and are guided to the hopper tank 34a. It is controlled to switch to the tank 34a side. After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is cleared (Sg6).

Here, when the medal insertion signal ignoring timer sets the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, at least the output of the control signal for turning the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state is set. 30 operates to measure the passage of the switching time until the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion part 4 is actually switched to the medal payout port 9 side, and during the timing of the switching time, medals are processed in a predetermined process. A timer for controlling to ignore the input signal. When the output of the control signal for the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set for switching the flow path of the medals, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to output the control signal for the flow path switching solenoid 30 at least, and then the timer actually starts. A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) is set until the medal flow path is switched to . After that, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is decremented and updated by the counter update processing of the timer interrupt processing, and when it becomes 0, it can be specified that the switching time has passed.

When it is determined in step Sg3 that medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and after clearing the medal insertion signal ignoring timer in step Sg6, the above-mentioned second evacuation command is used. Then, among the registers provided in the main control unit 41, the value of the flag register that stores the calculation result is stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order to save (Sg7), and then the timer interrupt is started. It is set to prohibited (Sg8), and the aforementioned CALL command is used to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program (Sg9).

In medal sensor processing, first, in the same way as in the aforementioned RT information output processing, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the current stack pointer is extracted from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the address indicated by SP is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are stored in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. When the stack pointer SP is changed from that for the game program to that for the non-game program as the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used to set the flag register. is changed, the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the medal sensor processing is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the medal sensor processing is the state of the register that is saved when the game program calls the medal sensor processing. may differ from the state of the register at that time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal. When the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the inserted medal Medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has detected that the sensors 31a to 31c have begun to pass through the detection range A, and the passing state of the medal in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the previous determination. Medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating no change from time to time is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. After that, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the medal insertion signal state transition data, medal-related error data capable of specifying an error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality regarding the medal insertion signal has been detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, in the same manner as in the RT information output process described above, using the first return instruction described above, the values of the registers that were saved when the medal sensor process was started are sequentially read from the non-game stack area, and the medal sensor Restores all registers to the state they were in when the process started. After that, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the medal sensor process is started is read, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor processing was started, and the winning information output processing is terminated. In order to end the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer SP is reset after restoring the values of all the registers that were saved at the start of the medal sensor processing. When changing from a non-game program to a game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register changes before and after the execution of the LD instruction. Subject to change. In other words, the state of the register when the medal sensor process ends may be different from the state of the register saved when the medal sensor process is started.

After the medal sensor processing is performed in step Sg9, the timer interrupt is enabled (Sg10), and the register value saved in step Sg7 is saved using the second return command. By sequentially reading from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before the winning information output process (Sg11). After the medal sensor processing is performed by performing the saving processing and restoring processing of all registers inside the medal sensor processing in step Sg9 and the saving processing and restoring processing of the flag register in steps Sg7 and Sg11. , the states of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the states before the processing was performed.

Thereafter, referring to a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register (Sg12), and whether or not an error code (E5) is set is determined by medal sensor processing (medal sensor check processing). Determine (Sg13). Then, when an error code (E5) is set, that is, when the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register, error processing is performed. (Sg14), control to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which progress of the game is disabled. Also, an error command capable of specifying the error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the error code (E5) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can be referred to in other processes. set as a valid error flag. Also, it controls to display the error code (E5) on the game auxiliary display 12 . After that, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the condition for canceling the error state according to the error code (E5) prepared in the predetermined register is met. When an error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and the error state is shifted to, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c must be OFF and the reset/setting switch must be in the OFF state as conditions for canceling the error state. Until it is established that 38 or the reset switch 23 is in the ON state, it waits without performing control to progress the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is established, an error command (cancel) for canceling the error state is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, the error processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the medal insertion signal processing.

When it is determined in step Sg13 that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data, and after the error processing in step Sg14 is completed, it is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of RAM 41c. By referring to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15), the content of the medal passing state reference data is determined (Sg16, Sg17).

In the step of Sg16, when it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated and the game start waiting processing is returned to. In step Sg17, when it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, the process proceeds to step Sg18, and in step Sg17, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process proceeds to step Sg21.

If it is determined in the step of Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal passing) is set, an insertion state determination process is performed (Sg18). In the input status determination process, a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum credit value of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less, that is, the situation is that the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final reception flag capable of specifying whether or not the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the input status determination process is terminated.

After performing the input status determination process in step Sg18, if it is determined that the medal to be received next is the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final reception flag set in the predetermined register, , the medal blocker is turned off (Sg20), and the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, so that the passage of medals inserted from the medal inserting section 4 is diverted from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout port 9 side. By switching, the medal inserted into the medal inserting section 4 after the medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c is controlled to be returned from the medal payout port 9 via the medal return passage 29c. In the medal blocker OFF process, after the passage switching solenoid 30 is set to the OFF state, the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is detected by referring to the medal insertion signal state transition data set in the game RAM area. , and if the medal is passing through the detection range A, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 ms ) is set to start timing of a predetermined time by a medal insertion signal ignoring timer. As a result, the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set by judging that the medal insertion signal is abnormal regardless of the state of the medal insertion signal in the sensor monitoring processing described later for a predetermined period of time after the medal blocker OFF processing is completed. It is designed so that it will not be done.

After the medal blocker-off processing is performed in step Sg20, the medal insertion signal processing is ended and the game start waiting processing is returned to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal to be received next is not the final medal that can be added to the credit based on the final reception flag, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without executing the medal blocker off processing, and the game start waiting processing is performed. back to

If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set and the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is not set, then a predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. , acquires the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b (Sg21), and determines whether or not the confirmed data is ON (Sg22). When it is determined that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is ON, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is acquired by referring to the predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is turned OFF. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (Sg24).

If it is determined in step Sg19 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state, and if the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and if the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state in step Sg20. When it is determined that the medal is not in the OFF state, that is, when medals are passing through the medal receiving flow path 29b or when there are no medals in the medal receiving flow path 29b, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg22 that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and if it is determined in step Sg24 that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal receiving channel At 29b, when the inserted medal sensor 31c finishes passing the medal detection position where the medal can be detected, the medal insertion process is performed (Sg25).

In the medal insertion process, the currently set number of bets stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referenced to determine whether or not the prescribed number of bets has been set. If the prescribed number of bets has not been set, the current bet number is incremented by 1, and if the prescribed number of bets has already been set, the credit counter is incremented by 1.

After performing medal insertion processing in step Sg25, medal maintenance permission setting processing is performed (Sg26). , a medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After the medal care permission setting process is performed in step Sg26, if the medal care permission flag is not set, a predetermined value (corresponding to 504 milliseconds in this embodiment) set in advance for the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set. value) is set, and the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is started to count a predetermined time (Sg28), then the medal insertion signal processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal processing is terminated without setting the medal insertion signal ignoring timer. The medal insertion signal ignoring timer is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) in step Sg28. In this embodiment, it becomes 0 when 4.1 seconds) have elapsed, and it is possible to determine whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed based on whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring timer is 0 or not. ing.

In this way, the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program can call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program. area, and when returning from medal sensor processing to medal insertion signal processing, the value of the flag register is restored to the value that was saved in the game stack area of RAM 41c.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called, the timer interrupt is set to be disabled and the medal sensor processing is performed. When returning to the input signal processing, by setting the timer interrupt to allow, timer interrupt is disabled during execution of the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, after saving the value of the flag register, the timer interrupt is set to disabled, and the medal sensor processing is performed. is to be performed.

In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is performed in a state in which the timer interrupt is disabled, when returning from the medal sensor processing to the medal insertion signal processing, the timer After the interruption is enabled, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

Further, the medal insertion signal process is a process called by the game start waiting process. After that, the medal insertion signal processing is called. In addition, in the medal insertion signal processing, after the medal insertion signal processing is started and predetermined processing is performed, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program is called and performed. there is Thus, in the game machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, after the game start waiting process performs the waiting process for one interruption, the medal insertion signal process is called, and the medal sensor processing is performed in the medal insertion signal process. , Timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by at least one interrupt waiting processing in the game start waiting processing, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input processing included in the timer interrupt processing (main), Medal sensor processing is performed.

[Regarding medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The details of the medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. FIG. The medal sensor process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal insertion signal process included in the game program. The medal sensor check process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the medal sensor process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. and retreat (Sh1). After that, using the LD instruction described above, by setting a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the value stored when the previous non-game program ended) as the value of the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-game Set for the program (Sh2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area (Sh3). Thereafter, medal sensor check processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sh4).

After performing medal sensor check processing in step Sh4, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers saved in step Sh3 are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area, and winning information output processing is executed. After restoring all registers to the state at the time of start (Sh5), using the LD instruction, the value of the stack pointer SP that was stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in step Sh1 is By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor processing was started (Sh6), the medal sensor processing is terminated, and the process returns to the medal insertion signal processing of the caller.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the medal sensor check process, first, medal passing state reference data and medal related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can identify the passing state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing. Based on the input data of 31c, it is determined that the medals have normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, or the medals have started to pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is possible to specify that it is determined that the detection state of the medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is the medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the medal detection state has not changed since the previous determination. Also, in the medal-related error reference data, as a processing result of the medal sensor check processing, an abnormality (error code E5) related to the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medal insertion signals) was detected. It is data that can specify the effect. Further, the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data are set in the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, so that they can be referenced and updated by the non-game program, but only referenced by the game program. be.

After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal related error reference data in steps Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal is inserted. A predetermined area of the ROM 41b is referred to acquire correct/wrong data for determining whether the transition of the signal state is normal (Si4), and a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to and the previous medal sensor check process is performed. (Si5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data obtained in step Si5 and the correct/incorrect data obtained in step Si4 are compared to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

When it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct in step Si6, the medal insertion signal state transition data is updated based on the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in step Si3, thereby creating new data. Create medal insertion signal state transition data and store it in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

Then, referring to the medal passage time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), based on the medal insertion signal state transition data updated in step Si7, the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c It is determined whether or not the current and previous detection states are OFF (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer that counts the duration of the period during which it is determined that the medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, based on medal insertion signal state transition data, timing is started when the medal insertion signal is turned ON, and then updated by timer interrupt processing (main).

If it is determined in steps Si9 and Si10 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is OFF and the previous detection state is not OFF, that is, if it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the detection range A. If there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the inserted medal leaving the detection range, the medal passage time timer referred to in step Si8 is set. is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passing time range required for the medals to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). The normal passing time range includes the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving passage 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving passage 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in the present embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

When it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the stored medal insertion signal state transition data is cleared in step Si7 (Si12), and the medal passing time timer (Si13), medal passage state reference data (normal passage) indicating that medals have normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. to end the medal sensor check process. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later.

If it is determined in steps Si9 and Si10 that the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are both OFF, that is, the medals have not passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, When the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination, the state in which the medal passing state reference data has been initialized in step Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change). The medal sensor check process is terminated while maintaining the state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

When it is determined in step Si9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are detected. If it is ON, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer referred to in step Si8 has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

When it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether or not the medal passing time timer is in operation (Si16). When the medal passage time timer is not in operation, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. When the medal passing time timer has not yet started timing, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), and the medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. Medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has been detected that the detection range A has started to be passed is set in a predetermined area of the non-game area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer has exceeded the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later. Further, when it is determined in step Si16 that the medal passing time timer is in operation, that is, the medals have passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c continue to be ON. If the medal passing state reference data has been initialized in step Si1, that is, the state in which the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal Terminate the sensor check process. In addition, after the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started in step Si17, it is incremented every predetermined time by timer interrupt processing. The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time from when it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are turned ON is measured by the medal passage time timer.

If it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition data is not correct in step Si6, if it is determined that the medal passing time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passing time range in step Si11, the medal passing time timer is activated in step Si15. exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the medal insertion signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Si19), the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Si7 is cleared (Si20), the medal passage time timer is cleared to stop timing (Si21), and medal sensor check processing is performed. and return to medal sensor processing. If the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in the step of Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, then the medal-related error is referenced in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), the error state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 61, in step Si6 of the medal sensor check process included in the non-game program, the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 (inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c) are used to determine whether or not the medal insertion signal state transition is correct. When it is detected that medals have started to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medals are detected. The transition of the sensor 2 (inserted medal sensor 31b) from the OFF state to the ON state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 (inserted medal sensor 31b) from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. In this case, it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct.

Further, when it is detected by the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 that a medal has passed through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. When the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the sensor 2 and then from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 3 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data, and from the ON state of the inserted medal sensor 1 After entering the OFF state, the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and thereafter, when the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the inserted medal sensor 2 is specified based on the medal insertion signal transition state data. , the medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

Then, in the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct, and that one of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passage state reference data ( detection) is set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 first changes from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the inserted medal signal transition state data is correct, so the inserted medal signal transition state data is correct. And when the inserted medal sensor 1 is turned ON, the medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

Further, when it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and all of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set. It will happen. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state last, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state last, the medal insertion signal transitions. Since the state data is determined to be correct, the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct, and when the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is detected. to be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after it is determined that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set in steps Sd16 and Sd17, the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 are input in steps Sd21 to Sd24. When it is specified that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion process and the like. That is, when the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set by the medal sensor check process, normal medals are detected by detecting the falling of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state. Input is detected.

[Regarding ball output control processing]
The control contents of the ball-out control process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 62 . The ball output control process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the ball output control process, first, the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the output buffer value for the signal during the advantageous interval is set to the initial value (OFF 0) indicating the state is determined (Sj1). If it is determined in step Sj1 that the output buffer value for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value (0) and the signal is not being output during the advantageous interval, that is, the state is not controlled in the advantageous interval. , the number of bets in the game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is obtained in the A register (Sj2), and it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the game is 3 (Sj3).

If it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is 3, a game state determination process for determining the game state is performed (Sj4), and after obtaining the currently controlled game state, It is determined whether or not the game state being controlled is a special state (BB1, BB2) (Sj5). Then, when it is determined that it is not in the special state (BB1, BB2), the general combination winning number that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning result of the general combination in the internal lottery is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether or not the general combination winning number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether or not the advantageous section transition combination for shifting the game section to the advantageous section has been won by internal lottery.

Then, in step Sj7, when it is determined that the general combination winning number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and that the advantageous section transition combination has been won, the data number for setting when winning the advantageous section is set in the A register (Sj8). , continuous data processing is performed (Sj9). By setting the data number for setting when winning an advantageous section in the A register and performing continuous data processing, processing such as setting an advantageous section flag indicating that the advantageous section is being controlled in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It is designed to be Since the advantageous interval flag is set in step Sj9, the advantageous interval flag is referred to in the above-described main processing (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is stored in the advantageous interval signal output buffer. After setting, the output of the signal during the advantageous section is started.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sj9, after performing advantageous interval transition-related processing for performing various settings related to the transition to advantageous interval (Sj10), ball output control processing is terminated and main processing is performed. back to

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is not three, and if it is determined in step Sj5 that the currently controlled gaming state is a special state (BB1, BB2), step Sj7 , if it is determined that the general role winning number is less than the predetermined value and the advantageous zone transition role has not been won in the internal lottery, the process related to the transition to the advantageous zone in steps Sj8 to Sj10 is not performed, Terminate the ball output control process and return to the main process.

In step Sj1, the output buffer value of the signal during the advantageous interval is not the initial value (0, which is the OFF state), but a predetermined value (1, which indicates the ON state), and the signal is output during the advantageous interval, that is, the advantageous interval. is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of games in the advantageous interval, which is the number of games after the start of the advantageous interval. 1 is added (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous interval game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area initialized when it is determined that the advantageous interval end flag is set by the above-described main processing. The section game number counter is initialized and set to an initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous section.

After adding 1 to the advantageous zone game number counter in step Sj11, the number of bets and game state determination processing are performed (Sj12), and the number of bets set in the game and the currently controlled game state are acquired. . Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is 2 or whether the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1 (Sj13).

If it is determined in step Sj13 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or that the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1, the ball output control process is terminated and the process proceeds to the main process. return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled gaming state is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is 3, In addition, when it is determined that the game state currently being controlled is RT1, 1 is added to the ED transition game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

The ED transition game number counter is set in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) after the advantageous interval is started. A counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the above-described main processing, The ED transition game number counter is initialized and set to the initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous period, similarly to the advantageous period game number counter. The ED transition game number counter is referred to in the AT state management process described later, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches a specified value, navigation notification control is performed for the period until the advantageous section ends. is to be migrated to

After adding 1 to the ED transition game number counter in step Sj14, freeze setting processing is performed (Sj15) to determine whether or not to perform freeze control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period, and to perform freeze control. When the determination is made, the setting for performing freeze control is performed.

After the freeze setting process is performed in step Sj15, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that stores the next ball-out state information set by the ball-out state processing described later and the ball-out state-related processing in the AT state management process is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next ball-out status information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current ball-out state information indicating the ball-out state to be controlled in the game is updated to the next ball-out state information acquired in step Sj17 (Sj18), and the ball-out state to be controlled based on the current ball-out state information is updated. It is determined whether or not the game is in a ball-out state in which navigation notification may be performed (Sj19).

In step Sj19, when it is determined that the ball is being put out in a state where the navigation notification may be performed, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 that indicates by lighting that the game section is being controlled to be an advantageous section is displayed. After setting the ON state data (Sj20), a process of waiting for one interrupt is performed (Sj21). By setting the ON state data in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing the one-interrupt wait processing, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the one-interrupt wait processing, and the section display LED 19 is displayed by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing. is controlled to be lit.

After performing the one-interrupt waiting process in step Sj21, the ball-out state information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), and after setting the initial value (1) of the external output signal number in the B register (Sj23), External output signal number correction processing is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction process, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the ball output state information set in the A register.

Thereafter, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referred to when performing the external output signal processing in the above-described main processing (Sb25). An external output signal is output, and when the AT control is started, an AT signal indicating that the AT is being controlled is started to be output.

After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in the step of Sj25, the ball-out status information is obtained again in the A register (Sj26), and the winning general winning number is obtained in the B register (Sj27). , navigation number identification processing is performed (Sj28). In the navigation number specifying process, a predetermined navigation number is specified according to the general combination winning number (winning number).

After performing the navigation number specifying process in step Sj28, the navigation number specified by the navigation number specifying process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). Also, when it is determined in step Sj19 that the ball-out state is not a ball-out state in which navigation notification may be performed, the process proceeds to step Sj29, and the value of the ball-out state information, ie, 0, is stored as the navigation number. By setting 0 as the navigation number, the navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is hidden. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation numbers, a navigation display showing the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the navigation numbers is performed. The navigation number stored in step Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission processing (Sb22) in the main processing described above, and a push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. becomes.

After the navigation number is stored in the step of Sj29, ball output state processing is performed (Sj30). In the ball-out state processing, there are processing according to the current ball-out state specified based on the ball-out state information, processing to determine whether or not to shift the ball-out state based on the winning result of the internal lottery, etc. When it is determined that the ball state is to be shifted, the processing for setting the next ball state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

In step Sj30, the payout state process is completed, so that the payout control process is completed and the process returns to the main process.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period to the predetermined value (1) in the ball output control process (first process) called from the main process at the start of the game. If it is identified as an interval (Sj1), regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the advantageous interval game number counter is updated by adding one game (Sj11). )do. Then, in the AT management process (second process) called from the main process at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous zone game number counter updated by the ball output control process in the game reaches the specified number of games (first specified number). It is determined whether or not the number of games has been reached, and if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, an advantageous section end flag is set. After that, in the main process, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, thereby initializing the information regarding the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 updates the number-of-games-counter for the advantageous section, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or the number of bets to 2, when the control is in the advantageous section. Since the advantageous interval ends when the advantageous interval game number counter value reaches the specified number of games (first specified number), the predetermined game is played regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 is selected or the number of bets of 2 is selected. The number of games in the advantageous interval is limited so as not to be controlled in the advantageous interval for a long period of time equal to or greater than a certain number (1500 games in this embodiment). As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 from becoming excessively high.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the signal is being output during the advantageous interval based on whether the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is the initial value. Determine whether or not it is in the interval. Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous interval, as the processing (Sj11 to Sj30) related to the advantageous interval in the ball output control processing, the processing for updating the advantageous interval game number counter, the state where the number of bets is 2, or the Processing related to navigation notification performed on the condition that the game state is other than RT1 (for example, the number of ED transition games for specifying the game to transition to the ED state in which navigation notification control is performed until the end of the advantageous section Processing of updating the counter, processing of setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) for controlling the lighting state in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 on condition that the ball is put out in a predetermined state, winning of a general role A process of specifying the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number based on the number and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of performing various processes according to the currently controlled ball output state, etc.) is to be performed. As a result, it is possible to ensure that processing relating to the advantageous section is performed while the signal is being output during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, in the ball output control process called from the main process at the start of the game, when it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer is not the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous interval is not ( Sj1), as the condition for starting the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the winning of the advantageous section transition hand in the internal lottery is established (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the condition for starting the advantageous section is established. If so, an advantageous interval flag indicating control to the advantageous interval is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80). A predetermined value (data (1) indicating the ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous section. After that, by performing LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing, a signal during the advantageous section is output. This ensures that the processing (Sj8, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous interval is performed in a state where the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer is not the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous interval signal is not being output. can.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not it is in the advantageous interval based on the value of the advantageous interval signal buffer in the ball output control process. This signal is output to a testing device that performs a performance test of the machine 1 . As a result, processing relating to the advantageous section is performed in a state in which the signal during the advantageous section used for the performance test is output, and processing to shift to the advantageous section in a state in which the signal during the advantageous section is not output is performed. can be guaranteed. Further, in the ball output control process, by determining whether or not the advantageous period is in effect based on the value of the advantageous period signal buffer, the There is no need to separately provide a flag, and the data capacity can be reduced.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the advantageous section signal buffer in the ball output control process (Sj1) and determines that the number of bets of 3 is set. In (Sj3), processing (Sj7, Sj8) for transitioning to the advantageous section is performed, and it is determined that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), but the number of bets of 3 is not set. When it is determined (Sj3), the processing for shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is not performed, the ball output control processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed. You can be prompted to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1) and that it is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). If it is (Sj5), the processing (Sj7, Sj8) to shift to the advantageous section is performed, while it is determined that it is not the advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2). In this case, the processing (Sj7, Sj8) for shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, and the ball output control processing is terminated to return to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the processing to shift to the advantageous section is not performed, so that the player etc. BB2) can be urged to play the game.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), and determines that the number of bets of 3 is set (Sj3). and when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled (Sj5), the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj7, Sj8) is performed, while it is determined that it is not the advantageous section (Sj1 ), when it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, or when it is determined that the control is in a special state (BB1, BB2), the processing (Sj7, Sj8) to shift to the advantageous section is performed. The ball output control process is terminated without performing, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, or when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), Since the transition processing is not performed, it is possible to prompt the player or the like to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with a bet number of three (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. If it is determined (Sj13), the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and it is determined that it is an advantageous section. However, (Sj1), if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set (Sj13), the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is not performed, and the main control processing is terminated. It will return to processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. You can be prompted to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the game state is BB1. When it is determined that RT1 is carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1), and in the advantageous section Although it is determined that there is (Sj1), when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is not performed, and the ball output control processing is performed. It terminates and returns to the main processing. As a result, in the ball output control process, when the game state is a game state other than RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be urged to play the game at RT1. can.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous interval is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous interval (Sj1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. When it is determined that the game state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 is carried over (Sj13), the processing related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is in the advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, or when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1. , the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to the navigation notification is not performed, and the ball output control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. Thus, in the ball output control process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, a process related to navigation notification is performed. Therefore, the player or the like can be urged to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the ball output control process of this embodiment, in the game after the game in which the process (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, the external output signal number is set to the external output signal Each process of steps Sj11 to Sj30 including the process of setting the output buffer (Sj25) is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the game in which the output of the AT signal is started Since the processing (Sj1 to Sj10) for shifting to the advantageous section is performed in the game before , the output of the AT signal is started while the section is being displayed.

In the ball output control process of the present embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, the ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after performing the one-interrupt wait process , the process of storing the external signal number in the output buffer (Sj25) is performed, so that the AT signal is output after starting the section display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the AT signal from identifying that the advantageous section is being controlled before the section display is started.

In the ball output control process of the present embodiment, when the number of three bets (the first number of bets) is set, the process (Sj14 to Sj30) related to navigation notification is performed, while the number of bets of two ( If the second bet number) is set, the processing related to the navigation notification will not be performed, and if the winning role is won by the internal lottery in the advantageous section, 3 cards When the number of bets (first number of bets) of ( When the second number of bets is set, the operation mode (order of stop of correct answer) corresponding to the type of winning multiple-play winning combination is not reported. As a result, when the number of bets of 2 (second number of bets) is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not instructed by the navigation notification, so that the number of bets of 3 (second number of bets) is set. You can encourage them to play games.

[Regarding operation information signal output processing]
The control contents of the operation information signal output process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The operation information signal output process is included in the non-game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the operation information signal output process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the current stack pointer SP is moved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program. The value of the indicated address is read, stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area, and saved (Sz501). After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sz502). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are saved in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP (Sz503). Incidentally, when the non-game RAM area initialization processing included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the game program to that for the non-game program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the non-game RAM area initialization process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the non-game RAM area initialization process is It may differ from the state of the register when the program calls the non-game RAM area initialization process.

After saving all registers in step Sz503, communication setting processing is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, the baud rate value of the communication signal and the signal transmission function of the main control unit 41 are set.

After performing the communication setting process in step Sz504, the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether or not the navigation number is 0 and navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). When it is determined that the navigation number is 0, after reading the winning status of the general combination specified based on the general combination winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c into the flag register Z (Sz507), A value (0) indicating the operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that minimizes the loss of a winning combination is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, it is determined whether or not the general role is not won based on the winning status of the general role read into the flag register Z in step Sz507 (Sz509).

In the step of Sz509, when it is determined that the general role has not been won and it is lost, the top address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table is set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning status of the special role can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process, the symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the value of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for obtaining a reel number set value by addition processing (Sz516) described later according to the winning status of a special combination when none of the general combinations has been won.

When the pattern stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and when it is determined in step Sz506 that the navigation number is not 0 and navigation notification is performed, the general role is won in step Sz509. If it is determined that there is, the process proceeds to step Sz513 to set the top address of the reel number signal data table in the HL register. Thereafter, the A register value is corrected by performing a predetermined correction process (Sz514), the values of the A register and the flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and an addition process is performed (Sz516). In addition processing, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a reel number signal (Sz517).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the steps after Sz513 are processed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz517, the navigation A reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, when it is determined that the general role has been won in step Sz509 and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, in the case where the pattern stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and the process of steps after Sz513 is performed, and when a special combination is won, the A register is selected. symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order that can win the winning special role is set, and the stop that can win the winning special role A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and the processes in steps Sz513 and subsequent steps are performed, and when the special combination is not won, the A register stores DDT points. The pattern stop signal pattern setting data for setting the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set so that the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

After setting the reel number signal in step Sz517, the values of the A register and flag register saved in step Sz515 are restored (Sz518), and the start address of the stop execution pattern number table is set in the HL register (Sz519). . Then, addition processing is performed. In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is obtained in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the stop execution pattern number (Sz521).

Thereafter, a stop execution step calculation process is performed to calculate a stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number (Sz522), and the stop execution step acquired by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a stop execution position signal that can be specified. (Sz523).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the steps after Sz518 are processed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz523, the navigation A stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Further, when it is determined that the general role has been won in step Sz509 and the processing of steps after Sz518 is performed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in the step of Sz512, and the processing of the steps after Sz518 is performed, and when the special combination is won, the A register is selected. Symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting a stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing at which the winning special role can be won is set, and it is possible to win the winning special role. A stop execution position signal indicating stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also, in the case where the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512, and the process of steps after Sz518 is performed, and when the special combination is not won, the DDT point is stored in the A register. The data for setting the symbol stop signal pattern for setting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become so.

After setting the stop execution position signal in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in step Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524), and reel number signal output processing is performed (Sz525). In the reel number signal output process, a reel number signal capable of specifying the stopping order of each reel specified based on the A register value is output from a predetermined output port to the testing device.

After reel number signal output processing is performed in step Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in step Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and stop execution position signal output processing is performed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal capable of specifying the stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value from a predetermined output port to the test device.

After performing the stop execution position signal output process in step Sz527, the values of all registers saved in step Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the stack pointer values saved in step Sz501 are restored. to end the operation information signal output process and return to the main process.

As described above, in the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, the stop execution position signal and the stop execution position signal are output to the test apparatus as the operation information signals specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible. In the ball output control process described above, when starting control of the AT, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to light up by timer interrupt processing. After the section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section is started, the operation information signal output processing is called in the main processing. A signal is output to the test equipment. As a result, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, it is possible for the test device side to identify that the designated operation mode is in the state where the section display is being performed.

In the operation information signal output process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not navigation information indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is performed based on the navigation number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506) If it is determined that the navigation notification is to be performed, a process (Sz523) of outputting a stop execution position signal designating the operation mode instructed based on the navigation number is performed, and if the navigation notification is not to be performed If determined, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to (Sz509), and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number is performed (Sz509). there is As a result, in the operation information signal output process, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, so the operation mode is specified. The processing for outputting the stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[Data processing for role ratio monitor]
The control contents of the role ratio monitor data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 69. FIG. The role ratio monitor data processing is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program. In addition, the role ratio monitor data processing calls each state count process, which is a subroutine included in the non-game program. A material ratio update process and an instructed role ratio update process are further called.

The main control unit 41 displays the character item payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the character item payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts as a ratio display, the credit indicator 11 composed of a two-digit 7-segment display, and the game auxiliary display. Control to display on the device 12 is performed. The credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 are display devices that display information according to the progress of the game, and the ratio display cannot be displayed all the time. A ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like.

Specifically, when the game is not being played, the front door 1b, which is normally locked, is unlocked by a key possessed by the store clerk to open it, and then the front door 1b is provided inside the housing 1a. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated, the main control unit 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display device 11 and the game auxiliary display device 12 to start displaying the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display is composed of four alphanumeric characters consisting of the upper two digits of alphanumeric characters that form an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display and the lower two digits that indicate the ratio. The display contents are displayed on a credit display device 11 and the display contents of the lower two digits are displayed on a game auxiliary display device 12, and the ratio display is displayed by switching at predetermined time intervals in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

Closing the front door 1b, inserting medals into the slot machine 1, generating an error, operating the setting key switch 37, and adjusting the settlement switch 10 while the ratio display is displayed on the credit display 11 and the auxiliary game display 12. , or stoppage of power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, the ratio display is terminated by switching to the original display contents displayed before displaying the ratio display.

The main control unit 41 performs a process of determining whether or not a prize has been won according to the display results drawn to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R in the winning determination process (step Sb49 in FIG. 50) in the main process. After performing the one-interrupt waiting process (Sb50), the flag register value is saved (Sb51), the timer interrupt is set to disabled (Sb52), and data processing for the role ratio monitor included in the non-game program is performed. to run.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the role ratio monitor data processing, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is transferred to a predetermined non-game RAM area. Store in the area and save (Sk1), then use the LD instruction to set a predetermined value of the non-game stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-game program) as the value of the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sk2). Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area (Sk3). Then, after executing each state count process (Sk4) included in the non-game program, the values of the registers saved in the step of Sk3 are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area using the above-mentioned first return instruction. , After returning all the registers to the state when the role ratio monitor data processing was started (Sk5), using the LD command, in the step of Sk1, store it in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and save it. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the data processing for role ratio monitoring was started (Sk6), and the data processing for role ratio monitoring is ended. Returning to the main process of the calling source, the process proceeds to step Sb54. A timer interrupt is permitted in step Sb54 of the main processing, and the flag register value saved before the subsequent execution of the role ratio monitoring data processing is restored (Sb55).

As shown in FIG. 65, in each state counting process, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to 16777215 games as the upper limit.

If the total cumulative number of games cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sp22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added assuming that a game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As described above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of maximum 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling the 3-byte data addition & storage processing (Sp4) subroutine. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sp4). If the total cumulative number of games has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sp7. When the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit is set (Sp5, Sp6), and the process proceeds to step Sp7. In step Sp1 described above, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative number of games can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In steps from Sp7, it is determined whether the total accumulated number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, in the range of 6000 to 174999 games, or in the range of 175000 games or more (Sp7 to Sp20). Depending on the result of determination, a value indicating being within each range is set as a lighting identification segment (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor completion game determination flag. Then, after successively executing the role ratio update processing (Sp22), the continuous role ratio update processing (Sp23), and the commanded role ratio update processing (Sp24) included in the non-game program, it returns to the role ratio monitor data processing. do.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the accessory ratio update process, first, the number of games for determining the number of games is incremented by 1 (Sq1). At this point, 1 is added to a determination game number counter, which will be described later. Next, the number of winning medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of winning in the current game is added (Sq2, Sq3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the total payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

A cumulative buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter, and when a prize is won in a game and medals are paid out, each counter counts. When 6000 games have been reached after counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0, which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value.

Like the cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative buffer 2 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter. is done. When 6000 games have been reached after counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0, which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game to start counting is shifted from the total buffer 1 by 2000 games.

Like the cumulative buffers 1 and 2, the cumulative buffer 3 is also provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter. is counted by the counter of When 6000 games have been reached after counting is started, the total payout counter and the accessory payout counter are updated to 0, which is the initial value, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game to start counting is shifted from the total buffer 1 by 4000 games, and from the total buffer 1 by 2000 games.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number can be added (Sq4). If the total accumulated payout number cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sq10. If the total cumulative number of payouts can be added, the number of winning medals is added to the total cumulative number of payouts. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number has reached the upper limit (Sq7). If the total cumulative payout number has not reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step Sq10. When the total accumulated payout number has reached the upper limit, a value indicating that the total accumulated count stop flag has reached the upper limit is set (Sq8, Sq9), and the process proceeds to step Sq10. Whether or not the total cumulative number of payouts can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag. The same flags are used when

In steps Sq10 and Sq11, it is determined whether or not the character is operating in the game, that is, whether or not it is in the period under control by RB. If the accessory is not in operation, proceed to Sq17. When the accessory is activated, the number of winning medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the current game is added as the number of payouts during the accessory activation period (Sq12, Sq13). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the accessory payout counters of the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not it is possible to add the total accumulated accessory payout number (Sq14). If the total accumulated accessory payout number cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sq17. If it is possible to add the total accumulated number of payout accessories, the number of winning medals is added to the total total number of payout accessories (Sb15, 16), and the process proceeds to step Sq17. Incidentally, it is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag whether or not the total cumulative payout sheet number can be added.

From the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative payout number of accessories updated as described above, the ratio of the total cumulative payout number to the total cumulative payout number is calculated (Sq17, Sq18). Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number (Sq19).

Subsequently, the determination game number counter is referenced to determine whether or not the game is the update game number (Sq20 to Sq23). The judgment game number counter is a counter that circulates and counts between 1 and 6000 games. is the counter used. The determination is made by dividing the determination counter by 2000 to determine whether or not there is a remainder. If there is a remainder, the game is determined not to be the number of updated games, and each state counting process is returned to.

If the judgment counter is divided by 2000 and there is no remainder, it is determined from the quotient of the division result which of the 2000 games, 4000 games, and 6000 games is the updated game (Sq24). Then, the value of the total payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game among the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 and stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer as the cumulative payout number of 6000 games, and the total payout counter of the reading source is stored. is updated to the initial value of 0 (Sq25-Sq27). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter is read out from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game, stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer as the total number of accessory payouts for 6000 games, and the readout source accessory payout counter is set to the initial value. Update to a certain 0 (Sq28-Sq30).

Further, from the 6000 game cumulative payout number and the 6000 game cumulative award payout number stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer, the role payout ratio to the 6000 game cumulative payout number is calculated (Sq31, Sq32). Then, the calculated value is stored as the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games (Sq33). After that, it returns to each state counting process.

The character item payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts and the character item payout ratio for the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and are displayed on the gaming machine information display together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display. 50 will be displayed sequentially.

Referring to FIG. 67, update status of total buffers 1 to 3 and 6000 times calculation buffer by role ratio monitor data processing and total total calculation buffer storing total total payout number and total total bonus payout number are stored. explain. The storage contents of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the 6000 times calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer are retained unless initialized due to an abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason.

Counting in the cumulative total buffer 1 and the total cumulative calculation buffer is started from the state where each buffer value is initialized. When 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative buffer 2 is started. Cumulative buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative buffer 3 is started. Cumulative buffer 1 and cumulative buffer 2 continue counting.

Further, when 2000 games have passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the total buffer 1 are stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer. Then, the count contents of the total buffer 1 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

After the next 2000 games have passed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the cumulative buffer 2 are stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer. Then, the counting contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

In this way, the counting results for 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times every 2000 games. During this time, the counting results in the total cumulative calculation buffer are accumulated without being initialized.

Next, the control contents of the continuous role product ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the continuous accessory ratio update process, first, when the game state is controlled to be in the special state (B1, BB2), BB indicating that the special state is in progress (B1, BB2) Based on whether or not the output buffer of the output port that outputs the medium signal to the outside of the slot machine 1 is at the initial value (0), it is determined whether or not the special state is in effect (Sr1). Then, when it is determined that the special state is in effect, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is a continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) that counts the number of medals to be paid out during the special state (B1, BB2). address is set in the HL register (Sr2). Then, after setting the number of medals to be paid out in the game in the B register (Sr3), 3-byte data addition processing is performed (Sr4). In the 3-byte data addition process, 1-byte payout number data is added to a 3-byte continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition).

After that, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the number of payout counter (total total) that counts the total number of paid medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit. The address of the determination flag is set in the HL register (Sr5), and based on the value of the upper limit reach determination flag, it is determined whether or not the payout number counter (total total) has reached the upper limit (Sr6). . The upper limit reach determination flag is set to 0 when the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when it has reached the upper limit value.

If it is determined in step Sr6 that the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit, the number of payout medals in the game is set in the E register (Sr7), and 0 is set in the D register. (Sr8). Also, the address of the payout number counter (total total) is set in the HL register (Sr9), and 3-byte data addition storage processing is performed (Sr10). In the 3-byte data addition storage process, a process of adding 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte payout number counter (total total) is performed.

If 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed in step Sr10, if it is determined that there is no special state in step Sr1, it is determined that the payout number counter (total total) has reached the upper limit value in step Sr6. If so, proceed to step Sr11, set the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (total total) in the HL register (Sr11), and set the address of the payout number counter (total total) to the DE register (Sr12). . Thereafter, division processing is performed (Sr13). In division processing, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the continuous accessory ratio (total total) (Sr14).

After that, the address of the number-of-games counter (for addition) for counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in the HL register (Sr15), 2000 is set in the DE register (Sr16), and the value of the HL register is set to DE. The remainder obtained by division by the register value is set in the DE register (Sr17). Then, based on the value of the DE register, it is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sr18). If it is determined in Sr18 that the remainder value is not 0, the continuous role product ratio update process is terminated and the process returns to each state counting process. , set the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) in the HL register (Sr19), set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and during the special state (B1, BB2 ) is set in the DE register (Sr20), and the 6000G total data transfer process is performed (Sr21). In the 6000G cumulative data transfer process, the HL register value is added to the DE register value.

After that, the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (cumulative total of 6000G) is set in the HL register (Sr22), and the address of the payout number counter (cumulative total of 6000G) updated by the aforementioned accessory ratio update process is set in the DE register. (Sr23), a division process is performed (Sr24). In division processing, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the continuous role ratio for the past 6000 games (Sr25).

In step Sr25, after storing the continuous role ratio for the past 6000 games in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the continuous role ratio updating process is terminated and the process returns to each state counting process.

The accessory payout ratios for the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display.

Thus, in the continuous accessory ratio update process of the present embodiment, it is determined (Sr1) whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is being controlled, and if it is determined that the special state is being controlled, It is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter for counting the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit (Sr6), and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached. , the processing (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the total cumulative number of payout bonuses and the total number of continuous bonus payouts is not performed, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the total cumulative number of payout bonuses, the total A process (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the total number of continuous accessory payouts is performed. Thus, regardless of the situation where the total number of medals awarded to the player cannot be updated, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative number of payout bonuses and the total number of continuous bonus payouts from being updated.

Next, the control contents of the instructed winning ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the instructed accessory ratio update process, first, whether or not a payout number counter (total total) for counting the total number of payout medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit value. is set in the HL register (St1), and based on the value of the upper limit reach determination flag, whether or not the payout number counter (total total) has reached the upper limit is determined (St2). The upper limit reach determination flag is set to 0 when the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, and is set to 1 when it has reached the upper limit value.

When it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total total) has not reached the upper limit value, when the game state is controlled to be in the special state (B1, BB2), the special state (B1 , BB2), the value of the output buffer of the output port that outputs to the outside of the slot machine 1 is read into the A register (St3), and whether the value of the output buffer is the initial value (0) Based on whether it is not, it is determined whether it is in a special state (St4).

Then, when it is determined in the step of St4 that the special state is not in effect, the navigation number in the game set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-described ball output control process is read into the A register (St5), and one or more navigation It is determined whether or not a number is set and the game is a game in which navigation notification is performed (St6).

Then, if it is determined in step St4 that the game is in a special state, and if it is determined in step St6 that the game is a navigation announcement, the number of medals to be paid out in the game is read into the A register (St7 ), the D register is set to 0 (St8), and the command is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to count the total number of medals to be paid out in the game in which the navigation notification is performed and the game in the special state. The address of the payout number counter (total total) is set in the HL register (St9), and 3-byte data addition storage processing is performed (St10). In the 3-byte data addition storage process, a process of adding 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte instructed accessory payout number counter (total total) is performed.

Then, after performing the 3-byte data addition storage process in step St10, the process proceeds to step St11. Further, when it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step St11 without performing the processing in steps St3 to St10. Further, when it is determined in step St6 that the game is not a game in which navigation notification is performed, the process proceeds to step St11 without performing the processes of steps St7 to St10.

In the step of St11, the address of the instructed accessory payout number counter (total cumulative total) is set in the HL register (St11), and the address of the payout number counter (total cumulative total) updated by the aforementioned continuous accessory ratio update process is set. The DE register is set (St12), and division processing is performed (St13). In division processing, the value of the quotient obtained by dividing the value of the HL register by the DE register is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the instructed bonus payout ratio to the total accumulated payout number (St14).

After storing the instructed role product payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step of St15, the instructed role product ratio update process is terminated and the process returns to each state count process.

The instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts is referred to in the display monitor data selection process, which will be described later, and is displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of displayed ratio display. .

As described above, in the instructed accessory ratio update process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter for counting the total number of medals given to the player has reached the upper limit. (St2), when it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached, the processing for updating the cumulative instructed accessory payout number (St3 to St10) is not performed, and when it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached determines whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled (St4), and when it is determined that the special state is controlled, the process of updating the total instructed bonus payout number (St7 to St10), and if it is determined that the control is not in the special state, it is determined whether or not an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed by the navigation notification (St6), and the navigation notification is advantageous to the player. When it is determined that such an operation mode has been instructed, a process (St7 to St10) for updating the total instructed accessory payout number is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total instructed accessory payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter for counting the total number given to the player cannot be updated.

[About AT state management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Incidentally, the AT state management process is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the AT state management process, first, the value of the advantageous interval game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is set to the initial value (0). (Su1). It should be noted that the number of games in the advantageous interval is updated by incrementing the number of games in the advantageous interval by incrementing by 1 by determining that the advantageous interval is in effect based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal in the above-described ball output control process. Inside, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to be 1 or more. In step Su1, if the value of the advantageous section game number counter remains at the initial value (0) and it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, AT Terminate the state management process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is not the initial value (0) in step Su1 and it is specified that the advantageous interval is in progress, the process advances to step Su2, where count the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the bet amount in the advantageous section from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section) By referring to the net increase number counter, the value of the net increase number counter is read into the HL register (Su2). After that, referring to the winning flag which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and which can specify the winning status of the general role in the game (Su3), it is determined whether or not the replay role has won in the game (Su4). ).

If it is determined in the step of Su4 that the replayed combination has not won a prize, the number of medals paid out in the game is read into the A register (Su5), and the number of payouts of the A register is added to the net increase number counter value of the HL register. (Su6). Then, the bet number set in the game is read into the A register (Su7), and the bet number of the A register is subtracted from the net increase number counter value of the HL register (Su8).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the HL register is 0 or more (Su9), and if the value of the HL register is not 0 or more, the value of the HL register is corrected to 0 (Su10), and The value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a net increase number counter value (Su11). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su9 that the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to 0, the value of the HL register is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the net increase number counter value without performing the correction in step Su10. (Su11), proceed to step Su12.

Further, when it is determined in the step Su4 that the replaying role has won in the game, the process proceeds to the step Su12 without performing the processing of the steps Su5 to Su11.

When the net increase number counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Su11 and updated, and when it is determined in step Su4 that the replay combination has won in the game, the net increase number counter value is based on the value of the HL register. When it is determined whether or not the counter value exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this embodiment), which is the end condition of the advantageous section (Su12), and it is determined that the net increase number counter value has exceeded the second specified number In step Su15, an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section end condition is satisfied is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su15), the AT state management process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, the value of the advantage zone game number counter set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register (Su13). , determines whether or not the value of the advantageous interval game number counter has reached the first prescribed number (1500 games in this embodiment), which is the condition for ending the advantageous interval (Su14). Then, when it is determined that the value of the advantageous interval game number counter has reached the first specified number, the process proceeds to step Su15, and an advantageous interval end flag indicating that the condition for ending the advantageous interval is satisfied is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su15), terminates the AT state management process, and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, and if it is determined in step Su14 that the advantageous section game number counter value has not reached the first specified number. , Su16, the number of bets and the game state determination process are performed (Su16), and the number of bets set in the game and the currently controlled game state are obtained. Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is 2 or whether the currently controlled game state is a game state other than RT1 (Su17).

If it is determined in the step of Su17 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or that the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, navigation notification in steps of Su18 to Su31 to be described later is performed. Terminate the AT state management process and return to the main process without performing related processes (processing related to transition to the ED state, ball paid state related processing for performing processing related to the ball paid state, etc.).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su17 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or the gaming state currently being controlled is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is 3. If it is determined that the current game state is RT1, the process proceeds to step Su18, and the ED shift flag value set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Su18). . Then, it is determined whether or not the current state is the ED state based on the ED transition flag value (Su19).

If it is determined in step Su19 that the current state is the ED state, the process advances to step Su30 without performing processing relating to transition to the ED state in Su20 to Su29, which will be described later. If it is determined in step Su19 that the current state is not the ED state, the process proceeds to step Su20, and in step Su11 the value of the net increase number counter updated and set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register. (Su20). Also, the third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment) regarding the net increase in the number of medals, which is a requirement for establishing the first ED shift condition, is read into the DE register (Su21). Then, by comparing the HL register value and the DE register value, it is determined whether or not the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the third prescribed number (Su22).

If it is determined in step Su22 that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the third specified number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and an ED transition flag indicating transition to ED state is set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c. (Su29). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su22 that the number of net increases in medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the third specified number, the fourth specified number (this implementation In the example, 1600 sheets) is read into the DE register (Su23). Then, by comparing the HL register value and the DE register value, it is determined whether or not the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the fourth specified number (Su24).

If it is determined in step Su24 that the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the fourth specified number, the process proceeds to step Su27. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su24 that the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous section has exceeded the fourth prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Su25, where the current navigation stock number set in the predetermined area of RAM 41c is stored in the A register. (Su25). Then, it is determined whether or not the current number of navigation stocks is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eight in this embodiment) which is a requirement for satisfying the second ED transition condition (Su26).

If it is determined in step Su26 that the current navigation stock number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and an ED transition flag indicating transition to the ED state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su29 ). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su26 that the current navigation stock number is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, updated by the above-described ball output control process, and after the advantageous section is started. , ED transition game number counter value for counting the number of games played in a predetermined state (the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled game state is RT1) is read into the HL register (Su27), and whether or not the ED transition game number counter value is equal to or greater than the fifth specified number (1150 to 1400 games in this embodiment) relating to the number of advantageous section games, which is the condition for transition to the ED state. (Su28). Then, when it is determined that the ED transition game number counter value has reached the fifth prescribed number and is equal to or greater than the fifth prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and the ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su29). After setting the ED transition flag in step Su29, the process proceeds to step Su30.

In the step of Su30, the ball payout state information indicating the ball payout state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and controlled in the game is acquired in the A register (Su30), and the ball payout state related processing is performed. (Su31). In the ball payout state related processing, the processing is performed according to the ball payout state specified based on the ball payout state information acquired in the A register. Then, the processing for controlling the navigation notification over the period until the advantageous section ends, the processing for managing the number of AT games for which the navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section end flag is stored in the RAM 41c when a predetermined arbitrary condition is satisfied. is set to a predetermined area to end the advantageous section, and processing to stop the output of the AT signal when ending the control of the AT is performed.

Then, after the paid ball state related processing is finished, the AT state management processing is finished and the process returns to the main processing.

In this way, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous interval is controlled, the conditions for ending the advantageous interval (the number of medal net additions in the advantageous interval exceeding the second specified number, the number of games in the advantageous interval exceeding the first specified number, is established, the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the advantageous interval is ended. The advantageous section end flag is then referred to in the main process, and the advantageous section data initialization process is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section end flag to initialize the data related to the control during the advantageous section. By doing so, the control of the advantageous section ends.

In the AT state management process, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (in this embodiment, the first prescribed number (1500 games)). If the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , to end the control of the advantageous section. Note that the termination condition of the advantageous interval is replaced with the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this embodiment). The end condition may be satisfied when the number exceeds the number of games obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games (1499 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous interval exceeds the second specified number, and when the number of games in the advantageous interval reaches the first specified number, an advantageous interval end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. do. Then, the advantageous interval end flag is referenced in the subsequent main processing, and the advantageous interval data initialization processing is performed based on the fact that the advantageous interval end flag is set, thereby ending the advantageous interval. ing.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in the advantageous section over the number of games is within a predetermined percentage. For example, the second specified number is 2395 (the maximum number of payouts (8) in the slot machine 1 is subtracted from 2400 as the upper limit number, and the maximum number (3) used for setting the bet amount is added. ), the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section can be 2400 or less, and the medal payout rate for 1600 games can be 150% or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of medals from being paid out in the slot machine 1 in a predetermined period. Instead of the termination condition that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second specified number (2395 in this embodiment), medals paid out in the advantageous section The same applies to the case where the end condition is that the net increase in number reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined prescribed number (2396 in this embodiment). It should be noted that the termination condition of the advantageous section may be replaced with the termination condition that is established when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second specified number (2395 in this embodiment). The ending condition may be that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the section reaches the number obtained by adding 1 to the predetermined specified number (2396 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number (maximum number of games (1500 games)), or when the net increase in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number (2395) If so, end the advantageous section. When the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first prescribed number, which is the upper limit of the number of games, the advantageous section is terminated, thereby preventing the advantageous section from continuing for a long period of time. If the net increase in the number exceeds the second specified number, by ending the AT state and the advantageous interval, even if the number of games in the advantageous interval does not reach the first specified number, which is the upper limit number of games, the payout rate sharply increases. It is designed to prevent the advantageous section from continuing when it increases.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, a common advantageous section end flag is set, and then In the main processing, the advantageous section data initialization processing is performed and controlled so that the advantageous section ends. As a result, even when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, the common advantageous section data initialization processing is performed to obtain the advantage. It is designed to end the section.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired as a net increase number value in a predetermined register (HL register), and the payout number value is added to the net increase number value, When the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase/decrease number of medals tends to decrease as shown in FIGS. and when it is smaller than the reference value (the value of the number of net additions at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, and when the number of medals increases or decreases, The increase/decrease in the number of sheets after the increasing trend becomes the value of the net increase number counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 71(a), after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of increase/decrease medals tends to decrease without navigation notification, and by adding the increase/decrease number to the net increase number counter, the net increase number When the value of the counter falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0 for the period in which the number of increased or decreased medals remains below the initial value. After that, when the number of medals increases or decreases by controlling to the AT state and performing a stop operation according to the navigation notification, the value of the net increase number counter is the value of the net increase number of medals ( A value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout number value) is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase/decrease number counter is set to the reference value when the increase/decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, when the increase/decrease number of medals reaches the lowest value. The value is set to indicate the number of sheets increased from the value.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 71(b), after the number of increase/decrease medals exceeds the initial value of the net increase number counter, it tends to decrease and again falls below the initial value (0 in this embodiment). In this case, the number of increase/decrease number of medals becomes 0 over the period when the number of medals increases or decreases below the initial value. Thereafter, as the number of medals increases or decreases, the value of the net increase number counter is updated by sequentially adding the value corresponding to the net increase number of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the number of payout values). As a result, the value of the net increase number counter is set to a value that indicates the increase in the number of medals from the reference value, which is the number of medals increased or decreased when the number of increased or decreased medals reaches the lowest value. .

In the AT state management process, after adding the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter value in the advantageous section, the calculation value obtained by subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase number counter value is 0. If it is larger, the value obtained by adding the payout number value to the net increase number counter value and subtracting the bet value is set in the net increase number counter and updated. The process of setting the net increase number counter to 0 and updating it is performed every game, and if the net increase number counter becomes a negative value during the advantageous period, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and the net increase number counter is counted again from 0. Since the net increase number counter is updated so as to start from , it is possible to directly specify the medal increase width (net increase number) in the transition of the actual medal increase/decrease number in the advantageous section as the net increase number counter value (Fig. 71 (a )reference).

In this embodiment, by performing the process of updating the net increase counter during the advantageous interval, the counting of the net increase in medals is started when the advantageous interval is entered, and the net increase in the advantageous interval is counted. Although it is configured to count the number of sheets, when it is not in the AT state during the advantageous section, the process of updating the net increase number counter is not performed, and when it is in the AT state during the advantageous section, the processing of updating the net increase number counter is performed. good. Even with such a configuration, when the navigation notification is not performed in the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase, and when the navigation notification is performed in the AT state, the net increase in the number of medals increases. The number of net increases in medals during the advantageous section can be counted in the same manner as the configuration for performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 71(a), for example, during a period in which navigation notification is not performed after shifting to an advantageous section, there is no winning with a payout rate exceeding 1, and the increase or decrease in the number of medals does not exceed the reference value. In the case of a decrease, the increase/decrease number of medals tends to increase from the game in which the game is shifted to the AT state and the navigation notification is started after the shift to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals during the advantageous section in the game. is the lowest. Note that winning with a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur even during a period in which navigation information is not provided after the transition to the advantageous section. In order for the increase/decrease in the number of medals during the period to be monotonically increasing, if a win with a payout rate exceeding 1 occurs during the period, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous period will increase in the game shifted to the advantageous period. lowest. Also, after the increase/decrease in the number of medals falls below the reference value once during the period, the increase/decrease in the number of medals will tend to increase. In the game of , the net increase in the number of cards during the advantageous section is the smallest. As described above, the point in time when the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section becomes the smallest may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net increase number counter as the net increase number counter in a predetermined register in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, and sets the payout number to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numerical value and subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, in a game in which the number of increase/decrease medals has changed from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend. , the net increase number counter is reset, and the net increase number value is counted again from 0. The net increase number is counted from the time when the net increase number is the lowest in the advantageous section, and the net increase number is counted accurately. You can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, by performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous interval, the counting of the net increase number of medals is started from the time of transition to the advantageous interval, and the net increase in the advantageous interval is counted. Although it is configured to count the number of sheets, it may be configured to perform processing for updating the net increase number counter regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section. With such a configuration, when the number of net increase in medals is increasing in the section before being shifted to the advantageous section, the net increase in number of medals in the section is taken over and the net increase in number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the medal payout rate to 1 or more by performing the stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. , by performing a stop operation in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification, the medal payout rate becomes less than 1, and in the AT state, While the increase/decrease number of medals tends to increase by following the navigation notification, the increase/decrease number of medals tends to decrease in a state other than the AT state. Then, it is notified that it is a period in which the increase/decrease in the number of medals in the advantageous section tends to increase.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous interval end flag is set because the number of net increase in medals in the advantageous interval exceeds the second specified number, the number of games in the advantageous interval is set to the first specified number (upper limit game In either case, when the advantageous interval end flag is set by reaching the number), or when the advantageous interval end flag is set by the ball-out-related processing, the common advantageous interval data is initialized by the main processing thereafter. processing to initialize data (including AT state data) related to the advantageous section to end the advantageous section, i.e., the AT state management process, regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section that has been established, common By performing the advantageous section data initialization process of , the data related to the advantageous section is initialized uniformly in the same way, and the advantageous section is terminated. The configuration may be such that the data relating to the section is initialized and the advantageous section ends.

In this embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game during the advantageous interval is added to the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous interval. In the event that a predetermined minor winning combination involving the payout of medals is won, the predetermined minor winning combination wins and medals are awarded regardless of whether or not the predetermined minor winning combination is won and medals are actually paid out as a result of the game. has been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is assumed that the predetermined small winning combination has won and medals have been paid out, and the amount of medals to be paid out is counted by the net increase number counter. By intentionally missing the predetermined small combination, the net increase number counter does not exceed the prescribed number, and the number of games in the advantageous section can be prevented from being intentionally extended.

In addition, when a predetermined minor winning combination is won in an internal lottery, the predetermined minor winning combination wins and medals regardless of whether or not the predetermined minor winning combination is won and medals are actually paid out as a result of the game. is considered to have been paid out, and the number of medals to be paid out is added to the net increase number counter to count the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section. In the event that a lottery target win is won, regardless of whether or not it is possible for the player to win the said minor win, if the said minor win wins, the winning of the said minor win To add the paid-out medals to a net increase number counter, and to ensure that a player wins a small winning combination including a small winning combination accompanied by the paying out of medals in an internal lottery when winning the lottery target winning combination. is possible, for example, the navigation target role is won as the lottery target role in the internal lottery, and the navigation notification is advantageous to the player. , 8C, and 8R are notified, it is possible to win a predetermined minor combination included in the navigation target combination, but the player is operated in an operation mode different from the reported operation mode. If it is not possible to win a predetermined small winning combination by doing so, or if a specific small winning combination is won and the operation is performed in a certain operation mode (operation at an operation timing that is within the specific winning range, etc.), the specific winning combination will always be In spite of the fact that it is possible to win a small winning combination, if a player is unable to win a specific small winning combination due to an operation mode other than a fixed operating mode, the player may win a prize. It is assumed that the possible small win was won and medals were paid out, and by adding the medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, and an internal lottery is performed. In the event that a lottery winning combination including a small winning combination that involves the payout of medals is won, the player cannot win the winning combination in a situation where it is impossible for the player to win the winning combination, for example, In a situation where a navigation target role is won as a lottery target role in an internal lottery, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is not reported by the navigation notification, a predetermined small number included in the navigation target role is selected. It is preferable that the net increase number counter is not added when the combination cannot be won. In a situation where it is not possible to do so, the net increase number counter is incremented only when the number of medals actually increases, which can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, thereby increasing the number of bets. If the calculation value obtained by subtracting the value of the medals used for setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, so that the increase or decrease number of medals is 0 in the net increase number counter. When it is less than 0, the number less than 0 is not counted, and only the number greater than 0 is counted. , when medals are paid out during the advantageous section, the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase number counter, and when medals are used to set the bet amount, the number of medals is added. By repeatedly performing the process of subtracting the value of from the net increase number counter, the net increase number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. good. With such a configuration, the net increase number counter is not corrected to 0 when the increase/decrease number of medals is less than 0, so the processing for counting the net increase number by the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, which is used to set the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the medal value is less than 0, the value of the net increase counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is changed to the net increase. By controlling to update the value of the net increase number counter so as to use the counter value, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from when the net increase number of medals decreases the most after the start of the advantageous section. . After the start of the advantageous section, the timing at which the number of net increases in medals decreases the most can change depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 causes the net increase number counter to start counting the number of net increases in tokens when a uniformly set trigger occurs after the start of the advantageous section, and the trigger is set. It is also possible to count the number of net additions of medals up to the present as the starting point, and end the advantageous section when the number of net additions of medals exceeds a prescribed number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and if the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section As a configuration for ending , counting by the net increase number counter starts when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, and the net increase in medals up to the present starting when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. The configuration may be such that the advantageous section is ended when the time limit is exceeded. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase in medals is set at a point other than when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the termination condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter, the control for determining the termination condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter can be simplified.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the prescribed number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, lighting of the section display LED 19 suggests that the transition to the AT state has occurred, and when an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by navigation notification, When the number of net additions of medals up to the present starting from . According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for judging the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set. , and there is no need to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals except when the operation mode to increase the medals is notified by the navigation notification. It is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the number counter.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not an operation mode for increasing medals is notified by the navigation notification, the fact that the section display LED 19 lights up indicates that the transition to the AT state has occurred. When it is suggested, the advantageous section may be ended and the normal section may be started when the net increase in medals up to the present starting from the point exceeds the prescribed number. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the operation of increasing the number of medals by the navigation notification. Regardless of whether the mode has been notified or not, it is necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from other than when the transition to the advantageous section is indicated by lighting of the section display LED 19. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter.

In the present embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the number of net increases in medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the advantageous section is controlled to end. Only the number of medals paid out in each game is counted without counting the number of medals used to set the number of bets, and when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds the prescribed number, the advantageous section ends. The configuration may be such that the control is performed so that the For example, the prescribed number of total payouts is set to 2865 (net increase in number (2400) where the payout rate of medals in 1600 games is 150%, and the shortest number of games in which the net increase in medals is awarded (160 games = 2400/1 The maximum payout amount per game (15)) and the number of medals used to set the bet amount (480 medals = 160 games x the prescribed number per game 3), the payout in one game on the slot machine 1 When the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous period exceeds the specified number of medals obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of medals, the advantageous period is terminated. The maximum net increase in the number of medals paid out in the section can be 2400 or less, and the medal payout rate for 1600 games can be 150% or less. The same effect can be achieved by terminating the advantageous interval when the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous interval reaches a predetermined number (predetermined number+1).

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period to the predetermined value (1) in the ball output control process (first process) called from the main process at the start of the game. When it is determined that it is an interval (Sj1), it is determined that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set, and it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (Sj13). , the ED transition game number counter for counting the number of ED transition games is updated (Sj14). Then, in the AT management process (second process) called from the main process at the end of the game, it is determined that the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) is set, and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. When it is determined that there is (Su17), it is determined whether or not the value of the ED transition game number counter updated by the ball output control process in the game has reached the specified number of games (fifth specified number) (Su22 ), when it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, the process (Su29) for shifting to the ED state in which the navigation notification is controlled for the period until the end of the advantageous section is performed, while the number of bets of 3 ( When it is determined that the first bet number) is not set, or when it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, the AT state management is performed without performing the processing (Su29) for shifting to the ED state. It terminates the processing and returns to the main processing. As a result, in the AT state management process, when the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is not set, or when the game state is a game state other than RT1, a process of shifting to the ED state is performed. Therefore, the player or the like can be urged to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the advantageous interval is in progress when the advantageous interval game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) in the AT state management process called from the main process at the end of the game. (Su1), regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 or 2 is set, the net increase number counter is updated based on the number of medals to be paid out and the number of bets, etc. in the game. (Su3 to Su11), after updating the net increase number counter, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase number counter exceeds the second specified number (Su12), and if it is determined that it exceeds the second specified number , is set as an advantageous section end flag (Su15). After that, in the main processing, by performing advantageous section data initialization processing based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, the information regarding the advantageous section is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated.

The main control unit 41 updates the net increase number counter and updates the net increase number counter regardless of whether the bet amount of 3 is set or the bet amount of 2 is set when the control is performed in the advantageous interval. Since the advantageous section ends when the counter value exceeds the specified number (second specified number), the upper limit number (in this embodiment, 2400) medals are not paid out, and the number of paid out medals in an advantageous section is restricted so as not to be excessively large. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 from increasing excessively.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is not the initial value (0) but is an advantageous interval (Su1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. If it is determined (Su17), the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, and the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is determined to be an advantageous interval instead of the initial value (0). However, (Su1), when it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set (Su17), the AT state management processing is terminated without performing the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30). It returns to the main processing. As a result, in the AT state management process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. You can be prompted to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous interval (Su1), and that the gaming state is RT1. If so (Su17), the process related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0), but it is judged to be an advantageous section (Su1 ), when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT state management process is terminated without performing the processes related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30), and the process returns to the main process. It's like As a result, in the AT state management process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. can encourage you to do so.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is not the initial value (0) but the advantageous interval (Su1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. When it is determined that the game state is RT1 (Su17), the processing related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0 ), but it is determined to be in the advantageous section (Su1), but when it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, or when it is determined that the game state is a game state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT state management process is terminated without performing the processes related to the navigation notification (Su18 to Su30), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the AT state management process, when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set and the game state is a game state other than RT1, processing related to navigation notification is performed. Therefore, the player or the like can be urged to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is set and that the game state is controlled to RT1. When (Su17), it is determined whether the ED transition condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28), and if the ED transition condition is satisfied, control of navigation notification over the period until the end of the advantageous section While performing processing (Su29) to shift to the ED state where is performed, if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is not set, or that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1 If it is (Su17), the process of determining whether the ED shift condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28) and the process of shifting to the ED state (Su29) are not performed. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, or if the game state is a game state other than RT1, the ED shift condition is established. Since the determination of whether or not is not performed and the processing for shifting to the ED state is not performed, it is possible to encourage the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1. can.

[Regarding timer interrupt processing]
The control contents of the timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, after all front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sv1), timer interrupts are disabled (Sv2), and set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c. The value of the voltage drop state counter that is set is acquired (Sv3). Then, the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is referred to (Sv4), and it is determined whether or not the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When the voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether or not the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6), and the voltage drop state counter reaches the upper limit. If the value has been reached, power-off processing (main) is performed (Sv7).

In the power-off process, all the front registers and back registers are exchanged, and the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in a predetermined order in the game stack area of the game RAM area, thereby saving the stack pointer. The current address of the game stack area indicated by SP is saved by storing it in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. It should be noted that a predetermined area of the game RAM area, including a game stack area of the game RAM area in which the main control unit 41 stores register values and a predetermined area of the game RAM area in which the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored, is backed up. It is backed up by a power source, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, as long as power is supplied by the backup power source, the memory contents of the game RAM area are preserved.

Then, among the parallel output ports provided in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal for the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized, and the output state is turned off. As a result, when medals are being paid out by the hopper unit 35, the payout of medals is preferentially stopped. After that, among the parallel output ports, the output ports 0 and 1 to which drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C and 32R are output are initialized, and when the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are under rotation control, the reels 2L, Stop the rotation of 2C and 2R.

After that, among the parallel output ports, output port 2 to which control signals for the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R and flow path switching solenoid 30 are output, control signals for the credit indicator 11, and the game auxiliary indicator 12 are output. The output ports 4 and 5 for output, the output ports 6 and 7 for outputting test signals, and the output ports 8 and 9 for transmitting commands to the sub-controller 91 are sequentially initialized to output control signals to various switches. etc. output is stopped.

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9, the breakdown diagnosis data (5A(H) in this embodiment) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. clear. Then, new parity adjustment data of the RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the parity adjustment data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and access to the RAM 41c is performed. is set to prohibited, and loop processing is entered.

The loop processing waits while monitoring the output status of the voltage drop signal. In this state, when the voltage drop signal is no longer input, the recovery of the voltage is determined, and the program is started from the startup process (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is being input, the operation is stopped internally.

By the above processing, when the power supply of AC100V is stopped, the power interruption process (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power interruption is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the game Since the content of the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area is also held by the supply of the backup power, in the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, , it is possible to return to the control state before the power failure. Furthermore, it is possible to identify whether the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power failure.

If it is determined in step Sv5 of the timer interrupt processing that the voltage drop signal has not been input, and if it is determined in step Sv6 that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step Sv8, and the voltage Update the degraded state counter. When proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop counter, while when proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the voltage Update the degraded state counter to add 1.

Then, the detected states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing is performed to generate input data, fixed data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) (Sv9). After that, using the above-mentioned second saving instruction, the value of the flag register in which the calculation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order. After that (Sv10), time monitoring update processing included in the non-game program is performed (Sv11). After that, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the value of the flag register saved in the game stack area in step Sv10 is sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and set in the flag register. Then, the flag register is restored to the state before the time monitoring update process is performed (Sv12).

In the time monitoring update process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is read from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program, and It is stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and saved. After that, using the LD instruction, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program is read from a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Thus, the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program. Then, using the above-described first save instruction, the values of all the registers (accumulator registers, flag registers, general-purpose registers, index registers, interrupt registers, refresh registers, program counters, etc.) provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag registers are stored in a predetermined order in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program is called from the game program, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the game program to that for the non-game program. The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the game program, the state of the register saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the time monitoring update process is determined by the game program. may differ from the state of the registers when you call

After that, sensor monitoring processing for detecting abnormalities in the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and payout sensor 34c, test signal output processing for outputting test signals generated in relation to game results, and various timers used by non-game programs are updated. A timer update process and a role ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the role ratio monitor are sequentially performed. In addition, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data capable of specifying the type of detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is designed to be set.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that were saved in the non-game stack area when the time monitoring update process was started are saved in the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving. , and set in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process was started. After that, using the LD instruction described above, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the time monitoring update process is started and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the time monitoring update process was started, and the time monitoring update process is terminated. In order to end the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program and return to the game program, the stack pointer When changing SP from non-game program to game program, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and before and after the execution of the LD instruction, the flag register Conditions may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring update process ends may differ from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring update process is started.

After restoring the flag register in step Sv12, the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update processing in step Sv11 is referred to (Sv13), and the sensor set by the time monitoring update processing in this timer interrupt A logical sum of the error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). Then, a sensor error flag, which is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can specify whether or not an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected, is calculated in step Sv14. Update based on disjunction. By performing steps Sv13 to Sv15, if it is specified that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data, it is determined whether the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that an abnormality has been detected. The sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality is detected regardless of whether the abnormality is detected. On the other hand, when it is specified that no abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. That is, when it is specified that an abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data, the content of the sensor error reference data is reflected in the sensor error flag, and the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. If it is specified that the error has not occurred or that the abnormality has been resolved, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected in the sensor error flag.

After updating the sensor error flag in step Sv15, a random value update process is performed to update the random value in the random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 (Sv16). Clear the watchdog timer (WDT) register (Sv17). Thereafter, the value of the branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the processing included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and updated by adding a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment), The updated value is set as the branch counter value in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating the branch counter, when the branch counter is 0 to 2, 1 is added, and when the branch counter is 3, it is initialized and reset to 0. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter loops in the order of 0→1→2→3→0 . . . each time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referenced in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). Control will be branched.

After updating the branch counter in step Sv18, it is determined whether or not the branch counter is 4 (Sv19). Counter update processing (Sv20) for updating various predetermined timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start valid LED 18, section display LED 19, replaying LED 20, etc.) is controlled to set a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state of each processing such as the main processing (Sv21 )I do.

When it is determined in step Sv19 that the branching counter is not 4, and after the LED dynamic display processing is performed in step Sv21, a medal insertion signal indicating that medals have been inserted and medals are paid out of the external output signals. A medal insertion payout signal transmission process (Sv22) for transmitting to the outside of the slot machine 1, a security signal (door open signal, setting change signal , insertion error signal, payout error signal) are updated, security signal transmission processing (Sv24) to be transmitted to the outside of the slot machine 1, and various commands such as the door command and operation end command set in the command queue. A command transmission process (Sv25) for transmitting, etc. is sequentially performed.

After that, the branch counter is referenced to determine whether or not the branch counter is 2. If the branch counter is 2, if there is an abnormality related to the reel (reel error), Based on whether or not the set reel error flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not there is a reel error (Sv26). Then, if there is no reel error, reel control processing is performed to control the rotation and stop of the reels by setting the excitation patterns of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R according to the progress of the game (Sv27). .

Then, when it is determined that the branching timer is not 2 in step Sv25, when it is determined that there is a reel error in step Sv26, and when the reel control processing in step Sv27 ends, setting is made by the reel control processing. A reel motor drive signal output process ( Sv29), a process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, a process of updating the lighting state of the left/middle/right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, a process of setting the advantageous section signal to the OFF state, and the like. After sequentially performing the port output update processing (Sv30), the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and a predetermined value indicating the ON state is set in the output buffer (in this embodiment, 1) is set (Sv31). In addition, when the advantageous period flag is set by the ball output control process of the main process, the output buffer of the advantageous period signal is set to a predetermined value (this embodiment 1) is set.

In step Sv31, if it is determined that a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1) indicating an ON state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval, controlling the signal during the advantageous interval to the ON state, After starting to output the signal during the advantageous interval to the test device (Sv32), the process proceeds to step Sv33. On the other hand, in step Sv31, an initial value (0 in this embodiment) indicating the OFF state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section, and a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment) indicating the ON state is set. If it is determined that it is not set, the process of step Sv32 is not performed, and the process proceeds to step Sv33.

In step Sv33, all front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sv33), timer interrupts are enabled (Sv34), the timer interrupt processing (main) is terminated, and the timer interrupt processing (main ) is started.

Thus, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the counter update process (Sv20) for updating a plurality of timer values used in the specific process (game program) including the one game time management timer value, and the special process ( A time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating the timer value used in the non-game program) is performed separately. This prevents the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process from being mixed with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the time monitoring update process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter update process of updating the timer value for one game time management. As a result, updating of the timer value for managing one game time is started after the output of the test signal is started, so that the time interval at which the test signal is output can be surely set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. .

[Regarding time monitoring update processing]
The control contents of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 79. FIG. The time monitoring update process is included in the non-game program, and is a subroutine called by the timer interrupt process (main) included in the game program. Further, the time monitoring update process sequentially calls the sensor monitoring process, the test signal output process, the medal passing time timer update process, and the display monitor output data selection process included in the non-game program.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the time monitoring update process, first, using the aforementioned LD instruction, the value of the current address of the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is changed to It is stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area and saved (Sv201). After that, using the LD instruction, a predetermined value of the non-game stack area as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area as an address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-game program) By setting the current value), the stack pointer SP is set for the non-game program (Sv202). Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. Save by storing (Sv203). Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process (Sv204), which is included in the non-game program and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, is connected to the slot machine 1. Test signal output processing (Sv205) for outputting a test signal to the testing device, Medal passage time timer update processing (Sv206) for updating the timer that counts the passing time of medals within the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, Role ratio A role ratio monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting role ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

After performing the role ratio monitor display data selection process in step Sv207, the value of the register stored in the non-game stack area and saved in step Sv203 is returned to By sequentially reading from the non-game stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state when the time monitoring update process was started (Sv208). After that, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP for the game program saved in the predetermined area of the non-game RAM area in the step of Sv201 and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, the time The stack pointer SP is restored to the state when the monitor update process was started (Sv209), the time monitor update process is terminated, and the caller timer interrupt process (main) is returned to.

Thus, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection process) in accordance with the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program. In this case, by calling the time monitoring update process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the game program, various processes of the time monitoring update process are performed, and by completing each process, the caller timer interrupt processing (main).

In addition, in the time monitoring update process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) which is the game program, first, the stack pointer SP and the register are saved, then the sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, A plurality of processing such as medal passing time timer update processing, role ratio monitor display data selection processing, etc. are performed. After all these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and registers that were saved when called from the game program are restored, and the timer interrupt process (main) of the calling source is returned to. In such a configuration, that is, in the non-game program called by one call process from the game program, a plurality of processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection processing, etc.), the process of saving the stack pointer SP and the register and the process of restoring them are not performed for each of a plurality of processes performed in the non-game program, and can be collectively processed once.

Further, when calling a non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing) from a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the calculation result is stored in the register of the main control unit 41 on the game program side. After saving the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the game RAM area, the non-game program is called, and after the non-game program is terminated, it is saved before calling the non-game program. By sequentially reading the value of the flag register from the game stack area and setting it in the corresponding flag register, the flag register is restored to the state before calling the non-game program. As a result, by calling the non-game program, the game program uses the flag register to perform calculations, and even if the non-game program changes the value of the flag register, when returning to the game program Then, the value of the flag register is returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing can be performed.

Also, in a non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by a game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), first, the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program The value of the current address of the indicated game stack area is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area. After performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when terminating the non-game program, the value of the stack pointer SP saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area when the non-game program is started is set in the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses the stack pointer SP in the non-game program to change the stack pointer SP, when the non-game program ends, the With the stack pointer SP returned to the state, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

In addition, in the non-game program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by the game program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-game RAM It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the area. Then, after performing a predetermined process according to the non-game program, when terminating the non-game program, the value of the register stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game program was started are sequentially read out from the non-game stack area and set in the corresponding registers, thereby returning all registers to the state when the non-game program was started. As a result, even if the non-game program uses a register to perform various processes in the non-game program and changes the value of the register, when the non-game program ends, the non-game program It is possible to return to the calling game program in a state in which the values of all registers are returned to the state when the is started.

Further, in the non-game program, when called by the game program, the values of all the registers provided in the main control unit 41 are saved by storing them in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and the non-game program By setting the value of the register that was stored and saved in the non-game stack area to the corresponding register when terminating the program, all registers are restored to the state when the non-game program was started. It's becoming Register values used by the game program are stored and saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area, and are returned from the non-game stack area to the registers, so that all register values are stored in the game stack area. Since it is not necessary to provide an area for saving, and only an area for saving the value of the flag register may be provided in the game stack area, the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

In addition, while the main control unit 41 requires a 1-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the value of the flag register, a 2-byte program capacity is required for an instruction for the main control unit 41 to save the values of all registers. do. Then, when calling the non-game program from the game program, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is saved in the game stack area of the game RAM area on the game program side, and then the non-game program is called. On the calling and non-game program side, the values of all registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area. Capacity can be reduced.

[Sensor monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 74, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor refers to the branch counter of the timer interrupt process (main) which is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether or not it is the timing (timing when the branch timer is 0) to perform processing related to the payout sensor for monitoring whether or not there is an abnormality in the detection states of 34c and 34d (Sz101). Then, when it is time to perform the processing related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz102. On the other hand, if it is not the timing for processing regarding the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz117 to perform processing regarding the insertion sensor for monitoring whether or not there is an abnormality in the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c.

When it is determined that it is time to perform processing related to the payout sensor in the step of Sz101, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c in order to transmit the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring process to the game program Clear the reference data (Sz102). Then, referring to the error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and that can specify whether or not an abnormality of the error codes E1 to E5 has occurred (Sz103), the error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether or not an E4 abnormality has occurred (Sz104).

If it is determined in step Sz104 that an error code E2, E3, or E4 has occurred, the process proceeds to step Sz117. If it is determined that an error code E2, E3, or E4 has not occurred, , after referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are stored (Sz105), a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the hopper unit 35 pays out medals. It is determined whether or not a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sz106).

If it is determined in step Sz106 that the during-payout flag is set, it is determined whether one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state based on the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz107), and if one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON, a predetermined area of the port input buffer storing the edge data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is referred to (Sz108), and the edge It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

Then, when it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON and edge data is set in step Sz107, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 When it begins to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 finishes passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-game RAM of the RAM 41c. A sensor check timer 1 set in a predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and timing of passage time of a new medal is started. If it is determined that the edge data is not set in step Sz109, and after the sensor check timer 1 is initialized in step Sz110, the sensor check timer 1 is updated by adding 1 (Sz111).

The sensor check timer 1 is set for the time from when the medals start to pass through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until it finishes passing, and from the time when the medals finish passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. A timer for counting the time until the next medal starts passing. By being updated in step Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 is set to the payout sensor during the period in which the payout flag is set, that is, during the period in which the hopper unit 35 is controlling the payout of medals. It is updated every time the processing is performed (every four timer interrupt processing (main), 2.24 milliseconds).

If one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is ON in step Sz107 and if it is determined that the edge data is not set in step Sz109, that is, the medal payout control is executed to control the number of medals paid out from the hopper unit 35. If the medal is passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c, 34d, or if it is a period between when one medal is paid out and when the next medal is paid out during payout control, the sensor The check timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz111).

Then, after updating the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz111, it is determined whether or not the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds a predetermined maximum monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Determine (Sz112).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required for medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 to start passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d until they finish passing. After the medals paid out by the hopper unit 35 have passed through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, the next medal is paid out by the hopper unit 35 and passes through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. It is set to the longer time or more of the time required for it to start running. As a result, during the period in which the payout control for paying out medals is being performed, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d can continue in the ON state and the payout sensors 34c and 34d It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time period during which the detection state of is allowed to continue in the OFF state has passed.

When it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 has exceeded the maximum value of the monitoring time, sensor error reference data (payment sensor ) is set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), the timing of the passing time of a new medal is started, and Sz114 The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of the sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum monitoring time, the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117. Proceed to step .

Also, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is set, and if it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the processing of steps Sz108 to Sz113 is performed. By proceeding to step Sz114 without doing so, the sensor error reference data is maintained in a state cleared in step Sz102, proceeding to step Sz114, initializing the sensor check timer 1 and setting it to 0, The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117.

If it is determined in step Sz106 that the during-payout flag is not set, both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the fixed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz116), and if both the payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz107. When it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the payout flag is not set, and if it is determined in step Sz116 that both of the payout sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, proceed to step Sz113, After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), proceed to step Sz117.

By performing the processing of steps Sz11 to Sz116 above, processing relating to the payout sensor for determining whether or not there is an abnormality relating to the payout of medals based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is carried out. After the processing is performed, the processing after step Sz117 is performed, so that the processing regarding the insertion sensor is performed following the processing regarding the payout sensor.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the processing relating to the insertion sensor in the sensor monitoring processing, first, whether or not a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. is determined (Sz117), and if the medal maintenance permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the calling time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz117 that the medal maintenance permission flag is set, then the predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c (hereinafter referred to as medal It is determined whether or not a medal sensor error is occurring based on whether or not a sensor error flag capable of identifying whether or not a sensor error has been detected is set (Sz119). Then, if the medal sensor error is occurring, the sensor monitoring process is ended, and the time monitoring update process of the calling source is returned to.

If it is determined that there is no medal sensor error in step Sz119, the current state of inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (in FIG. 75, inserted medal sensors 1, 2, and 3) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area is determined. The data is referred to (Sz120), and it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sz121).

If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is saved in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122), and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is saved. By referring to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when medals start to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when they finish passing. By being updated in step Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 is set at the timing when the sensor monitoring process is performed (every timer interrupt process (main)) during the period when the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. 0.56 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz123 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (in FIG. 31, inserted medal sensors 2 and 3) referred to in step Sz120 are in the ON state. is determined (Sz124), and if the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state, the medal inserted signal is not referred to based on the medal inserted signal ignoring timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the medal inserted signal processing. It is determined whether or not it is within the signal ignoring time (in this embodiment, within 504 milliseconds after the medal flow path switching control by the flow path switching solenoid 30 is started) (Sz125), and the medal insertion signal is ignored. If it is not within the time, the sensor check timer 2 is updated by adding one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz126), and the value of the sensor check timer 2 after the addition is the inserted medal sensor. It is determined whether or not the maximum value (99.68 m in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for the medal to pass normally through the detection range 31a is exceeded (Sz127). The normal passing time range includes the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving passage 29b of the medal selector 29, and the insertion in the medal receiving passage 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in the present embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, and if it is determined in step Sz124 that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state, the inserted medal After setting the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is started. It is initialized and set to 0 (Sz129) to start counting the passing time of a new medal. Then, the sensor monitoring process is terminated and the caller's time monitoring update process is returned to.

If it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, and if it is determined in step Sz126 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the medal insertion signal ignoring time based on the medal insertion signal ignoring timer, then the sensor is detected in step Sz127. When it is determined that the value of the check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. Return to the caller's time monitoring update process.

In this way, in the sensor monitoring process, the process of steps Sz101 to Sz116 is performed, and the process related to the payout sensor is performed. By performing the processing of steps Sz117 to Sz130, it is determined based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c whether or not there is an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. It's like

Further, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing a process related to the payout sensor, after determining whether or not an abnormality related to the payout of medals has occurred, regardless of the determination result, the process related to the insertion sensor is continuously performed, and the medals are monitored. It is determined whether or not there is an abnormality related to the input of the

[Regarding test signal output processing]
The test signal output processing performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the sensor monitoring process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs test signal processing.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the test signal output process, first, the one-game-time management timer set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by the main process is referred to (Sz201), and the one-game-time management timer is set. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, it is a value when starting time counting by the timer for one game time management and corresponds to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). It should be noted that if step Sb43 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main), which is the caller of the time monitoring update process that called the test signal output process, is performed, one game time management A timer value is set to a predetermined value.

When it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is the initial value, the branch counter set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c by timer interrupt processing (main) is referred to (Sz203), When the branch counter is a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), a predetermined value (output to be output to the test apparatus) set in the test signal output timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c It is a value corresponding to the number of data, and in this embodiment, the time ((22.4 milliseconds) x the number of output data (4)) for continuing to output a test signal that can specify one output data is set. to start timing (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is not the initial value, if it is determined that the branching timer is not 3 in step Sz203, after setting the test signal output timer in step Sz204, The initial address of the output data address for specifying the predetermined area of the RAM 41c storing the output data to be output as the test signal is acquired (Sz205). It should be noted that the output data is data capable of specifying the winning status of the special role and the winning status of the general role in the internal lottery.

After that, the value of the test signal output timer is referred to (Sz206), and it is determined whether or not the test signal output timer has finished counting the predetermined time (Sz207). Then, if the test signal output timer is not 0 and the test signal output timer has not finished counting the predetermined time, it is determined whether or not the output data fixing mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixed mode is set when the output data set by the RT information output process performed in step Sb2 of the main process is output as a test signal.

If the output data fixed mode is not set, the test signal output timer is updated by subtracting one unit time (0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz209), and then in step Sz206 When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for continuing to output a test signal that can specify one output data) It is determined whether or not the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). Then, if the remainder value is 0, the process returns to step Sz205, and the processing of steps Sz205 to Sz210 is performed based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in step Sz209. On the other hand, if the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time to continue outputting a test signal that can specify one output data (22. 4 milliseconds)), add the quotient to the output data address of the initial address obtained in step Sz205 (Sz211), and proceed to step Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address, and the output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

If it is determined in step Sz208 that the output data fixed mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sz212, advances the output data address of the initial address set in step Sz206 by one address (Sz212), and The output data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

After that, the output data obtained in step Sz213 is set as the test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sz215). If it is determined in step Sz207 that the value of the test signal output timer referred to in step Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216), and the test signal is output to output port 6. Set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in step Sz215, the test signal output process is terminated and the process returns to the caller's time monitoring update process.

By such control, the main control unit 41 controls when the one game time management timer is set to the initial value and started, that is, when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started as a game, A test signal is output from the output port 6 for a predetermined period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds×4) in this embodiment).

In addition, the main control unit 41 sequentially outputs four pieces of output data as test signals that can specify the winning status of the general role and the special role in the internal lottery every predetermined time (in this embodiment, 22.4 milliseconds). It is switched to output from the output port 6 .

Next, the medal passing time timer updating process performed by the main control section 41 will be described with reference to FIG. After performing the above-described test signal output processing, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs medal passing time timer update processing.

As shown in FIG. 77, in the medal passing time timer update process, first, the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referenced by the medal sensor process included in the non-game program. It is determined whether or not the value of the medal passing time timer is 0 (Sz301).

When the value of the medal passage time timer is 0, that is, when the medal sensor processing does not measure the time for medals to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the medal passage time timer update processing is terminated. , returns to the calling time monitor update process.

On the other hand, if the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, if the medal sensor processing measures the time for medals to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. After updating by doing so (Sz302), the medal passing time timer updating process is ended, and the process returns to the time monitoring updating process of the caller.

[Display monitor output data selection processing]
Display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. After performing the medal passing time timer update processing described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs display monitor output data selection processing.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed by the main control unit 41 every 0.56 milliseconds, and is used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). This is a process of setting lighting data for the LED to be used.

As shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, in the display monitor output data selection process, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the address is displayed. The monitor selection timer value is updated by adding 1 (Sz402). After that, it is determined whether or not the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928) (Sz403), and if it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928), The display monitor selection timer value is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403). The display monitor display content vector is updated by adding 1 (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated within the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 when the value exceeds 4 by adding 1 to it.

If the display monitor display content vector is updated in step Sz405, and if it is determined in step Sz403 that the timer value for display monitor selection has not reached the upper limit value, proceed to step Sz406 and refer to the game state. (Sz406), and determines whether or not it is in the setting confirmation state (Sz407). If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is in progress, the processing of steps Sz447 to Sz463 to be described later is performed to display the display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the gaming machine information display 50. FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz407 that it is not in the setting confirmation state, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is set in the A and B registers. Read (Sz409). Then, based on the A register value and the HL register value, the address storing the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is calculated (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored at the address is calculated. Read into the DE register (Sz411).

After that, after adding 1 to the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register in step Sz409 and updating it (Sz412), the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A played game count determination flag capable of specifying whether or not the specified number of games is exceeded is read into the A register (Sz413), and the determination is made. The determination value included in the number-of-played-games determination flag is extracted to the C register (Sz414).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the prescribed number of games based on the determination value extracted to the C register (Sz415).

If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 does not exceed the prescribed number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is set. is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the timer value for display monitor selection in the HL register is divided by the calculation constant 1 in the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the DE register is cleared and 0 is set to output data that makes the display of the 7-segment display blank (non-display). Set in the DE register (Sz420) and proceed to step Sz421.

Further, when it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games, the processing proceeds to step Sz421 without performing the processing of steps Sz416 to Sz420. Further, if it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value by the calculation constant 1 is 0, the processing in step Sz420 is not performed. , Sz421.

In step Sz421, the DE register value is set as identifier display data in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 (Sz421).

After that, display data for displaying "--" on the gaming machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the top address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display vector is read in the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display vector is generated based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address where the threshold data corresponding to the value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, by referring to the role ratio monitor display valid data stored in a predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector and capable of specifying whether or not the role ratio display is valid, it is determined whether the role ratio display is valid. It is determined whether or not there is (Sz426).

If it is determined in step Sz426 that the role ratio display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446, which will be described later. Terminate the monitor output data selection process and return to the time monitor update process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz426 that the display of the winning role ratio is valid, the data stored at the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register as a threshold value (Sz427), and the display monitor role ratio The head address of the output data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address storing the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display vector is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored at that address is read into the A register (Sz430). After that, the output data of the A register and the threshold of the B register are compared, and the value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

After that, data indicating that the display mode is non-blinking is provisionally set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether or not the output data is less than the threshold based on the value of the C register (Sz433). If it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, data indicating that the display mode is blinking is provisionally set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to step Sz435. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step Sz435 without performing the processing in step Sz434. In step Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

After dividing the output data of the A register by 10 in step Sz435 and setting the quotient and remainder in the predetermined registers respectively, the start address of the display data table is set in the HL register (Sz436), and the HL register value is The display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the tens place display of the role ratio display is set (Sz437).

After that, the E register value is read into the A register (Sz438), and the display data stored at the address obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is read into the E register to display the role ratio of 1. The digit display is set (Sz439).

Thereafter, it is determined whether blinking is set based on the value of the B register (Sz440), and if it is determined that blinking is set, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). A predetermined timer reference value (in this embodiment, a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and the quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. and sets the remainder in the DE register (Sz443). After that, it is determined whether or not the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444). is set to 0 (Sz445), and the process proceeds to step Sz446.

Also, if it is determined in step Sz440 that blinking is not set based on the value of the B register, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processing in steps Sz441 to Sz445. If it is determined in step Sz444 that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the processing in step Sz445.

In the step of Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as a role ratio display (Sz446). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step Sz447, sets 0 as display data (DE register value) (Sz447), displays the DE register value as an identifier, It is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display device 50 as the role ratio display (Sz448, Sz449).

After that, after reading the display monitor selection timer value into the HL register (Sz450), the HL register value is corrected (Sz451), and the calculation constant 2 registered in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register by the calculation constant 2 of the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the calculation constant 3 registered in advance in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (quotient value set in step Sz453) is divided by the calculation constant 3 of the BC register. The resulting quotient is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 for displaying the role ratio is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correct (Sz458). Thereafter, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the game machine information display 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

Thereafter, the output data of the display test pattern stored at the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output of the gaming machine information display device 50 for displaying the role ratio specified by the HL register value. The A register value is stored in the buffer (Sz463). After that, the display monitor output data selection process is terminated, and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

[Regarding counter update processing]
The counter update processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. The counter update process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the timer interrupt process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the counter updating process, first, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which a medal insertion signal ignoring timer for counting the medal insertion signal ignoring time for which the medal insertion signal is not referred by the above-described medal insertion signal processing is set is set. An address is set in the HL register (Sv301). Then, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being measured. is determined (Sv302), and if it is determined that the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is not 0 and the medal insertion signal ignoring time is being clocked, the medal insertion signal ignoring timer value is updated by subtracting 1 ( Sv303).

After that, as described above, the address of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the one game time management timer for measuring the minimum time of one game is set is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether or not the one game time management timer value is 0, that is, whether or not the minimum time for one game is being counted. (Sv305), and if it is determined that the one-game-time management timer is not 0 and that the minimum time for one game is being measured, the one-game-time management timer value is updated by subtracting 1. (Sv306). After that, the counter update process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Thus, in the counter update process, the medal insertion signal ignoring counter, which is a counter that counts the time (the medal insertion signal ignoring time, the minimum time for one game, etc.) managed by the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) The timer and one game time management timer are updated. On the other hand, a medal passing time timer that measures time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by non-game programs (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.), The sensor check timer 1, sensor check timer 2, and test signal output timer are not updated in the counter update process included in the game program, and the various processes included in the non-game program (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process , timer update processing).

[Regarding the display mode of the game machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 81, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a 7-segment display is provided at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged. The gaming machine information display device 50 can visually recognize display contents from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. A store clerk or the like can recognize information such as the rate of advantageous section in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50 .

Therefore, when the front door 1b is opened, the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 can be visually recognized through the board case 120a. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display contents of the gaming machine information display device 50 is not hindered. More specifically, the position on the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided with general parts such as reels provided in the slot machine 1, other substrates, etc., and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is not provided. Wiring that connects electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. In addition, in the board case 120a that houses the game control board 40 on which the game machine information display 50 is mounted, an entry section for entering the sealing seal and the opening person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40 are provided. etc., an affixing portion to which the label is affixed, a display portion to which the information is printed or engraved, a heat dissipation hole, parts such as a fan for heat dissipation, etc. of the game machine information display device 50 It is provided to avoid the position on the display side.

In addition, the substrate case 120a is designed to be sealed after housing the game control substrate 40. In the sealed state, the sealing cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. It's becoming As a method of sealing, there are a method of sealing a sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of the case, and a method of attaching a sealing seal that leaves a peeled mark. As a result, the connection line connecting the game machine information display 50 and the game control board 40 is broken, and the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. It is possible to prevent tampering such as making it impossible to display the contents or sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display device 50 to hinder visibility.

As shown in FIG. 82, the main control unit 41 controls the ratio of the advantageous interval over the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous interval to the total number of cumulative games, the consecutive combination payout ratio over the past 6000 games, and the bonus payout ratio over the past 6000 games. , the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the instructed bonus bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50. Control the display.

The advantageous interval ratio in the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to the advantageous interval related to AT in the past 6000 games. The AT-related advantageous interval is the period from when the AT wins in the AT non-win state to when all control of the AT associated with the winning AT ends and the AT shifts to non-AT. The ratio of the advantageous interval to the total cumulative number of games is the cumulative number of games since the data in the RAM 41c was initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. percentage of the number. The consecutive payout ratio for the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out during the controlled BB over the past 6000 games in the total number of medals paid out, which is the total number of medals paid out for the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the combined payout number, which is the cumulative total. Accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games is the ratio of the total number of medals paid out during the controlled RB during the past 6000 games to the total number of payouts for the past 6000 games. be. The instructed accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games is the number of accessories paid out for the past 6000 games as a percentage of the total number of payouts for the past 6000 games, and the payout ratio for games with navigation notifications for the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of instructed payouts obtained by totaling the number of medals. The ratio of consecutive payouts to the total cumulative number of payouts is the sum of the number of medals paid out since the data in the RAM 41c was initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason. It is the ratio of the number of payouts for combined combination from the time the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present. The ratio of payouts to the total cumulative number of payouts is the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of cumulative payouts from the time of factory shipment or the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present. The instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is the ratio of the instructed payout number to the total cumulative payout number from the time of factory shipment or the initialization of the data in the RAM 41c for some reason to the present.

In this embodiment, only the RB and the BB that continuously operate the RB are installed as bonuses. It may be configured to install a CT in which the is limited, or a CB in which the CT operates continuously. It is reflected in the number of payouts, and when CB is mounted, the number of medals paid out during CB is reflected in the combined payout ratio.

The main control unit 41 controls the ratio of the advantageous section for the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total number of cumulative games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the period until the power supply is stopped after the power is turned on. ratio of bonus payouts over the past 6000 games, ratio of consecutive bonus payouts to total cumulative payouts, ratio of bonus payouts to total cumulative payouts, ratio of instructed bonus payouts to total cumulative payouts are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 in the display order shown in FIG.

At this time, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 indicate the currently displayed content (for example, if the advantageous section ratio of the past 6000 games in display order 1 is displayed, " 1A”) is displayed. The abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is that the display content of the least significant digit of the two digits displayed is a character other than a number (in this embodiment, alphabetic characters "A", "C", and "F"). When the abbreviations, ratios, and ratios are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, the numeric portions of the abbreviations are not adjacent to the ratios and ratios. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display contents of the ratio or ratio due to the abbreviated numerical part and the ratio or ratio being adjacent to each other.

At this time, on the gaming machine information display 50, the ratio to be currently displayed corresponding to the above-mentioned abbreviation, the ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as data to be displayed) is displayed in the lower two digits. Data are also displayed in %. As data displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, 0 to 99% are displayed. For example, when the data to be displayed is one digit, the upper digit of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is displayed as "0". , the value of the data to be displayed in the lower digits (for example, when displaying 5%, "05" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). Also, when the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50 "15" is displayed in the last two digits of ). Thus, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are used to display the data. By displaying the ratio, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding of the display contents of the ratio. In addition, by displaying the data to be displayed using both the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 regardless of whether it is one digit or two digits, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed. If one of the data is displayed on the digit and, for example, no data is displayed on one of the displays of the lower two digits, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

It should be noted that the abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed is changed so that the display content of the highest digit of the two digits to be displayed is a character other than a number (for example, "A1"). 50, the abbreviation is displayed in the lower two digits, and the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 display the data to be displayed (for example, the advantageous interval ratio for the past 6000 games). It is possible to prevent misunderstanding of display contents of ratios and ratios due to adjoining parts and ratios and ratios.

In addition, regardless of which of the lower two digits or the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 displays the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed, the two digits for displaying the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed. Even with a configuration in which the colors of the two digits are different, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the display contents of the ratios and ratios due to the abbreviated numerical portions and the ratios and ratios being adjacent to each other.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the advantageous zone ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, the instructed bonus bonus payout ratio, the consecutive bonus payout ratio, the bonus bonus payout ratio, and the instructed bonus bonus payout ratio. , in the display order shown in FIG. 82, the game progresses and these values are updated to new values within one period until these displays are completed. Even if it can be done, it restricts updating to the new value and wraps the display with the original value. More specifically, if the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays are completed, new values are calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display content on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is It is also possible to make a cycle using the original values, set a new value in the output buffer after the cycle of display is completed, and then display with the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until the end of one cycle, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted from performing calculations for obtaining new values. , and when one cycle of display is completed, calculation for obtaining a new value may be performed, and then the display on the game machine information display 50 may be performed using the new value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent display contents such as advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed during the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 are completed.

In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (for example, normal If it is always lit, the advantageous section ratio is displayed by blinking lighting, etc.). In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (e.g., If it is normally always lit, the combined payout ratio is displayed by flashing lighting, etc.). In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display mode (e.g., If normal lighting is always on, flashing lighting, etc.) will be used to display the payout ratio of the accessory. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display than usual when the instructed accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games or the instructed accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 80%). The instructed accessory payout ratio is displayed in a manner (for example, blinking lighting if normal lighting is always on).

In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, consecutive payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instructed accessory payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, it is displayed in a display mode different from usual, and gambling is high. It is possible to warn that it may be controlled by the state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 calculates the advantageous interval ratio for the past 6000 games, the consecutive combination payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the role payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the commanded role payout ratio for the past 6000 games. When displaying on the machine information display 50, if the number of games played in the past has not reached 6000 games, for example, the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is blinked, etc. By controlling to a different display mode, it is possible to recognize that the tally has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased. there is

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display device 50 to display the advantageous interval ratio with respect to the total number of games played, the main control unit 41 controls the prescribed number of games in which the advantageous interval ratio converges approximately to the design value of the slot machine. (For example, 175,000 games) is not reached, for example, by blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display device 50, by controlling the display mode different from usual, the advantageous section ratio It is possible to recognize that the number of games has not reached the specified number of games, which generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and that the displayed ratio and ratio may be biased. there is

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display device 50 to display the combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts, the number of past games and the combination payout ratio generally converge to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 17,500 games) has not been reached, for example, the upper two digits of the display of the gaming machine information display 50 are blinked. It is possible to recognize that the role payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, so that the displayed ratio and ratio may be biased. It has become.

Further, when the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display device 50 to display the character product payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts, the number of past games and the character product payout ratio generally converge to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 6000 games) has not been reached, for example, by controlling a display mode different from usual, such as blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the role can be changed. It is possible to recognize that the item payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games where it generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it is possible to recognize the possibility that the displayed ratio and ratio are biased. It has become.

Further, when the main control unit 41 displays the instructed accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number on the gaming machine information display device 50, the number of past games and the instructed accessory payout ratio are approximately the design value of the slot machine. When the specified number of games (for example, 175,000 games) converging to . By doing so, it is possible to recognize that the instructed accessory payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and the displayed ratio and ratio are biased. Possibilities are recognizable.

The main control unit 41 displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 before reaching the 6000th game, and after reaching the 6000th game, displays the gaming machine information. In the state where the ratio to be displayed in the lower two digits of the machine 50 is displayed, that is, after reaching 6000 games, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display mode after 6000 games. With such a configuration, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are displayed (for example, "1A" ) does not reach 6000 games, and it can be recognized that the displayed percentages and ratios may be biased. In addition, when the number of games has not reached 6000, "00" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, so that the gaming machine information is always displayed when the number of games has not reached 6000. Data is displayed in the lower two digits of the display 50. For example, when data is not displayed in one of the displays of the lower two digits, the abnormality of the display can be recognized.

In addition, the main control unit 41 controls the ratio of the advantageous section over the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total number of games played, the ratio of consecutive combination payouts over the past 6000 games, the payout ratio of the past 6000 games, the payout ratio of the past 6000 games, Whether the data used to calculate the instructed bonus payout ratio, the combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the instructed bonus payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are normal If it is determined to be abnormal (if the number of accessories paid out, the number of consecutive payouts, or the number of advantageous section payouts is larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (01 repetition, etc.) If there is, etc.), the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data are initialized, and the gaming machine information display 50 is caused to indicate that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF"), This fact is notified, and the user can recognize that the calculation of these data is not performed normally.

In addition, when initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games If at least one of them is determined to be abnormal, all of the data may be initialized, or only a portion of the data may be initialized. When at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the role payout ratio, and the commanded role payout ratio is determined to be abnormal, the data related to all of these are initialized. Alternatively, only part of the data may be initialized. Also, when it is determined that a part of the data for the past 6000 games is abnormal, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is initialized, or conversely, part of the data for the total cumulative number of games is initialized. All of the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized when an abnormality is determined in the above.

In addition, it determines whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous interval ratio, the consecutive payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the instructed bonus payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal or not. If it is determined, it is notified to that effect, and then a predetermined operation (for example, switches such as the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and the setting key switch 37 are operated in a predetermined procedure. ) to initialize the data.

In addition, in reporting that an abnormality has been detected, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may be caused to display (for example, "FFFF") that an abnormality has been detected to notify that effect. Alternatively, when an abnormality is determined, a command that can specify the fact is transmitted to the sub-controller 91, and the liquid crystal display 51 or the like on the sub-controller 91 side notifies that the abnormality has been determined. You can do it.

In addition, the main control unit 41 determines the period from the start of data collection until reaching 6000 games, that is, the ratio of the advantageous section for the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive period for the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, role payout ratio over the past 6000 games, commanded role payout ratio over the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, role payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, total cumulative payouts In the period in which the data for calculating the instructed accessory payout ratio etc. is insufficient, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after 6000 games since the start of data collection , and it is possible to recognize that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient for the period.

In this embodiment, in the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped, the ratio of the advantageous interval for the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous interval to the total number of games played, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the past 6000 Accessory payout ratio between games, instructed accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, accessory payout ratio to total cumulative payouts, instructed accessory payouts to total cumulative payouts The ratio is switched and displayed every predetermined period. ) is detected, or displayed when the game is not in progress, or displayed while settings are being changed or checked, or set to be displayed for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. may be displayed only. In addition, the display content may be switched each time a predetermined operation is performed instead of automatically switching every predetermined period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game machine information is determined to be abnormal in the data used to calculate the display content of the game machine information display device 50 or the period in which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient. Although it is configured to be notified using the display 50, it is also possible to transmit a command that can be specified to that effect to the sub-controller 91 and make it possible to confirm with the display or effect device controlled by the sub-controller 91. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of the advantageous interval over the past 6000 games, the ratio of the advantageous interval to the total number of cumulative games, the ratio of consecutive payouts over the past 6000 games, the bonus payout ratio over the past 6000 games, The instructed accessory payout ratio, the combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the instructed accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50. In addition to these displays, if the RAM 41c has been initialized due to a setting change, or if disconnection of wiring provided in the slot machine 1 (backup power supply wiring, etc.) has been detected, that fact is displayed. The recognizable content may be displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50 .

In particular, if the settings are changed during the bonus, during the advantageous section, or during the carryover of the bonus, the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or if the bonus during carryover is cleared, the game will be regulated while the bonus is carried over. More than a number of times, or an operation to intentionally end an advantageous section (for example, in RT2 and RT3 during AT, intentionally RT1 transition replay or SB winning, or stopping a specific symbol) When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when the game state is intentionally shifted from a relatively advantageous game state to a disadvantageous game state for the player, etc.), and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected. When the possibility of not being properly connected is detected due to the occurrence of such a situation, that effect is reported in a identifiable manner. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that there is a possibility of unauthorized operation not to display correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. can be done.

In addition, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total cumulative data as described later, when the total cumulative data etc. is initialized, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility of illegal operation so that the correct information such as the combined payout ratio, the instructed bonus payout ratio, etc. is not displayed. It is possible to recognize that the total cumulative data has been initialized by the process of avoiding the above, separately from the initialization by an illegal operation for preventing the display of correct information such as the ratio of the advantageous section.

In addition, as described above, if there is a possibility that the correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. is not displayed, that fact. is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side. By operating such switches in a predetermined procedure, connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories are sent to the main control unit 41 side It can be confirmed by a provided display (e.g. gaming machine information display 50, etc.), a display provided on the sub-controller 91 side (e.g., liquid crystal display 51, etc.), an external display of the slot machine 1, or the like. You can do it.

In addition, setting changes, disconnection detection, connection failure of the game machine information display 50, advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. As mentioned above, there is a possibility that the correct information will not be displayed, such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combined payout ratio, the instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. The possibility may be confirmed by a display or effect device controlled by the sub-controller 91 . In addition, during the bonus, during the advantageous section, or during the carryover of the bonus, the setting is changed and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, or the bonus during the carryover is cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records the history of the detection of the possibility of an illegal operation so that the correct information such as the combined payout ratio, the instructed bonus payout ratio, etc. is not displayed, and the predetermined operation is performed. You may enable it to confirm these histories by .

[Regarding the display test pattern of the game machine information display]
In the display monitor output data selection process, the processes of Sz447 to Sz463 are performed, so that the display based on the display test pattern is sequentially performed on the gaming machine information display device 50. As shown in FIG. Each segment from the 1st segment to the 8th segment of the 7-segment display 50a constituting the game machine information display 50 is arranged in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, the 1st segment → the 2nd segment → the 3rd segment → the 4th segment → 5th segment → 6th segment → 7th segment → 8th segment → 1st segment . . . ). By sequentially controlling the lighting of each segment, it is possible to visually check whether the gaming machine information display 50 is out of order, for example, whether there is a segment that is not lit.

[Regarding section display LED lighting notification]
84 and 85, a description will be given of the section display LED lighting notification performed by the sub-controller 91. FIG.

As described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to light up when starting control of the AT after controlling to the advantageous section, and performs section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section. Is possible. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the interval display is being performed, and the power supply is resumed according to the normal procedure, the main control unit 41 performs the interval display. It is designed to return to the state where it is.

Further, after controlling the advantageous section, the main control section 41 sends to the sub-control section 91 a command capable of specifying that section display is to be performed when section display is started accompanying the start of AT control. to send. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and the state before the power supply is stopped is restored, when the interval display is to be resumed, the sub-controller 91 sends a command specifying that the interval display is to be performed. Send to

On the other hand, when the sub-controller 91 detects that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub-controller 91 changes the time specified based on the RTC (real time clock) provided in the sub-controller 91 to the sub-controller. 91 is stored in the storage means. Further, when it is specified that the main control section 41 side will display the section based on the command from the main control section 41 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the RTC is referred to. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply is stopped, and the slot machine 1 is transferred to the slot machine 1 over the specified time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am). It is determined whether or not the power supply has been restarted. Then, when it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 has resumed over a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 am), the fact that the section display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side. Using the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 57, the section display LED lighting notification is performed.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the section display LED lighting notification, a notification image (indicating that the section display LED 19 is in the lighting state) is displayed to notify that the section display LED 19 is being controlled to be in the lighting state by the main control unit 41. The liquid crystal display 51 displays an image A of characters (“section display LED is on”), an image B suggesting the position of the section display LED 19 in the slot machine 1, and an image C of a predetermined character, and the front surface of the slot machine 1 is displayed. By controlling a performance LED 57 installed on the player side of the door 1b to light in a lighting mode different from that during a normal game, it is notified that the lighting state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, starts the section display when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to light up. Then, it is notified that the control is being performed in the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 does not give the section display LED lighting notification. In this state, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and after that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed according to the normal procedure in which the section display LED extinguishing operation described later is not performed, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be lit. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 performs control so as to perform notification during lighting of the section display LED. Then, when a predetermined specific period elapses after the section display LED lighting notification is started, or when a game start operation is performed before the specific period elapses, the section display LED lighting section notification is performed. control to terminate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 85(b), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main control unit 41 is displaying the interval, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. Then, when the section display LED is turned off, the main control unit 41 initializes the information about the advantageous section and returns to a state in which the game can be played. As a result, the section display is not performed, and the section display LED 19 is returned to the lighting state. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform segment display, it does not transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that segment display is to be performed. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that specifies that the interval display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, so that the interval display LED is turned on. Control is performed so as to resume the control of performance without performing medium notification.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85(c), the main control unit 41 does not display the section even when the game section is controlled to be the advantageous section if the predetermined start condition is not satisfied. In this state, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, and even when the power supply is restarted after that, the interval display is not performed until the predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not perform the section display, it does not transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed. On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that specifies that the interval display is to be performed from the main control unit 41, thereby turning on the interval display LED. Control is performed so as to resume the control of performance without performing medium notification.

Although the sub-controller 91 of the present embodiment has an RTC (real-time clock) and can specify the time, the sub-controller 91 may have a configuration without the RTC. In a configuration in which the sub-controller 91 does not have an RTC, when it is specified that a section display is to be performed on the main control section 41 side when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the section display is always performed. A configuration in which notification during LED lighting is performed may also be used.

As described above, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs the section display LED lighting notification for a certain period of time after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the section display LED is turned on. The intermediate notification is terminated. As a result, when the state where the section display is performed is restored when the power supply is started, the section display LED is lit to notify that effect. can be made to recognize that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification ends after a certain period of time, the section display LED lighting section notification is continued after the amusement arcade is opened, which may cause players, etc., to feel uncomfortable. can be prevented.

After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the interval display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs the operation at a specific time outside the business hours of the amusement arcade (this implementation). For example, when the power supply starts across 4:00 a.m. and returns to the state where the section display is performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the section display has been restored. While notification is performed using the liquid crystal display 51, when the power supply is started before the specific time and the state in which the section display is performed is restored, the section display LED lighting notification is not performed. It's becoming As a result, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if power failure occurs temporarily during business hours.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is designed to end the section display LED lighting notification without waiting for the elapse of a certain period of time when the game is started while the section display LED lighting section notification is being performed. there is As a result, even if a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the section display LED lighting notification, the section display LED lighting section notification can be terminated by starting the game.

In the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment, after the power supply is stopped in the interval before the start of AT in which the interval display is not performed on the main control unit 41 side, the power supply is started and the interval display is not performed. When the state is restored, the notification during lighting of the section display LED is not performed. As a result, it is possible to make the amusement arcade clerk aware that the amusement arcade will be opened while the section is being displayed only when the state is controlled to the advantageous section and the section is being displayed. can.

[Effect 1]
As a conventional game machine, a game program area storing a game program relating to the progress of a game and a non-game program area storing a non-game program not relating to the progress of the game are separately assigned to the ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, if the non-game program is called from the game program every time the game program executes a process included in the non-game program, the game program and the non-game program are repeatedly switched. , a problem arises that the processing becomes complicated.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area for storing programs, and a main control section 41 that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of the game, and a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. A single call from the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, to the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program, allows the non-game program to perform a plurality of types of abnormality determination (determination of abnormality related to medal payout, and determination of abnormality related to medal insertion). determination of abnormality). In such a configuration, the game program area of the ROM 41b stores the game program related to the progress of the game, and the non-game program area of the ROM 41b stores the non-game program, which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which a program area and a program area are allocated separately, multiple types of abnormality judgments are performed in the non-game program by calling the non-game program from the game program once, so that the game program and the non-game program can be moved back and forth. can be reduced as much as possible.

In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, there are two kinds of errors, ie, the determination of an abnormality related to the payout of medals and the determination of an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. However, a non-game program called by one call from the game program may be configured to determine three or more types of abnormalities.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-game program is called from the game program, and the timer interrupt process included in the non-game program is changed to the time monitoring update process for determining a plurality of types of abnormalities included in the non-game program. Although it is a configuration for calling, as a game program that calls a non-game program that determines a plurality of types of abnormalities, a process included in a game program other than the timer interrupt process may be applied.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, the sensor monitoring process, which is one subroutine, is performed to determine an abnormality related to the payout of medals. In addition, there is a structure for judging an abnormality related to insertion of medals, that is, a structure for judging a plurality of types of abnormality by one subroutine. For example, in the time monitoring update process, a first subroutine for determining an abnormality related to the payout of medals and a second subroutine for determining an abnormality related to the insertion of medals are performed. may be configured to determine the abnormality. In such a configuration, program management is facilitated by setting processes for performing a plurality of types of abnormality determination as subroutines for each type of abnormality determination.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. 41, and when calling the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program, from the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, saves the register and stack pointer SP used in the game program, and When returning from the game program to the game program, the saved register and stack pointer SP are restored. With such a configuration, when calling the non-game program from the game program, it is possible to prevent the data of the registers and the stack pointer SP used in the game program from being damaged.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. A RAM 41c having a memory area capable of temporarily storing data. The RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by game programs is stored in a readable and writable manner, and a game RAM area used by non-game programs. and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data is stored in a readable manner, and by calling once a time monitoring update process included in the non-game program from a timer interrupt process included in the game program, the time monitoring update is performed. In the process, as multiple types of abnormality determination, abnormality determination regarding medal payout and abnormality determination regarding medal insertion are performed, and sensor error reference data that can specify the result of the abnormality determination is stored in the non-game RAM area, When returning from the time monitoring update process to the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process, which is the game program, refers to the sensor error reference data stored in the non-game RAM storage area without performing other processes. be. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In addition, since the sensor error reference data is referred to before performing other processing after returning to the game program from the non-game program that performs abnormality determination, other processing is performed based on the error flag in which the latest sensor error reference data is reflected. can be processed.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. and a unit 41, by calling a time monitoring update process included in a non-game program once from a timer interrupt process included in a game program, medals are paid out as multiple kinds of abnormality determinations in the time monitoring update process. In the time monitoring update process, even if an abnormality is determined by determining an abnormality related to the payout of medals, the determination of an abnormality related to the payout of medals is performed. Afterwards, it is configured to continue to determine whether there is an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. In such a configuration, in the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program called from the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, an abnormality related to the payout of medals is determined, and regardless of whether or not an abnormality is determined, other It is also possible to determine the abnormality related to the insertion of medals, which is the type of abnormality.

In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, there are two kinds of errors, ie, the determination of an abnormality related to the payout of medals and the determination of an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. However, the non-game program called by one call from the game program may be configured to determine two or more types of abnormalities. In such a configuration, the non-game program Even if one type of abnormality is determined among the plurality of types of abnormality determination performed in , another type of abnormality determination is continuously performed, so that whether any type of abnormality is determined Regardless, abnormality determination can be performed for other types of abnormality.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment calls the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program once from the timer interrupt process included in the game program. It is configured to determine an abnormality related to the payout of medals, which are media, and to determine an abnormality related to the insertion of medals. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals as game media and an abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals by calling the non-game program once.

The slot machine 1, which is a game machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area for storing programs, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. The area includes a game program area storing a game program related to the progress of the game, and a non-game program area storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, By calling a non-game program (time monitoring update process) once from a game program (timer interrupt process), the non-game program determines an abnormality (determines an abnormality related to medal payout in sensor monitoring process, determines an abnormality related to insertion of medals, etc.). determination), output control of the test signal output to the test device connected to the slot machine 1 (test signal output processing), predetermined display (credit display 11, game auxiliary It is a configuration that performs a plurality of controls including display control (role ratio monitor display data selection processing) to be displayed on the display 12). In such a configuration, the game program area of the ROM 41b stores the game program related to the progress of the game, and the non-game program area of the ROM 41b stores the non-game program, which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which the program area and are assigned separately, by calling the non-game program from the game program once, the non-game program determines the abnormality, controls the output of the test signal, and determines the role ratio based on the game history. Since a plurality of controls including display control to display on a predetermined display device are performed, it is possible to reduce the back and forth between the game program and the non-game program as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs an abnormality determination ( Determination of abnormality related to medal payout in sensor monitoring process, determination of abnormality related to insertion of medal), output control of test signal output to test device (test signal output process), role ratio based on game history Display control for display on a predetermined display (role ratio monitor display data selection process) and timer update control (medal passing time timer update process) are performed. A configuration for performing the above control may also be used, and by calling a non-game program from a game program once, for example, a configuration for performing abnormality determination and output control of a test signal, an abnormality determination and a display for displaying a role ratio on a predetermined display device A configuration for performing control, a configuration for performing output control of the test signal and display control for displaying the role ratio on a predetermined display device, a configuration for performing abnormality determination and control for updating the timer, and the like may be used. Even with these configurations, it is possible to minimize the number of comings and goings between the game program and the non-game program.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines an abnormality in the non-game program (time monitoring update process) by calling the non-game program (time monitoring update process) once from the game program (timer interrupt process), and outputs it to the test device. It is configured to perform multiple controls including output control of test signals and display control to display the role ratio, which is a state based on the history of the game, on a predetermined display device. and determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals), it may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination in the abnormality determination, or may be configured to perform a plurality of three or more types of abnormality determination. . Even with such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the number of comings and goings between the game program and the non-game program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. section 41, and an abnormality determination (abnormality related to payout of medals) is performed in the time monitoring update process by calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program once. determination, determination of abnormality related to insertion of medals), and test signal output processing, which is processing for controlling the output of the test signal output to the test device, and the time monitoring update processing. , the sensor monitoring process and the test signal output process are respectively called as subroutines. In such a configuration, since the process of determining abnormality and the process of controlling the output of an external output signal to be output to an external device are set as subroutines, program management is facilitated.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a single call from timer interrupt processing, which is a game program, to time monitoring update processing, which is a non-game program, determines an abnormality in the non-game program. The sensor monitoring process, which is the process of determining abnormalities related to the input of the game, and the test signal output process, which is the process of controlling the output of the test signal. In this configuration, the output state of the test signal is set using an output port (output port 6 in this embodiment) to which ON data and OFF data are not set, that is, an output port that is not used in game program processing. . With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal whose output state is controlled by the processing of the game program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state by the test signal output processing in the non-game program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. section 41, and an abnormality determination (abnormality related to medal payout) is performed in the time monitoring update process by calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program once. display control to display the role ratio, which is a state based on the sensor monitoring process and the game history, on the predetermined display device (credit display device 11, game auxiliary display device 12). In the time monitoring update process, the sensor monitoring process and the display monitor data selection process are called as subroutines. In such a configuration, the process of determining abnormality and the process of controlling the display of role ratios are set as subroutines, respectively, which facilitates program management.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a game program area in which game programs are stored and a non-game program area in which non-game programs are stored, and a main control unit that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. 41, and is connected to the slot machine 1 in the time monitoring update process by calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program from the timer interrupt process included in the game program once. Display control for displaying the role ratio, which is a state based on the test signal output processing and the game history, on the predetermined display device (credit display device 11, game auxiliary display device 12) In the time monitoring update process, the test signal output process and the display monitor data selection process are respectively called as subroutines. In such a configuration, since the process of controlling the output of the test signal and the process of controlling the display of the role ratio are set as subroutines, the program can be easily managed.

In a conventional game machine, a game program area storing a game program related to the progress of a game and a non-game program area storing a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately assigned to the ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, the storage area for the game data used by the game program and the storage area for the non-game data used by the non-game program are allocated to separate areas, but the non-game data is referenced in the game program. If the game program refers to the data in the non-game data area every time it executes the processing to process the data, the game program needs to access both the game data area and the non-game data area many times, which complicates the process. There is a problem of conversion.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is a game machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, a main control section 41 that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b, and data The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of the game, and a program called by the game program. The storage area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area in which game data used by the game program is stored in a readable and writable manner, and a non-game program is stored in the non-game program area. A non-game RAM area in which non-game data to be used is stored in a readable manner, and in the sensor monitoring process of the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program, as an abnormality determination, an abnormality determination regarding medal payout and medal insertion. A timer, which is a game program that performs abnormality determination, updates sensor error reference data as first abnormality data stored in the non-game RAM area based on the results of these abnormality determinations, and calls time monitoring update processing. In the interrupt process (main), when returning to the game program from the time monitoring update process, the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area is referenced, and based on the first abnormal data, data is stored in the game RAM area. The sensor error flag can be updated as the stored second abnormality data, and in the main process which is the game program executed thereafter, the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area is referred to, and the progress of the game is controlled. This is the configuration for determining whether or not to shift to the disabling error state.

In such a configuration, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, are allocated separately, and a game RAM area for storing readable and writable game data used by game programs and a non-game RAM area for readable and non-game data used by non-game programs are separately allocated. , in the game program, when returning from the non-game program to the game program, the first abnormal data stored in the non-game data area is referred to, and the game is executed based on the first abnormal data. The second abnormal data stored in the data area is updated, and further, the game program refers to the second abnormal data stored in the game data area to shift to an error state that disables the progress of the game. Since it is determined whether or not, by referring once to the first abnormal data in the non-game data area and updating the second abnormal data in the game data area, in the game program such as the main process performed after that, the abnormality determination is performed. Since it is possible to refer to the result of abnormality determination by the non-game program without accessing the first abnormality data in the non-game data area many times each time related processing is performed, the non-game data area can be accessed from the game program. The frequency of referring to can be reduced as much as possible.

When the slot machine 1 of this embodiment returns from the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program, to the timer interrupt process, which is a game program, the medal-related error is referred to as the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area. With reference to the data, the sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormal data stored in the game RAM area based on the first abnormal data, and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, By referring to the first abnormal data stored in the non-game RAM area, the logical sum of the sensor error flag stored in the first abnormal data and the game RAM area is calculated, and the sensor according to the calculation result By updating the error flag, the second error data is updated when the occurrence of an error is specified from the first error data, and the second error is updated when the occurrence of an error is not specified from the first error data. It is a configuration that does not update data. With such a configuration, the second abnormality data is updated when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormality data, and the second abnormality data is not updated when the occurrence of abnormality is not identified from the first abnormality data. Therefore, even if the first error data is updated by the non-game program after the error is resolved after the error has occurred, the occurrence of the error will continue from the second error data until the occurrence of the error is confirmed by the game program. can be specified.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the time monitoring update process, which is a non-game program called by the timer interrupt process (main), which is a game program, an abnormality determination is performed and the result of the abnormality determination can be specified as a first abnormality. Medal-related error reference data is stored in the non-game RAM area as data, and timer interrupt processing (main), which is a game program, is executed when returning to the game program from time monitoring update processing, which is a non-game program. Without performing the processing of (1), the medal-related error reference data is referred to as the first abnormality data stored in the non-game RAM area, and the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area is based on the first abnormality data. It is a configuration that can update the sensor error flag as. In such a configuration, since the result of the abnormality determination by the non-game program is referred to before other processing is performed, the result of the abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the game program. In addition, in such a configuration, after the time monitoring update process is performed, another process is performed using the second abnormal data that has not been updated based on the first abnormal data. can be prevented.

In a conventional game machine, a game program area storing a game program related to the progress of a game and a non-game program area storing a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately assigned to the ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, when the signal output by the game program and the signal output by the non-game program are performed using a common output port, the output data of the signal set by the non-game program may remain. As a result, there is a risk of being output as an output signal by the game program.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is a game machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing a program, a main control section 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and a signal and output ports 0 to 9 for outputting, and the storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of the game, and a program called by the game program. and a non-game program area in which non-related non-game programs are stored. The first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9), and a second output port (output port 6) to which output data such as a test signal is set in a non-game program but not set to output data in a game program, and a first output Initialization of the port and the second output port is performed from the start-up setting process and power interruption process (main) which are game programs. In such a configuration, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, are assigned separately, the first output port to which output data is set in the game program and the output data is not set in the non-game program, and the output data is set in the non-game program, and the game program Since the second output port to which the output data is not set is separately provided, the output data of the signal set by the non-game program remains, and is output as the output signal by the game program. Independence of the control by the game program and the control by the non-game program can be ensured, and the initialization of the first output port and the second output port is performed by the game program. Control can be simplified when initializing output ports.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) to which output data is set in a game program and is not set in a non-game program; and a second output port (output port 6) to which output data is set in the game program, and output data is not set in the game program. 1 is started and power interruption is detected, the first output port and the second output port are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control when the initialization condition is established.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) to which output data is set in a game program and is not set in a non-game program, and a non-output port. A second output port (output port 6) to which output data is set in the game program but not set in the game program, and a test signal is output from the second output port. is. With such a configuration, the capacity of the game program can be reduced by performing the control for outputting the test signal that is not essential for progressing the game in the non-game program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by game programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored in a readable manner. The non-game RAM area is a non-game program, and is configured to be initialized by a non-game RAM area initialization process called from the initialization process. In such a configuration, the game data and the non-game data can be referred to each other by the game program and the non-game program. It is possible to ensure the independence of the control by the control and the control by the non-game program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data. The storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by game programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored in a readable manner. is initialized while the non-game RAM area is not initialized. In such a configuration, even if a setting change process involving initialization of the game RAM area is performed, the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the data and the like for displaying the role ratio based on the game history on the predetermined display device.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area capable of temporarily storing data. The storage area of the RAM 41c is a game RAM area in which game data used by game programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-game RAM area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored in a readable manner. It is configured to initialize all areas of the RAM 41c by determining an abnormality and performing a game RAM area initialization process and a non-game RAM area initialization process when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the storage contents of the RAM 41c. . With such a configuration, the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c can be initialized when there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM 41c and there is a risk that the game control will not be performed normally. In addition, if there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM 41c, the non-game RAM area is initialized. Normalize the data for displaying the role ratio, which is the state based on the history, on a predetermined display device, etc., and ensure the normal operation of the processing based on the storage contents stored in the non-game RAM area. .

In a conventional game machine, a game program area storing a game program relating to the progress of a game and a non-game program area storing a non-game program not relating to the progress of the game are separately assigned to the ROM. There is a configuration. In such a configuration, the illegal passage of medals is detected in the non-game program, but since only the passage of the inserted medals is determined in the game program, the non-game program does not operate normally. In this case, there is a possibility that the passage of medals may be determined even if fraudulent activity has been carried out.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is a gaming machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main control section 41 that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of the game, and a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. The first condition in the game program is that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data changes from the ON state to the OFF state. When this is established, first detection processing (medal insertion signal processing) is performed to detect passage of medals, which are game media. is normal, and the confirmation data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. A second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed, and in the game program, when the passage of the game medium is detected in both the first detection process and the second detection process, the game medium to be added to the number of bets and credits has passed. It is a configuration for determining that the

In such a configuration, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, are assigned separately, a first detection process for detecting passage of a game medium when a first condition is satisfied in a game program, and a passage of a game medium is detected when a second condition is satisfied in a game program. Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes, the passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is ON and the input data is OFF. A first detection process (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and the second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and that the inserted medal is normal. A second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect the passage of medals, which are game media, when it is established that the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The second condition is a configuration that is established based on the state transition of the medal insertion signal including more information than the first condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate fraud related to passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the medal sensor check process, which is a non-game program, the second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are normal. Further, second detection processing (medal sensor check processing) for detecting the passage of medals as game media is performed when it is established that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. There is a configuration in which, when passage of a game medium is not normally detected by the second detection process, it is determined to be abnormal, and medal-related error reference data (E5) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect fraud related to passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the finalized data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is ON and the input data is OFF. A first detection process (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and the second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are normal, and that the inserted medal is normal. A second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect passage of a medal, which is a game medium, when it is established that the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. In the first detection process and the second detection process, common inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are used to detect passage of game media. With such a configuration, since passage of the game medium is detected by both the game program and the non-game program with a common sensor as a target, the passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity of the game program. can.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by timer interrupt processing (main) that executes periodic processing at regular intervals. Alternatively, when it is established that the confirmed data of 31c is ON and the input data is OFF, a first detection process (medal insertion signal process) for detecting passage of medals, which are game media, is performed. The second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. is established, a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect the passage of medals, which are game media. The detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired by the game medium are used to detect the passage of the game medium. With such a configuration, since the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c obtained in the same timer interrupt process (main) are used to detect the passage of the game medium in both the game program and the non-game program, To appropriately determine passage of game media without increasing capacity.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment provides a predetermined number of medals with the winning of a small winning combination, controls the player in an advantageous manner with the winning of a special winning combination, and controls the player for a predetermined specific period, for example, the past 6000 games. , counting the total cumulative number of medals awarded during the period from when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized at the time of shipment from the factory or for some reason to the present, It is possible to count the total number of medals given out during the period (RB), and the number of payouts is the ratio of the number of payouts counted by the number of payouts to the total cumulative number of payouts. It is configured to be able to calculate a certain character product payout ratio and display the calculated character product payout ratio on the gaming machine information display unit 50 in a identifiable manner, and reaches a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). It has a plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 with different timings, and each time a specific period is reached, the value of the corresponding counter is used to calculate the specials payout ratio, and from the start of counting by the cumulative buffers 1 to 3. In this configuration, the display of the accessory payout ratio blinks during the period until the specific period is reached first. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the accessory payout ratio displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 is not a normal value. In addition, since each of the plurality of cumulative buffers 1 to 3 has different timings of reaching the specific period, after the first cumulative buffer reaches the specific period once, the cumulative buffer reaches the next specific period. Without waiting, the accessory payout ratio can be updated to the latest information each time another cumulative buffer reaches a specific period.

[Effect 2]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, are assigned separately, and when the non-game program is executed, the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when a non-game program is called from a game program, the register values in the non-game program are saved in the stack area for protection, and are saved when all processing based on the non-game program is completed. After the value is returned to the register, it is returned to the game program. When returning, there is a risk that the register will return to a state different from when the non-game program was called.

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is a game machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of the game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, , the main CPU 41a executes processing based on the values stored in a plurality of registers, and the values of the plurality of registers are updated by a read command LD executed in connection with calling a non-game program. Including the flag register, processing included in the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) to processing included in the non-game program (non-game RAM area initialization processing, RT information output processing, winning information output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.), the calling game program saves the value of the flag register in the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program, and the called non-game program issues a read command LD is used to set the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program, and then the non-game program saves the values of all of the plurality of registers to the non-game stack area. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c, a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of a game and a non-game program for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. and are allocated separately, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the value of the flag register whose value is updated by executing the read command LD is saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-game program using the read command LD by the non-game program, the values of all registers are saved in the non-game stack area of the RAM 41c, so the value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area. A non-game program can be executed in the saved and protected state.

In this embodiment, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the main CPU 41a uses the second save command (PUSH) to save the value of the flag register to the game stack area by the game program. When calling the non-game program from the game program, the value of the flag register may be saved in a predetermined area other than the game stack area (for example, the game RAM area other than the game stack area, the back flag register, etc.). Further, when calling the non-game program from the game program, the game program may save the values of a plurality of registers including at least the flag register.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment executes a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the values of all of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the value of the flag register among the plurality of registers to the stack pointer SP. can execute a plurality of instructions including a second save instruction (PUSH AF) that saves to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by . The program capacity is smaller than that of the first save instruction for saving the value of . In such a configuration, the value of the flag register is saved using the second save instruction in the game program, and the values of all the plurality of registers are saved using the first save instruction in the non-game program. Capacity can be reduced.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment can execute a read instruction LD for reading data stored in a specified area to another specified area. It is possible to read out and store the indicated value in a specified area of the RAM 41c, or to read out the value stored in the specified area of the RAM 41c and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. is executed to update the value of the second zero flag in the flag register, and the main CPU 41a stores the value of the flag register including the second zero flag in the RAM 41c by the game program when calling the non-game program from the game program. Among the values stored in the flag register, the value of the second zero flag that is updated by executing the read command LD is a value that is not used for determination for the progress of the program in the game program. is the configuration. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by executing the read command LD is a value that is not used for determination by the game program, but includes the second zero flag when calling the non-game program. By saving and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent unintended operations from being performed when the game program returns from the non-game program.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment is included in the game program, and includes main processing that performs basic processing and timer interrupt processing (main) that can be performed by interrupting the execution of the main processing. It is possible to execute processing, and when calling the processing included in the non-game program (winning information output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.) from the main processing included in the game program, the value of the flag register After saving to the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the timer interrupt processing (main) interrupt is prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to minimize the period during which the interruption is prohibited when calling the non-game program. Further, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by executing the timer interrupt process (main) after saving the value of the flag register.

In this embodiment, when calling a process included in a non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register in the game stack area and then executes the timer interrupt process (main). However, when the main processing included in the game program calls the processing included in the non-game program from the main processing included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area of the RAM 41c. , the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing (main) may be prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed by executing the timer interrupt process (main) after saving the value of the flag register to the game stack area.

In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area for storing a game program related to the progress of a game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, are assigned separately, and when the non-game program is executed, the corresponding non-game program is called from the game program. In such a configuration, when calling a non-game program from a game program, the timer interrupt is prohibited in advance, and when the processing based on the non-game program is completed and the game program is returned to, the prohibition of the timer interrupt is released. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from being performed during the execution of the non-game program, but there is a possibility that the execution of the timer interrupt will be delayed due to the prohibition of the timer interrupt accompanying the execution of the non-game program. .

On the other hand, the slot machine 1, which is a game machine of the present embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the programs stored in the ROM 41b. The storage area of the ROM 41b includes a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of the game, a non-game program area for storing a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game, The main CPU 41a performs basic processing (main processing, game start waiting processing included in the main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.), and when an interrupt condition that periodically occurs during execution of the basic processing is met. can be executed by timer interrupt processing (main) that can be executed by interrupting the basic processing, which is the basic processing, and includes processing included in the game program (main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) to non-game When calling the processing included in the program (winning information output processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing), timer interruption is prohibited while the non-game program is running, and the non-game program is called from the game program. Before performing a series of processing including processing, wait for one interrupt processing to wait until the interrupt condition is met and the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. After that, the non-game program is called by performing a series of processes including the process of calling the non-game program from the game program. In such a configuration, the RAM 41c provided in the main control unit 41 has a game program area for storing a game program relating to the progress of the game, and a non-game program which is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which a stored non-game program area and a non-game program area are separately allocated, timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited when the non-game program is called from the game program, and before the non-game program is called from the game program, Since the non-game program is called after the one-interrupt wait processing and the timer interrupt processing (main) are executed, the game program can be called from the non-game program in a sufficient period until the next interrupt condition is satisfied. A series of processes including the process of calling the program are performed, the non-game program is called and executed, and interrupts are prohibited along with the execution of the non-game program, so that the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. Delays can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a calls the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program from the medal insertion signal processing which is a part of the main processing included in the game program, or calls the RT information output processing from the main processing. When calling, before calling the non-game program from the game program, one-time interrupt waiting processing is performed, and after the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, the non-game program is called, and the one-time interrupt waiting processing is performed. After a plurality of processes included in the game program are executed, the non-game program is called. When the non-game program is called from the game program, the one-time interrupt waiting process is performed immediately before calling the non-game program. Such a configuration can reliably prevent the interruption condition from being satisfied when the interruption is prohibited due to the execution of the non-game program.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment includes a main process for executing basic processes, and a timer interrupt capable of interrupting the main process and executing the process when an interrupt condition that periodically occurs during the execution of the main process is satisfied. , and when the non-game program is called from the main process, the non-game program is called after executing the one-time interrupt waiting process, and the main included in the game program. The role ratio monitor data processing included in the non-game program called from the processing requires a predetermined time for execution (a time that can exceed the timing of the occurrence of an interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt processing (main)). be. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) from being delayed even if the period during which the timer interrupt is prohibited becomes longer due to the execution of the non-game program.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a main process included in a game program and a timer capable of interrupting the main process and executing the process when an interrupt condition that periodically occurs during the execution of the main process is satisfied. interrupt processing (main), and the main processing calls the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program via the game start waiting processing included in the game program. It is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-game program, and in the game start waiting processing before calling the medal sensor processing from the medal insertion signal processing, the one-time interrupt waiting processing is executed, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed, the medal sensor process is called. In the timer interrupt process (main), various switches (eg, start switch 7, etc.) and sensors (eg, inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc.) are input. Port input processing for updating data is executed, and input data is referred to in medal sensor processing to determine the state of insertion of medals. With such a configuration, it is possible to refer to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and execute the medal sensor process included in the non-game program.

[Effect 3]
In a conventional slot machine, an AT or the like that is notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player is controlled to a controllable advantageous interval, and the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval reaches the limit value of 1500 games. In some cases, the advantageous interval is ended, and information related to the control of the advantageous interval, such as the number of AT remaining games, is initialized.

In slot machines with such a configuration, no consideration is given to a configuration in which a bet number can be selected from a plurality of bet amounts in limiting the advantageous interval.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either three (first number of bets) or two (second number of bets) according to the player's selection. , the game can be executed both when the number of bets is set to 3 and when the number of bets is set to 2. It is possible to control to an advantageous interval, and when it is specified as an advantageous interval based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal in the ball output control process (first process) performed at the start of the game, Regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the number of games in the advantageous section, which is the number of games after the start of the advantageous section, is added to the number of games in the advantageous section by one game. After updating the advantageous zone game number counter, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous zone game number counter has reached the specified number of games (first specified number), and the specified number of games has been reached. When it is determined that the advantageous interval data is initialized, the advantageous interval is terminated. According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the player selects the number of bets of three (first number) or the number of bets of two (second number). In a possible configuration, the main control unit 41 determines the number of games in the advantageous period regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or the number of bets is set to 2 when the control is in the advantageous period. When the counter is updated and the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the specified number of games (first specified number), the advantageous section ends. Since the advantageous section is restricted so as not to be controlled to the advantageous section for a long period of time equal to or longer than the specified number of games (1500 games) even if selected, the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from increasing excessively.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform ball output control processing at the start of the game, and to update the advantageous interval game number counter when the advantageous interval is specified. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform processing for updating the number-of-games-advantage-section counter in the processing at the end of the game, for example, the AT state management processing after the reel stop control processing. Even in a configuration for performing processing for updating the number-of-games-in-advantage-section counter at the end of a game, in cases where the number of bets of 3 is set, and in cases where the number of bets of 2 is set, the number-of-games-in-advantage-section counter is updated, By ending the advantageous interval when the advantageous interval game number counter value reaches the specified number of games, the advantageous interval is limited so that the advantageous interval is not controlled for a long period of time equal to or longer than the predetermined number of games. , the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from increasing excessively.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can output an advantageous interval signal indicating that the advantageous interval is in effect to the outside of the slot machine 1 when controlling to the advantageous interval. By setting a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) to the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval set in , the main control unit 41 outputs the signal during the advantageous interval. By determining whether or not the signal is being output during the advantageous section based on whether or not the value of the output buffer for the intermediate signal is the initial value, it is determined whether or not the signal is being output during the advantageous section. When it does, it is the constitution which does the processing regarding the advantageous section in ball output control processing and the like. According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the advantageous interval signal is being output by determining whether or not the advantageous interval signal is being output. We can guarantee that it will be done.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the signal during the advantageous interval is being output based on whether the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is the initial value in the main processing or the ball output control processing. Although it is configured to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether the The determination may be made based on an advantageous interval flag indicating that the advantageous interval is in progress, an advantageous interval game number counter for counting the number of games played in the advantageous interval, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set an advantageous interval flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when controlling the advantageous interval. If it is determined that the advantageous interval signal is not being output based on the value in the buffer and the advantageous interval is not in progress, does the advantageous interval starting condition (the winning of the advantageous interval transition hand in the internal lottery) hold? If it is determined that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied, the flag indicating that the advantageous interval is to be controlled is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting a predetermined value (1) in the signal output buffer, the signal is output during the advantageous interval by subsequent timer interrupt processing. According to this configuration, when the advantageous interval signal is not being output, it is determined whether the condition for starting the advantageous interval is met, and if the condition for starting the advantageous interval is met, the advantageous interval flag is stored in the RAM 41c. is set to the predetermined area and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, it is possible to ensure that the process of transitioning to the advantageous section is performed in a state in which no signal is output during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to output a predetermined signal to a testing device that performs a performance test of the slot machine 1. This signal is used for the performance test of According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 performs processing relating to the advantageous interval in a state in which the signal during the advantageous interval is output to the test device that performs the performance test, and the test device that performs the performance test Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the main control unit 41 performs the process of shifting to the advantageous section in a state in which the signal during the advantageous section is not output.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 outputs the signal during the advantageous interval based on whether or not the value of the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval as the test signal in the main processing and the ball output control processing is the initial value. It is configured to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous section by determining whether or not it is being output. It may be determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section based on a signal output to an external device such as.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the advantageous interval transition related processing related to the transition to the advantageous interval and the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) in the ball output control processing performed at the start of the game. The initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous interval, it is determined that it is outside the advantageous interval, and the number of bets of 3 is determined. When it is determined that it is set, the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section is performed. If it is determined that the number of bets is not set, the advantageous section transition related processing is not performed. According to this configuration, when the number of three bets (first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to transition to the advantageous section is not performed. You can be prompted to play the game with the first bet number.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2). It is possible to perform processing related to transition to an advantageous interval and processing to determine whether or not the gaming state is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2). If it is determined that it is set and is outside the advantageous section and if it is determined that it is not controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition related processing is performed, and the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section is stored. The initial value (0) is set and it is determined that it is outside the advantageous section, but if it is determined that the control is in the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section transition related processing is not performed. . According to this configuration, when the game state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the processing related to transition to the advantageous section is not performed, so that the special state (BB1, BB2) is applied to the player or the like. You can encourage playing games outside.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2). Advantageous section transition related processing, processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), and determining whether or not the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set If it is determined that processing can be performed and the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval and it is determined that it is outside the advantageous interval, it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is set. And when it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled, the advantageous section transition-related processing is performed, and the initial value (0) is set in the advantageous section signal output buffer. If it is determined that it is outside the section, but if it is determined that it is controlled in a special state (BB1, BB2), or if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, an advantageous section transition related process is performed. It is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), or when the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the advantageous section transition related processing is performed. Since it is not performed, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with the number of bets of three (first number of bets).

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is possible to perform navigation notification that notifies the player, and in the ball-out control processing performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball-out state, ED transition It is possible to update the number of games counter, perform processing according to the state of paid balls, etc.), and determine whether or not the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set. When it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval and that it is in the advantageous interval and that the number of bets of 3 is set, navigation notification is made. While performing the processing related to , it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous interval and it is determined that it is in the advantageous interval, but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set is a configuration that does not perform processing related to navigation notification. According to this configuration, when the number of three bets (the first number of bets) is not set, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. ) to encourage you to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment carries over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won. is possible, and when the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. , and has stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the ball output control processing performed at the start of the game, the processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball output state, ED shift game number counter update, processing according to the ball output state, etc.), and processing to determine whether or not the game state is controlled to RT1. is set to a predetermined value (1) and it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, and if it is determined that the game state is controlled to RT1, while performing processing related to navigation notification, during the advantageous section A predetermined value (1) is set in the signal output buffer and it is determined that the game is in an advantageous section, but if it is determined that the game state is not controlled to RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. Configuration. According to this configuration, a specific gaming state in which winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) subject to internal lottery is carried over on condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set. When control is not performed at RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be encouraged to play the game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment carries over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won. is possible, and when the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. , and has stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the ball output control processing performed at the start of the game, the processing related to navigation notification (processing for performing navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball output state, ED shift game number counter update, ball output state processing for performing processing according to the ball output state, etc.), processing to determine whether the game state is controlled to RT1, and the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set. It is possible to perform processing to determine whether or not it is in the advantageous interval signal output buffer. When it is determined that it is under control and that the number of bets of 3 is set, a process related to navigation notification is performed, and a predetermined value (1) is stored in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. If it is determined that it is set and it is in the advantageous section, if it is determined that the game state is not controlled to RT1, or if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, Navi notification It is a configuration that does not perform processing related to According to this configuration, when the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is not set, the internal lottery is made subject to the condition that the number of bets of 2 (second) is set. If the control is not in RT1, which is the specific game state in which the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed. It is possible to prompt the player to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes an ED transition game number counter for counting the number of ED transition games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and increments the ED transition game number counter by 1 each time a game is played in an advantageous section. When the number of ED transition games specified based on the ED transition game number counter reaches a predetermined number of games (fifth prescribed number), the navigation notification is controlled until the advantageous section ends. In a game in which it is determined that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set and that the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the ED In a game determined that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is not set, or a game determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, while performing processing to update the number-of-transition-games counter. , ED transition game number is not updated. According to this configuration, the internal lottery target is a game in which the number of bets of three is not set (first number of bets) or the number of bets of two is set (second number of bets). In a game that is not controlled to RT1, which is a specific game state in which the winning of a specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the game is shifted to the ED state by reaching a predetermined number of games (fifth specified number) Since the process of updating the number of games transitioning to the ED is not performed, it is possible to prompt the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment allows the player to set the number of bets to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet). The game can be executed both when the number is set and when the number of two bets is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. Advantageous interval game number counter for counting the number of games controlled in the advantageous interval and a net increase in medals paid out after the start of the advantageous interval (paid during the advantageous interval) are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Equipped with a net increase number counter that counts the number of increased medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used for setting the bet amount from the total number of issued medals, and is advantageous each time a game is played in an advantageous section. It is possible to update the interval game number counter by adding 1 each time, and in the AT state management process performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the advantageous interval game number counter is set to the initial value (0 ), regardless of whether the number of bets of 3 or 2 is set, the net increase number counter is updated, and after updating the net increase number counter, the It is configured to determine whether or not the value of the net increase number counter has exceeded a second specified number, and control to terminate the advantageous section when it is determined that the value has exceeded the second specified number. According to this configuration, the game is executed regardless of whether the player selects the number of bets of three (first number) or the number of bets of two (second number). In a possible configuration, in the advantageous section, the medal number counter is updated regardless of whether the first bet amount is set or the second bet amount is set, and the medal number counter value reaches the second prescribed number. Since the advantageous section ends when the number of bets is exceeded, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is the same whether the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is selected or the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is selected. Since it is restricted so as not to increase excessively, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 from increasing.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment allows the player to set the number of bets to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet). The game can be executed both when the number is set and when the number of two bets is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous to the player. It is provided with stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section. In the AT state management processing performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, processing related to the navigation notification (processing to shift to ED state, output processing related to ball status, etc.), and processing to determine whether or not the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set. When it is determined that the number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and that the number of bets of 3 is set, a process related to navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), but if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, the processing related to navigation notification is not performed. According to this configuration, in a game in which the number of bets of three (the first number of bets) is not set, there is no processing related to the navigation notification. It is possible to prompt the player to play the game with (the first bet number).

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not it is in the advantageous interval based on whether or not the advantageous interval game number counter is the initial value (0) in the AT state management process. However, the determination as to whether or not it is in the advantageous interval is not limited to whether or not the advantageous interval game count counter is at the initial value (0). The determination may be made based on a flag, an output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment carries over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won. is possible, and when the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R In addition, it is possible to perform navigation notification that notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and AT performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. In the state management processing, processing related to navigation notification (processing to shift to ED state, processing related to ball output state, etc.) and determining whether or not the game state is controlled to RT1 If it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and that the game state is controlled to RT1, navigation notification is performed. While performing related processing, when it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), but it is determined that the game state is not controlled to RT1, processing related to navigation notification It is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, a specific gaming state in which winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) subject to internal lottery is carried over on condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set. When control is not performed at RT1, the processing related to the navigation notification is not performed, so that the player or the like can be encouraged to play the game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment carries over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role is not won. is possible, and when the winning of the special role (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section advantageous to the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R In addition, it is possible to perform navigation notification that notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R during the advantageous section, and AT performed after the rotation of all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped. In the state management processing, processing related to navigation notification (processing to shift to ED state, processing related to ball output state, etc.) and determining whether or not the game state is controlled to RT1 It is possible to perform processing to determine whether or not the number of bets of 3 is set, and when it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), the game When it is determined that the state is controlled to RT1 and that the number of bets of 3 is set, the process related to the navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0 ), if it is determined that the game state is not controlled to RT1, or if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is not set, processing related to navigation notification It is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, if the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is not set or the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is set, the internal lottery will be performed. If it is not controlled to RT1, which is a specific game state in which the winning of a specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed. can be urged to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stores a net increase in the number of medals paid out after the start of the advantageous interval in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (the total number of medals paid out during the advantageous interval is used to set the number of bets). A net increase number counter for counting the number of increased medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals obtained), the net increase number counter is updated each time a game is played in an advantageous section, and specified based on the net increase number counter When the net increase in the number of medals awarded exceeds the third prescribed number, it is possible to shift to the ED state in which navigation notification control is performed for the period until the end of the advantageous section, and the number of bets of 3 (3rd 1 bet) is set and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, it is determined whether or not the value of the net increase number counter exceeds the third specified number, In a game determined that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is not set, or a game determined that the gaming state is not controlled to RT1, the value of the net increase number counter reaches the third specified number. This is a configuration in which it is not determined whether or not the threshold has been exceeded. According to this configuration, when the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is not set, the internal lottery is made subject to the condition that the number of bets of 2 (second) is set. If it is not controlled to RT1, which is a specific game state in which the winning of a specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the net increase number counter will shift to the ED state by exceeding the third prescribed number. Since it is not determined whether or not the value exceeds the third specified number, it is possible to prompt the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet) according to the selection of the player. In the game, if a special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the special role does not win, the winning of the special role can be carried over to the next game or later, and the special role includes a special role (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is set, and the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is In the set game, regardless of the winning result of the internal lottery, the symbol combination in which a specific winning combination (BB1) wins is controlled so as not to be drawn out to the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. According to this configuration, in RT1, which is a gaming state in which winning of a specific special combination (BB1) is carried over, the internal lottery is performed by selecting the number of bets of three (first number of bets). Even if none of the winning combinations are won in , the game state can be maintained at RT1 without winning a specific special combination (BB1).

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet) according to the selection of the player. can store credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is equipped with a MAXBET switch 6 operated by the player when setting the bet amount using the credits. This configuration effectively accepts the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 when the number of bets can be set to 3 by summing the credits. According to this configuration, when the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set a bet number of 3, the player or the like operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set a bet number of 3 (first bet number). is set, in a situation where the remaining amount of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted, and only the bet number of 2 (second bet number) is set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated in a situation where it is not possible, the number of two bets is not set, so that the game can be prevented from being played with the second number of bets as much as possible.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first bet) or 2 (second bet) according to the player's selection. is a setting change state in which one of a plurality of setting values (1 to 6) with different advantages for the player can be selected and set, and the currently set setting It is possible to control the setting confirmation state in which the value can be confirmed, and in the case that the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special role does not win, the special role It is possible to carry over the winning to the next game or later, and the special role is subject to internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets (first bet number) of 3 is set. (BB2) and a specific special combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, and the main control unit 41 When the winning of the special role (BB1) subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets (second bet number) is set, it is suggested that the winning of the special role is carried over. While the status is displayed, the status is displayed when the winning of the special role (BB2) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 3 (first bet number) is set. After the state display is started, the state display is continued in both the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. According to this configuration, the state display is performed, and on the condition that the number of bets of 2 (second number of bets) is set, the winning of the specific special combination (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is possible. In addition to notifying that it is being carried over, the status display, once started, continues even if it is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, so the situation where it is controlled to the setting change state or setting confirmation state However, it can be confirmed that the winning of the specific special role (BB1) is carried over.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the winning of the special combination (BB1) targeted for the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 2 (second number of bets) is set, It is possible to display the status indicating that the winning of the special role has been carried over, and it is a special that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of two (second bet number) is set. In the game in which the combination (BB1) is won, the state display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, and when the special combination (BB1) is won in the game, the state display is terminated. , the state display is continued when the special combination (BB1) does not win in the game. According to this configuration, since the state display is started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, the presence or absence of the state display is confirmed before the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. It is possible to do In addition, when the special combination (BB2) is won, the state display is ended in the game, so that the end of the winning state of the special combination (BB2) can be immediately confirmed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. By the internal lottery process executed in , it is determined whether or not the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, and if it is determined that the special combination is won, the special combination (BB1, BB2) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the internal winning flag is referenced by the LED dynamic display process executed in the timer interrupt process, and based on the internal winning flag, a specific special win ( It is determined whether or not the special combination (BB1) has been won, and if it is determined that the special combination (BB1) has been won, a control signal for turning on the status display LED 17 is output from a predetermined output port. By controlling the display LED 17 to be in a lighting state, the state display is started. According to this configuration, when the special combination (BB1) is won by the internal lottery, the status display is started immediately. , 8R can be sufficiently secured before the operation of 8R becomes effective.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery process executed in the main process, the special combination (BB1, BB2) is won. After setting an internal winning flag indicating to that effect in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, an interrupt BC waiting process for waiting until the timer interrupt process is performed a predetermined number of times is performed. A reel stop control process for performing stop control is executed, and operation of the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated on the condition that the reel under rotation control in the reel stop control process is in a constant speed state. Yes, after the internal winning flag is set in the internal lottery process, and after the timer interrupt process is performed one or more times, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is validated. According to this configuration, it is possible to reliably start the state notification before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the AT that is advantageous for the player in the advantageous section, and when the AT is being controlled, the AT signal indicating that the AT is being controlled is slotted. It is possible to output to the outside of the machine 1, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section, it is possible to display the section indicating that it is controlled in the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to be lit. It is a possible configuration, after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display is started when AT control is started, and after the section display is started when AT control is started, This configuration controls to output the AT signal to the outside. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the external device that has received the AT signal from identifying that the advantageous section is being controlled before the section display is started.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to be capable of outputting an operation information signal designating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R to the testing apparatus. In the ball output control process, a predetermined value (1 indicating ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to light up by timer interrupt processing to indicate that the advantageous section is being controlled. After the section display is started, the operation information signal output processing is performed in the main processing, so that the operation information signal is output to the test apparatus after the section display is started. According to this configuration, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, it is possible for the test device to specify that the operation mode is specified while the section display is being performed. becomes.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the AT advantageous for the player in the advantageous interval, and controlling the interval display LED 19 to light up when controlling the advantageous interval. It is possible to display a section indicating that it is being controlled in the section, and to output a signal during the advantageous section indicating that it is being controlled in the advantageous section to the test device, and when the advantageous section ends It is configured to perform advantageous section data initialization processing for initializing information related to the advantageous section. When the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section data initialization processing initializes the advantageous section related information including the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section. , and after controlling the signal during the advantageous interval to the OFF state, the interval display is terminated. According to this configuration, after the advantageous section-related information is initialized and the advantageous section-in-progress signal is turned OFF, the section display is terminated. It is possible to prevent the end of the interval display, and the end of the interval display even though the advantageous interval signal is output to the test device because the output buffer for the advantageous interval signal has not been initialized. You can prevent it from slipping.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform advantageous interval data initialization processing for initializing information relating to the advantageous interval when the advantageous interval ends. is set, and in the processing at the end of the game in the main processing (Sb83 to Sb85), after initializing the information related to the advantageous interval, the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous interval is turned OFF. It is configured to determine whether or not the initial value (0) shown is set, and control the signal during the advantageous section to the OFF state when it is determined that the OFF state is set. According to this configuration, by initializing the advantageous section related information when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section signal can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. can be done.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state to the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous interval, thereby outputting the signal during the advantageous interval to the test device. In the main process, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous section at the end of the game based on the advantageous section flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined, a predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section, and the signal during the advantageous section is output when the predetermined value is set in the output buffer for the signal during the advantageous section. Configuration. According to this configuration, each time the game ends, it is determined whether or not the game is in the advantageous interval. In spite of this, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing a section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to be in a lighting state when the control is in the advantageous section. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section is being displayed, the section display can be restarted when the power supply is started. If the section display is restarted on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply is started after the power supply to the is stopped, it indicates that the section display has been restored. The configuration is such that it is possible to use the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the section display LED is lighting. This is a configuration in which notification is performed, and the notification during lighting of the section display LED is terminated after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this configuration, when the state where the section display is performed is restored when the power supply is started, the section display LED is notified to that effect. It is possible to make the store clerk recognize that the section is being displayed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification ends after a certain period of time, the section display LED lighting section notification is continued after the amusement arcade is opened, which may cause players, etc., to feel uncomfortable. can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the AT advantageous for the player in the advantageous interval, and controlling the interval display LED 19 to light up when controlling the advantageous interval. It is possible to display a section indicating that the section is being controlled, and the sub-control section 91 stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while the section display is being performed on the main control section 41 side. After that, when the power supply starts over a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 a.m.) outside the business hours of the amusement arcade and the state where the section display is being performed is restored, the section display is performed. While using the liquid crystal display 51 to notify that the section display LED has been turned on to indicate that the state has been restored, the power supply is started without crossing over the specific time, and the state in which the section display is being performed is restored. In this case, the section display LED is not notified during lighting. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if power is cut off temporarily during business hours.

In this embodiment, the sub-controller 91 has an RTC, and can specify the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section is being displayed on the 41 side, the power supply is resumed over a specific time (in this embodiment, 4:00 a.m.) outside the operating hours of the amusement arcade. When the main control unit 41 side returns to the state where the section display is performed, the section display LED lighting is notified. When the state where the interval display is performed is restored, power to the slot machine 1 is supplied based on the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped and the time when the power supply was started. If the elapsed time from the time when the supply was stopped is within a certain period of time, the section display LED lighting notification is not performed, and if the elapsed time exceeds the certain period of time, the section display LED lighting section notification is performed. may be configured to perform Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a player or the like from feeling uncomfortable even if power is cut off temporarily during business hours.

After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the interval display is being performed on the main control unit 41 side, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs a specific time outside the business hours of the amusement arcade (this implementation). For example, when the power supply starts across 4:00 a.m. and returns to the state where the section display is performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the section display has been restored. The notification is made using the liquid crystal display device 51, and when the game is started while the section display LED lighting notification is being performed, the section display LED lighting notification is terminated without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. Configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game even if the predetermined time has not elapsed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the section display LED 19 to be lit only in the section after the start of the AT among the advantageous sections, thereby performing section display indicating that control is being performed in the advantageous section. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of AT in which is not performed, the power supply is started and the section display is not performed. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of the AT where the section display is not performed on the side, when the power supply starts and the section display is not performed, the section display LED is lit. It is a configuration that does not perform. According to this configuration, only when the state is controlled to the advantageous section and the state where the section is displayed is restored, the amusement arcade clerk recognizes that the amusement arcade will open while the section is being displayed. can be made

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can carry over the winning of the special role to the next game or later when the special role (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the winning special role does not win. It is possible to set one of a plurality of types of setting values (1 to 6) with different advantages for the player when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. It is possible to perform advantageous section-related information initialization processing for initializing information related to advantageous sections, triggered by a setting operation using a setting key switch or an initialization operation using a reset/setting switch. The game is played in RT1, which is a gaming state in which the winning of the winning combination (BB1) is carried over, so that the medal payout rate becomes appropriate. When the supply is started, both when the setting key switch is turned on and when the reset/setting switch is turned on, the advantageous section The related information is initialized and the display of the advantageous section and the section is ended, while the information regarding the game state is not initialized and RT1 is maintained. According to this configuration, both when the power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed and when the power supply is started while the initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section is ended and the section is displayed. While the game can be ended, the game state RT1 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform an operation to change the game state to RT1 each time the display of the advantageous section and the section is ended.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control unit 41 for controlling games, a sub-control unit 91 for controlling effects based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 41, and a player using reels 2L, and stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R operated to stop 2C and 2R. It is configured to be capable of performing a navigation notification indicating the operation mode of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. Even when the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is set, the number of bets of 3 is set, or the number of bets of 2 is set, including multiple types of wins including multiple winning hands. is set, when the order of multiple pressing is won in the internal lottery and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the stop order corresponding to the winning order of multiple pressing, The stop control of the reels is performed so as to be more advantageous to the player than when the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated in a stop order other than the corresponding stop order, and the winning combination of multiple pressing is won in an internal lottery. In this case, it is possible to perform navigation notification that informs the stop order corresponding to the winning multiple-push order, and the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set, or Regardless of whether the (second bet number) is set or not, it is possible to identify that the winning combination of multiple pushes is won in the internal lottery when the winning combination of multiple pushes is won in the internal lottery. , an internal winning command capable of specifying a winning combination group is transmitted so as to make it impossible to specify the type of the winning multi-push winning combination. According to this configuration, even when the number of bets of 3 (first number) is set, and even when the number of bets of 2 (second number) is set, a large number of coins is selected by the internal lottery. If any kind of combination is won by lottery, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player changes according to the type of the winning multiple-push order combination. Even if the number of bets for 1 card (1st bet) is set, and even if the number of bets for 2 cards (2nd bet) is set, the winning order of multiple cards is won in the internal lottery. is identifiable, but since an internal winning command capable of identifying the group of winning hands is transmitted so that the type of the winning multiple winning winning hand cannot be specified, the number of bets of 3 (first bet number ) is set, and even when the number of bets of 2 (second bet number) is set, it is possible to prevent an operation mode advantageous to the player from being specified from the internal winning command.

When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment wins the winning role by pushing multiple cards in the internal lottery in the advantageous section, if the number of bets (first number of bets) of 3 is set, It is possible to inform navigation of the operation mode (stopping order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of winning multi-push order, and if the number of bets on two cards (second number of bets) is set, it will be won. In this configuration, an operation mode (stopping order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of multiple-press winning combination is not notified. According to this configuration, when the number of bets of 2 (second bet) is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player is not instructed by the navigation notification, so the number of bets of 3 (second bet) is set. number) can be encouraged to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) is set and when the number of bets of 2 (second number of bets) is set, When a multiple-playing order is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to identify that the multiple-playing order has been won in the internal lottery. It is configured to transmit an internal winning command capable of specifying the group of the winning order of the winning combination, and an internal winning command that makes it impossible to specify the type of the winning multiple winning combination is created by common group information setting processing and transmitted. Configuration. According to this configuration, both when the number of bets of 3 (first bet) is set and when the number of bets of 2 (second) is set, the internal lottery When the winning combination of multiple pressing is won, the internal winning command is created by the common group information setting process, so that the program capacity related to command creation can be reduced.

[Effect 4]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each unit of game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. Specific processing (processing by a game program) and special processing (processing by a non-game program) can be performed in the timer interrupt processing. It is a configuration that performs update processing, and during execution of specific processing (game program), timer interrupt processing may be executed, and while the one game time management timer value is updated, special processing (non During execution of the game program), the timer interrupt processing is not executed, and the timer value for one game time management is not updated. According to this configuration, by updating the one-game-time management timer value as much as possible, the game can be smoothly progressed. By not updating the timer value for management, processing for updating the timer value for one game time management and special processing do not coexist.

In the main processing, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the timer value for one-game-time management is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game, and manages one-game-time. When it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is not the specific value (0), the game is not progressed until it is determined that the one game time management timer value is the specific value (0), and one game time management is performed. In this configuration, the game proceeds when it is determined that the timer value for use is a specific value (0). According to this configuration, the game is not progressed until it is specified that the minimum time has passed based on the timer value for managing one playing time, and the game is progressed when the minimum time has passed. minimum time can be secured.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment prohibits the execution of the timer interrupt process, when it is determined in the main process that the one-game-time management timer value is a specific value (0). This configuration sets an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) to the timer. According to this configuration, timer interrupt processing is prohibited when the initial value is set to the one-game-time management timer. It is possible to prevent the management timer value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a medal selector 29 having a medal receiving channel 29b for guiding the medals inserted from the outside of the slot machine 1 to the hopper tank 34a on the inner side. , as a special process (non-game program), a medal sensor process for monitoring the passage of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b is executed. According to this configuration, during the period in which the medal sensor process for monitoring the passing status of the medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b is performed, the one game time management timer value is not updated. The process of updating the timer value for time management and the medal sensor process related to fraud detection are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets an error code when an abnormality is detected in the medal sensor processing, determines whether or not the error code is set in a specific process (game program), and determines whether the error code is set. is set, error processing is executed, and timer interrupt processing can be executed during the execution of error processing, and the one game time management timer value is updated. According to this configuration, since the one game time management timer value is updated during the execution of the error processing, the elapsed state of the minimum time is clocked even during the error processing, and after the end of the error processing, the game can be smoothly performed. can play games.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform error processing when an error is detected. The error processing is performed by resetting the reset switch 23 while power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued. , and can be terminated without interrupting the power supply. According to this configuration, the game can be restarted smoothly even if error processing is performed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the special states (BB1, BB2) that are advantageous to the player. the ratio of the total number of cumulative payouts of medals given to the player, and the ratio of the total cumulative number of consecutive payouts of medals awarded in a special state to the total cumulative number of payouts of medals given to the player; A game machine information display 50 for displaying a continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio, is provided, and as special processing (non-game program), the total cumulative number of payouts, which is data for calculating the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, It is configured to be able to execute role ratio monitor data processing for updating the total cumulative number of payout bonuses and the total number of continuous bonus payouts. According to this configuration, the one-game-time management timer value is not updated during the period in which the role ratio monitoring data processing for updating the data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is performed. Therefore, the processing for updating the timer value for managing one game time and the data processing for role ratio monitoring related to the performance display of the gaming machine are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled in the role ratio monitor data processing, and when it is determined that the special state is controlled, the game It is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals granted to the player has reached the upper limit value, and if it is determined that the upper limit value has been reached, the total cumulative role If it is determined that the upper limit value has not been reached without performing the process of updating the number of items paid out and the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses paid out, update the total cumulative number of bonuses paid out and the total cumulative number of continuous bonuses paid out. This is the configuration for processing. According to this configuration, regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals given to the player cannot be updated, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative number of payout bonuses and the total number of continuous bonus payouts from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing navigation information indicating the operation modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. In addition to the ratio, the total cumulative payout number of bonuses to the total cumulative payout number, which is the total number of medals awarded to the player, the total cumulative number of continuous bonus payouts, and the operation mode advantageous to the player by navigation notification are indicated. It is possible to display an instruction-inclusive role ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of instruction-inclusive payouts, which is the number of medals paid out due to the navigation notification, which is the number of medals paid out, and the number of payouts with navigation notification. In the data processing, it is determined whether or not the total cumulative payout counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit. , does not perform the process of updating the total instructed accessory payout number and determines that the upper limit has not been reached, determines whether or not it is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), special When it is determined that the state is controlled, a process for updating the total instructed accessory payout number is performed, and when it is determined that the special state is not controlled, an operation advantageous to the player is performed by navigation notification. It is determined whether or not a mode has been instructed, and when it is determined that an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed by the navigation notification, a process of updating the total instructed bonus payout number is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the total instructed bonus payout number from being updated regardless of the situation in which the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute, as a special process (non-game program), an operation information signal output process of outputting a stop execution position signal to a testing device that tests the slot machine 1. . According to this configuration, during the period in which the operation information signal output process for outputting the test signal to the testing device for testing the slot machine 1 is being performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Therefore, the process of updating the one game time management timer value and the operation information signal output process related to the test of the slot machine 1 do not coexist.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification indicating the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. If it is determined that the navigation notification will be performed, a process of outputting a stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode to be instructed is performed, and the navigation notification is performed. When it is determined not to be performed, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to, and the process of outputting the stop execution position signal designating the operation mode corresponding to the winning number is performed. According to this configuration, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted. can be simplified.

In the timer interrupt process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes a counter update process for updating a plurality of timer values used in a specific process (game program) including one game time management timer value, and a special process (non A time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used in the game program) is performed separately. According to this configuration, the time monitoring update process for updating the timer value used by the special process does not coexist with the counter update process for updating the timer value used by the specific process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can output a test signal that can specify the winning result of the internal lottery to the test device, and determines that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0). In this case, by setting the initial value to the one-game-time management timer value, the minimum time is started, and when the one-game-time management timer value is set to the initial value, a test signal is output. It is a configuration that According to this configuration, the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the one game time management timer value. It can be specified whether the minimum time of the game is ensured.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform the process of outputting the test signal in the timer interrupt process before updating the timer value for one game time management. According to this configuration, since updating of the timer value for one game time management is started after the output of the test signal is started, the time interval at which the test signal is output is surely set to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. be able to.

[Effect 5]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can set any one of a plurality of types of bets including 3 or 2 according to the player's selection. In RT2 (inside BB2), the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and the number of bets is set to 2. Under this condition, the payout rate of medals is appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1) where winning of BB1 to be determined is carried over.

It should be noted that a proper medal payout rate in RT1 means that RT1 (while BB1 is inside) has more medals than RT0 (non-inside) and RT2 (BB2 inside) in which winning of BB1 is not carried over. The payout rate is high, and benefits such as advantageous sections and transition to AT state can be given in RT1 (inside BB1), while RT0 (non-inside) and RT2 (inside BB2) includes a configuration in which no privilege is granted, and a configuration in which a privilege is granted on RT1 (inside BB1) under conditions that are more favorable than RT0 (in non-inside) or RT2 (inside BB2).

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the state by turning on the state display LED 17, and the sub-control unit 91 displays a white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51. can be executed, and when BB1 is won in RT0 (during non-internal), the main control unit 41 displays the state, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific effect, and BB2 is executed in RT0 (during non-internal) is won, the main control unit 41 does not display the state, and the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the specific effect. With such a configuration, when BB1 is won in RT0 (non-internal), the state display is performed, and the specific effect is executed to suggest that BB1 is won, so that medals are awarded. While it is possible to encourage the shift to RT1 (during the inside of BB1) where the payout rate is appropriate, when BB2 is won in RT0 (during non-inside), the state display is not performed and the specific effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that BB1 has won although BB2 has won.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is a structure that can be executed even when the determination result of the internal lottery is lost in RT1 (inside BB1). With such a configuration, the specific effect not only suggests that BB1 has won in RT0 (non-internal), but also the decision result of the internal lottery is lost in RT1 (internal of BB1). Since it is also used as a production that suggests that something has happened, it is possible to eliminate wasteful production.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is an effect that can be executed even when the result of the internal lottery in RT1 (inside BB1) is a loss, but the specific effect and RT1 (inside BB1) If the effect that can be executed in is a common configuration, the same effect can be obtained. good.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when BB1 is won at RT0 (non-internal), the sub-control unit 91 starts a specific effect at the timing when the game start operation is performed, and when BB1 does not win, continues the specific effect even after the last stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, and when BB1 wins, the specific effect ends at the timing based on the final stop operation. It is a configuration that allows With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not RT1 (during the inside of BB1) has occurred, depending on whether or not the specific effect continues even after the final stop operation is performed. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing at which the final stop operation is performed, the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the operation is released. including.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (inside BB1) by means of the liquid crystal display 51 in BB2 that shifts due to the winning of BB2 and BB1 that shifts due to the winning of BB1. Configuration. With such a configuration, in the special state after winning BB1 or BB2, a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (non-internal) is performed by the liquid crystal display 51, so that RT1 (inside BB1 Since it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is a prerequisite for moving to middle), it is shifted to RT0 (non-internal), and furthermore, RT1 (BB1) where the payout rate of medals is appropriate internal).

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (non-internal), but the effect device other than the liquid crystal display 51, for example, the lighting mode of the LED It may be configured to control to a special mode different from the normal production, or to control the output mode of the sound effect to a special mode different from the normal production. Since it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is the prerequisite for making the ).

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (not inside) by means of the liquid crystal display 51 even at RT2 (during the inside of BB2). With this configuration, even in RT2, a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (during non-inside) is performed by the liquid crystal display 51, so RT0 which is a prerequisite for moving to RT1 (inside BB1) Since it is suggested that it is not (non-internal), it is recommended to move to RT0 (non-internal) and further to RT1 (BB1 internal) where the medal payout rate is appropriate. can.

When BB2 wins and shifts to BB2, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment determines timing based on the stop operation (final stop operation) of the last reel to be stopped in the game in which BB2 wins. It is a configuration that executes a special effect with. With such a configuration, the special performance is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers the winning of BB2, so that BB2 wins and shifts to BB2. can be clearly recognized. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing at which the final stop operation is performed, the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the operation is released. including.

When BB1 wins and shifts to BB1, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment performs a special reel stop operation (final stop operation) at a timing based on the stop operation (final stop operation) of the last reel to be stopped in the game in which BB1 wins. It is a configuration for executing production. With such a configuration, the special effect is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers BB1 to win, so it is clear that BB1 has won and has shifted to BB1. can be recognized. The timing based on the final stop operation is the timing at which the final stop operation is performed, the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing at which the final stop operation is performed and the operation is released. including.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment carries over the win of BB1 or BB2 when the set value is set in RT2 (inside BB2), BB2 which shifts due to the winning of BB2, and BB1 which shifts due to the winning of BB1. RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained when the set value is set in RT1 (inside BB1) after shifting to RT0 (inside inside) that is not in use. By adopting such a configuration, even if it shifts to RT2 (inside BB2), BB2, or BB1, it can be shifted to RT1 (inside BB1) by resetting the setting value. Since it is possible to shift to RT0 (non-internal medium), which is the premise for this, it becomes easy to shift to RT1 (BB1 internal medium) in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate. Also, in RT1 (inside BB1), even if the set value is set, RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained. This eliminates the need to move to RT1 (inside BB1) again.

[Effect 6]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control the advantageous interval for the player, updates the point value in the advantageous interval, and the sub-control unit 91 updates the point value in the advantageous interval. In addition to announcing the value, it is configured to start annunciation of the point value in the game determined to shift to the advantageous section. With such a configuration, in a game in which it is decided to shift to an advantageous interval, the notification of the point value updated during the advantageous interval is started. It can be suggested to move to the interval.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the initial value according to the determination result of the internal lottery that triggered the determination of the transition to the advantageous section in the game in which the transition to the advantageous section is determined to be the point value. It is a configuration that is set as By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to change the point value when the notification is started according to the decision result of the internal lottery that triggered the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 does not start notifying the point value at the timing when the game start operation is performed in the game determined to shift to the advantageous section, and stops at the end. In this configuration, the notification of the point value is started at the timing based on the stop operation (final stop operation) of the reel. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the driver expect to move to the advantageous section until the final stop operation is performed. In addition, the timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, the final stop operation is performed and the operation is canceled including.

[Effect 7]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the AT state that is advantageous for the player to an advantageous section that can be controlled, and after controlling the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED transition condition is satisfied. A first ED transition condition that is established by controlling to the ED state and, as an ED transition condition, that the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds a third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment); In situations where the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number, it is possible based on the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in number based on the number of navigation stocks), which is the predicted increase in medals. and a second ED transition condition. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, not only the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third prescribed number, but also the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state Even if the number of net additions is less than the third specified number, it may be controlled to the ED state by satisfying the conditions based on the predicted number of net additions, so the number of net additions of medals after being controlled to the AT state can be expected to be controlled to the ED state even in a situation where the number is less than or equal to the third specified number.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect suggesting transition to the ED state. is established and the ED state is controlled, the common ED start effect is executed. By adopting such a configuration, the ED start effect is common both when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled and when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the control to the ED state has been performed.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect suggesting transition to the ED state, and the second ED transition condition is a condition based on the number of medals net increase after being controlled to the AT state. This is a condition that can be established by satisfying both the conditions based on the predicted net increase number (the predicted net increase number based on the number of navigation stocks), and the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT state. After fulfilling the condition based on the predicted net increase number, the second ED shift condition is satisfied and the control is made to the ED state. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied by satisfying the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals from the second ED state and the control is performed to the ED state, the common ED start effect is executed. With such a configuration, after satisfying the conditions based on the number of net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state, by satisfying the conditions based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals, the second ED transition condition is established and the ED state is entered. Even when controlled, after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase number, by satisfying the condition based on the net increase number of medals after being controlled to the AT state, the second ED transition condition is satisfied and controlled to the ED state. Since the common ED start effect is executed even when the player is in the ED state, it is possible to easily recognize that the player has been controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the total value of the net increase in medal count and the predicted net increase in medal count (the predicted net increase in count based on the navigation stock number) after being controlled to the AT state is the third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment). , the second ED transition condition can be established. By adopting such a configuration, in a situation where the number of net increases in medals after being controlled in the AT state is equal to or less than the third prescribed number, the number of net increases in medals after being controlled in the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals will differ. Since it is controlled to the ED state when the total value exceeds the third specified number, by being controlled to the ED state in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number, AT It is possible to make the player recognize that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the state exceeds the third prescribed number.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a second specified number (in this embodiment, 2395), the advantageous section ends, and the total value of the net increase in medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in number based on the number of navigation stocks) is the second regulation. By exceeding the number, the second ED transition condition can be established. By adopting such a configuration, in a situation where the number of net increases in medals after being controlled in the AT state is equal to or less than the third prescribed number, the number of net increases in medals after being controlled in the AT state and the predicted number of net increases in medals will differ. Since it is controlled to the ED state when the total value exceeds the second specified number, by being controlled to the ED state in a situation where the number of net increase of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number, AT It is possible to recognize that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the state exceeds the second specified number which is the end condition of the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the total value of the net increase in medal count and the predicted net increase in medal count (the predicted net increase in count based on the navigation stock number) after being controlled to the AT state is the third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment). , and the number of net increases in medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds a fourth prescribed number (1600 in this embodiment), which is smaller than the third prescribed number, so that the second ED transition condition can be established. is. With such a configuration, even if the sum of the number of net increases in medals after being controlled in the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third prescribed number, the number of medals after being controlled in the AT state is increased. Since control to the ED state is not performed until the net increase number exceeds the fourth specified number that is less than the third specified number, it is prevented from being controlled to the ED state at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state. can.

After controlling to the AT state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the second ED transition condition is satisfied when the first ED transition condition (first specific condition) is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state. If the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state after controlling to the AT state without making the determination, it is not determined whether or not the first ED transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, after one of the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state, whether or not the other of the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition is satisfied is determined. is not determined, the control after being controlled to the ED state can be simplified.

After controlling to the AT state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls to the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state. It is configured to determine whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until being controlled to the ED state, whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied is determined for each game regardless of the state of control. is performed, the control for shifting to the ED state can be simplified.

The sub-controller 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect suggesting transition to the ED state using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51 . With such a configuration, the transition to the ED state is suggested using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, so that the user can clearly recognize that the ED transition condition is established and the control is performed to the ED state. be able to.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect suggesting transition to the ED state when a game start operation is performed in a game subsequent to the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied. is. With such a configuration, since the ED start effect is executed at the start of the game, attention can be paid to the effect at the start of the game, and since the effect after the start of the game is not affected, the ED start effect is achieved. pattern number can be reduced.

In the game in which the ED notification condition is established, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment does not execute an effect suggesting the establishment of the ED notification condition, but executes an effect corresponding to the game. With such a configuration, even in a game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, an effect corresponding to the game is executed instead of an effect suggesting that the ED notification condition is satisfied. It is possible to enhance the unexpectedness by the start production.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can execute a navigation effect suggesting the determination result of the internal lottery and a specific role winning suggestion effect (A). It is configured to be executed with priority over the effect and specific role winning suggestion effect (A). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the unexpectedness of the ED start effect from being diminished by the navigation effect or the specific role winning suggestion effect (A).

[Effect 8]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control to an advantageous section that can be controlled to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, and after controlling to the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED shift condition is satisfied. After controlling to the AT state, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied. After controlling to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied. After that, the configuration is controlled only to the ED state. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied. On the other hand, after the ED transition condition is satisfied, control is performed only to the ED state, so that stable game characteristics can be achieved after the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, an AT1 state in which 100% navigation notification is performed to notify an operation mode for winning an additional winning combination when a multiple-press winning combination is won, and a navigation state. The configuration includes the AT2 state and the additional state in which the notification is performed at a rate of 50%. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until the ED shift condition is satisfied, the AT1 state in which the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% and the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50%. By being controllable in a plurality of states including the AT2 state, it is possible to vary the amount of awarded medals before the ED transition condition is established.

In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, a first state (notification state) in which navigation notification is performed to notify an operation mode for winning an increasing combination when winning a multiple-press winning combination, and a navigation state. A second state in which the notification is not performed may be included, and with such a configuration, after the AT state is controlled, the first state in which the navigation notification is performed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. By being able to control a plurality of states including a state and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed, before the ED transition condition is satisfied, the amount of awarded medals can be changed, It is possible to greatly change the amount of medals awarded between the first state and the second state.

In this embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, a navigation stock lottery can be executed to extend the period of control to the AT state, and the navigation stock lottery is executed with a low probability as multiple types of states other than the ED state. The configuration includes possible AT1 state and AT2 state, and an additional state in which the navigation stock lottery can be executed with a high probability. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until the ED shift condition is satisfied, the AT1 state and AT2 state in which the navigation stock lottery can be executed with a low probability, and the navigation stock lottery can be executed with a high probability. By being controllable to a plurality of states including an executable additional state, it is possible to vary the period during which the AT state is controlled before the ED transition condition is established.

In this embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, a navigation stock lottery can be executed for extending the period of control to the AT state. 1 state and a second state in which the navigation stock lottery cannot be executed. By being controllable to a plurality of states including a first state in which the stock lottery can be executed and a second state in which the navi stock lottery cannot be executed, the AT state is controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to have a change in the period of time.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to perform control to the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied regardless of which of a plurality of types of states other than the ED state is controlled after controlling to the AT state. is. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, even if the control is to any state other than the ED state, the ED state is controlled by satisfying the ED transition condition. It is possible to simplify the processing related to transition to the state.

In this embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the AT1 state, which has the highest average net increase in the number of medals per game among a plurality of types of states other than the ED state. This configuration is less than the average net increase in the number of sheets. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, after the ED transition condition is satisfied and controlled to the ED state, the average net increase in the number of medals per game is the highest among the states up to that time. Since it is less than the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the AT1 state, it is possible to prevent gambling from excessively increasing even if the ED shift condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, the number of net increase in medals that can be expected in the ED state is larger than the minimum number of net increase in medals that can be expected in a plurality of states other than the ED state and in the state where the number of medals increases. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in being controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the average number of net additions of medals per game in the ED state is different from the average number of net additions of medals per game in any one of a plurality of states other than the ED state. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately increase the amount of medals in the ED state.

In this embodiment, the average number of net additions of medals per game in the ED state may be the same as the average number of net additions of medals per game in one of a plurality of types of states other than the ED state. By adopting such a configuration, the control of the ED state and the control of any previous state can be made common.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes an ED start effect suggesting a transition to the ED state. It is configured to execute a common ED start effect even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, the common ED start effect is executed regardless of the state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the ED state is controlled. It can be easily understood.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes a result notification effect for notifying the result of the AT state at the end of the ED state. It is configured to execute a common result notification effect even when the ED transition condition is satisfied in any state and the control is performed to the ED state. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, the common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state regardless of the state when the ED transition condition is established. , the end of the ED state can be easily recognized.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes a navigation effect suggesting the determination result of the internal lottery and specific role winning suggestion effects (A) and (B). ED effect is executed, and in the ED state (after notification), the ratio of executing the navigation effect and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) (B) is lower than in multiple types of states other than the ED state. . By adopting such a configuration, in the ED state (after notification), the ratio of execution of the navigation effect and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) (B) is lower than in the states other than the ED state (after notification). Therefore, attention can be paid to the ED effect.

In the ED state (after notification), the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment restricts the execution of the specific win winning suggestion effect (B) that switches the display of the liquid crystal display 51 among the effects suggesting the result of the internal lottery. Configuration. By adopting such a configuration, in the ED state (after notification), execution of the specific role winning suggestion effect (B) that switches the display of the liquid crystal display 51 is restricted, so that attention can be paid to the ED effect. .

The sub-controller 91 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of suggesting the set value currently set by the pattern of the ED effect in the ED state (after notification). By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in being controlled to the ED state.

[Effect 9]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of AT-related display units that are controlled to either a lighting mode or a lighting-off mode by turning on or off the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e by the sub-controller 91, and is in the ED state. In the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, all of the AT-related display sections are not set to the lighting mode at the same time, and in the ED state, all of the AT-related display sections are set to the lighting mode. With such a configuration, in the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state other than the ED state, all the AT-related display portions do not light up at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display portions are turned off. Since it becomes a lighting mode, it becomes easy to understand that it has been controlled to the ED state.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes an AT-related display section including an AT1 state display section 63 corresponding to the AT1 state among a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, and an AT2 state display section 62 corresponding to the AT2 state. In the AT1 state, the AT1 state display section 63 is in the lighting mode, the AT2 state display section 62 is not in the lighting mode, and in the AT2 state, the AT1 state display section 63 is not in the lighting mode, and the AT2 state display section 62 is in the lighting mode. is. With such a configuration, the AT1 state display section 63 can be used as a light emitting section for notifying the AT1 state, and the AT2 state display section 62 can be used as a light emitting section for notifying the AT2 state until the state is shifted to the ED state. After shifting to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 can be used as light emitting sections for notifying the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state that transitions less frequently than the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and the control to the ED state is notified without providing a dedicated display unit for such a state. becomes possible.

When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment sets the AT2 state display unit 62 in the lighting state while keeping the AT1 state display unit 63 in the lighting state. When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and the AT2 state shifts to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 is turned on while the AT2 state display section 62 is kept in the lighting mode. With such a configuration, when controlling to the ED state, only the light-emitting portions that are not in the lighting mode (AT2 state display portion 62, CZ display portion 64, and additional state display portion 65 in the case of AT1 state) are in the lighting mode. control becomes easy.

When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment shifts to the ED state, the AT1 state display unit 63 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state are displayed. When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and shifts to the ED state, the AT2 state display unit 62 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state display unit 62 are turned off. It may be configured to be in the lighting mode, and by adopting such a configuration, when controlling to the ED state, the light emitting unit that has been in the lighting mode according to the state is temporarily switched to the extinguishing mode, and then the AT1 state display unit. Since the 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are in the lighting mode, it becomes easy to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment shifts to the ED state, the AT1 state display unit 63 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state are displayed. When the ED shift condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and shifts to the ED state, the AT2 state display unit 62 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display unit 63 and the AT2 state display unit 62 are turned off. In the configuration of the lighting mode, the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 may be configured to be in the lighting mode through the blinking mode before being in the lighting mode. In the case of control, after the light-emitting part that has been in the lighting mode according to the state is temporarily turned off, the AT1 state display part 63 and the AT2 state display part 62 are changed to the lighting mode through the flashing mode. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes an AT display section 61 in which the AT-related display section has a lighting mode in both the AT1 state and the AT2 state. With such a configuration, in the ED state, the lighting state including the AT display unit 61, which is in the lighting state regardless of whether it is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state, is controlled to the ED state. It becomes easier to understand.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, an AT display section 61, an AT2 state display section 62, and an AT1 state display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. It is arranged on the right side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With such a configuration, the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65 are easily visible during the game. Since they are arranged on the left and right sides, it becomes easy to understand that they are controlled to the ED state.

[Effect 10]
The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is capable of executing continuous effects over a plurality of games in the AT state, and is configured such that control according to the ED state is restricted during execution of the continuous effects. With such a configuration, since the control related to the ED state is restricted during execution of the continuous performance over a plurality of games, it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being spoiled by the control related to the ED state.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to start control of the ED state after the end of the continuous effect when the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous effect. With such a configuration, when the ED transition condition is satisfied during execution of the continuous performance, the control of the ED state is started after the continuous performance is completed, so that the continuous performance can be performed by starting the ED state. It is possible to prevent loss of interest.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment may be configured not to determine whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied in the effect execution state in which the continuous effect is executed. It is possible to avoid making unnecessary determinations during the period when the start of the ED state is restricted.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes an ED start effect suggesting transition to the ED state. The ED start effect may be executed after the end of the continuous effect, and with such a structure, when the ED transition condition is established during the execution of the continuous effect and the ED state is controlled, the Since the ED start performance is performed after the end of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is not interrupted even when the ED state starts, and the loss of interest in the continuous performance can be prevented.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured to change the content of the continuous performance when the ED transition condition is established during execution of the continuous performance and the ED state is controlled. Thus, the transition to the ED state can be suggested even by the continuous effect being executed.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment may be configured not to execute the continuous production when the ED transition condition can be satisfied during the execution of the continuous production when the continuous production is executed. By doing so, since the continuous performance is not executed when the ED transition condition can be established during the execution of the continuous performance, the interest of the continuous performance is prevented from being lost due to the start of the ED state. can.

[Effect 11]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the increase state in which the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the non-AT state. It is possible to control to a low decrease state, to transition again to an increase state in a decrease state, to be controllable to an AT state that repeatedly loops alternately between an increase state and a decrease state, and to transition again to an increase state in a decrease state. In this configuration, the period until the transition to the increase state again is controlled to be any period from 1G to 11G when it is determined to increase. With such a configuration, in a configuration that can be controlled to an AT state in which the increase state and the decrease state in which the medal payout rate is lower than the increase state are alternately looped, after the start of the decrease state, the increase Since the period until the transition to the state again is one of the periods 1G to 11G, it can be expected to transition to the increase state again until the longest number of games from 1G to 11G has passed.

In the present embodiment, in the AT state, the period until the decrease state after the end of the first increase state is shifted again to the increase state is to shift again to the increase state from the decrease state after the end of the second increase state. It is a configuration in which the ratio of the period to be shorter than the period to is high. By adopting such a configuration, after the end of the first increase state, the period of control to the decrease state until the transition to the next increase state tends to be shorter than after the end of the second increase state, To obtain a large amount of medals in an initial stage of an AT state looping between an increasing state and a decreasing state so as to easily shift to a second increasing state without reducing the medals increased in the first increasing state. can be done.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, the ratio of 1 G is the highest in the period from the decrease state after the end of the first increase state to the increase state again. With such a configuration, after the first increase state ends, it is easy to shift to the next increase state at 1G, and the transition to the second increase state is performed without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state as much as possible. easier to do.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, the period from the decrease state after the end of the second to fourth increase states to the increase state again is If there is a high percentage of cases where the period is longer than the period until the transition to the increase state again, and it is not decided to transition to the increase state again in the decrease state after the 2nd to 4th increase states, the first time , the winning probability of navistock is treated more favorably than when it is not decided to shift to the increase state again in the decrease state after the end of the increase state after the fifth time. With such a configuration, in the decrease state after the second to fourth increase states, the period from the decrease state after the end of the first, fifth and subsequent increase states to the increase state again. In addition, if it is not decided to move to the increase state again, the winning probability of Navistock will be treated more favorably than the decrease state after the end of the increase state after the 1st and 5th times. Even if the period of the decrease state after the end of the second to fourth increase states becomes longer, it is possible to expect both the transition to the increase state and the granting of the navistock.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, before being controlled to the decrease state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the increase state again in the decrease state, and in the decrease state after the end of the second to fourth increase states If it is not decided to shift to the increasing state again, winning Navistock than when it is not decided to shift again to the increasing state in the decreasing state after the end of the increasing state after the first time, the fifth time, etc. This is a highly probable configuration. By adopting such a configuration, even if the period of the decrease state after the end of the second to fourth increase states becomes long, it is possible to expect the transition to the increase state again.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increase state, control is more advantageous for the player than in the fourth increase state, and in the decrease state before shifting to the fifth increase state, the increase state is resumed. The period until transition is more likely to be longer than the period until transition to the increase state again in the decrease state before shifting to the increase state up to the fourth time. With such a configuration, the specific state before shifting to the fifth increase state, which is controlled more advantageously for the player than the previous increase state, is the decrease before shifting to the fourth increase state. Since the period tends to be longer than the state, it can be expected to transition to the relatively favorable 5th increase state for a long period of time.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increase state, control is more advantageous for the player than in the increase state up to the fourth time, and in the decrease state after the end of the fifth increase state, the state is shifted again to the increase state. The period until the increase is more likely to be shorter than the period until the decrease state before the fifth increase state is shifted to the increase state again. With such a configuration, the decrease state after the end of the fifth increase state, which is controlled more advantageously for the player than the previous increase state, is more favorable than the decrease state before shifting to the fifth increase state. Also, the period tends to be short, so that a large amount of medals can be acquired starting from the fifth increase state, which is particularly advantageous in the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increase state, it is easier to win the additional state in which the navigation stock is given than in the fourth increase state. By adopting such a configuration, in the AT state that loops between the increasing state and the decreasing state, it is controlled to the increasing state five times, so that the AT state can be expected to continue thereafter.

In the present embodiment, the decrease state is a state in which the navigation notification probability is lower than that in the increase state in which an operation mode for generating a small winning combination accompanied by awarding of medals is notified. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to vary the payout rate of medals in the increase state and the decrease state according to the navigation notification probability for generating a small winning combination.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can select and set one of a plurality of types of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and shifts from the decrease state to the increase state again. It is a configuration in which the possibility of a specific set value (6) is suggested by the number of continued games in a state of decreasing to. With such a configuration, it is possible to focus attention on the period from the decrease period to the increase state again.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, before the start of the decrease state, it is determined whether or not the decrease state is to be shifted again to the increase state, and when it is determined to be shifted again from the decrease state to the increase state. Secondly, the period from 1G to 11G until the decrease state is shifted to the increase state again is selected according to the number of times the AT state is controlled to the increase state. By adopting such a configuration, before the start of the decrease state, in addition to determining whether or not to re-shift to the increase state, if re-shifting to the increase state, the period until transition is determined from 1G to 11G. Therefore, the control after being controlled to the reduced state can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the period from the decrease state to the increase state again is a period shorter than the number of games selected with the highest rate according to the number of times the AT state is controlled to the increase state. Also, in the AT state, the rate of selecting a longer period is higher than the number of games that is most selected according to the number of times that the increase state is controlled in the AT state. With such a configuration, after the start of the decrease state, the number of games with the highest percentage of games selected according to the number of times the increase state is controlled in the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state has passed. can be expected to shift to an increasing state.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the 5th increase state, the winning probability of the additional state is higher than that of the 4th increase state, and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous additional state (2) is high. , and the period from the decrease state after the end of the first increase state to the increase state again is the period from the second to the fourth time of the decrease state after the end of the AT state until the transition to the increase state again. There is a high percentage that the period is shorter than the period, and the period until the decrease state after the 5th increase state ends, and the period until it shifts to the increase state again increases in the decrease state after the 2nd to 4th increase states. There is a high percentage of times when the period is shorter than the period until the state is changed again. If it is not decided to shift to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the increasing state, it is decided to shift again to the increasing state in the decreasing state after the end of the increasing state for the first time and after the fifth time This is a configuration in which the ratio of decisions to move to the increase state again is higher than when it is not. With such a configuration, after the end of the first increase state, the period of control to the decrease state until the transition to the next increase state is shorter than after the end of the second to fourth increase states. Because it is easy to shift to the second increase state without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state, in the initial stage of the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state, a large amount of medals can be collected. In addition, the winning probability of the additional state is higher than that of the previous increasing state, and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous additional state (2) is controlled to be high. The period of the decrease state after the end tends to be shorter than the period of the decrease state after the end of the second to fourth increase states, so the fifth increase state is particularly advantageous in the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state. You can get a large amount of medals starting from. In addition, in the decrease state after the end of the 2nd to 4th increase state, the period until it re-enters the increase state after the end of the 1st increase state and the decrease state after the end of the increase state after the 5th time In addition, in the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states, the rate at which it is decided to move to the increasing state again when it is not decided to move again to the increasing state is relatively high, so even if the period of decrease after the end of the 2nd to 4th increases is long, it is possible to expect to shift to the increase again, and the 5th increase is particularly advantageous. It can be expected that the AT state will continue until the state.

[Effect 12]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can set any number of bets from a plurality of types of bets including 3 or 2 according to the player's selection, and determines whether or not to allow the occurrence of winning. and the internal lottery determines that the occurrence of BB1 or BB2 winning with transition to BB1 or BB2 is permitted, and when the BB1 or BB2 winning does not occur, the BB1 or BB2 The decision to allow the occurrence of a prize can be carried over to the next game or later, and the decision to allow the occurrence of a win for BB2, which is the subject of determination, can be made on the condition that the number of bets is set to 3. The medal payout rate is not appropriate within BB2, which is carried over, and the decision is made to allow the occurrence of winning of BB1, which is the subject of determination, on the condition that the number of bets is set to 2. is carried over, the payout rate of medals is appropriate in the inside of BB1.

It should be noted that the proper medal payout rate within BB1 means that the determination to allow the occurrence of winning of BB1 or BB2 is not carried over within BB1, or the internal state of BB2. A configuration in which the payout rate of medals is higher than in the middle, a configuration in which benefits can be granted in the inside of BB1, but a configuration in which benefits are not granted in the non-internal or the inside of BB2. It includes a configuration in which a privilege is granted under conditions that are more favorable than inside the inside or inside the BB2.

In this embodiment, BB1 does not win a prize even if the number of bets is set to 3 or 2 in the inside of BB1. By adopting such a configuration, medals are paid out inside BB2 where the decision to allow the occurrence of the winning of BB2, which is the object of determination, is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 3 is set. The odds are not appropriate, and the decision to allow the occurrence of winning of BB1, which is the subject of determination, is carried forward on the condition that the number of bets of 2 is set. In the structure in which the payout rate is appropriate, after shifting to the inside of BB1, even if the number of bets of 3 is set or the number of bets of 2 is set, BB1 wins. BB1 state in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate can be maintained without shifting to BB1 due to occurrence of

In this embodiment, A in BB and B in BB to be determined by internal lottery are common between BB2 that shifts when BB2 wins and BB1 shifts when BB1 wins, and BB2 and BB1 In this configuration, the probabilities of occurrence of at least some of the winning prizes of A in BB and B in BB to be determined by an internal lottery are different. By adopting such a configuration, the decision to allow the occurrence of the winning of BB2, which is the subject of determination, is carried forward on the condition that the number of bets of 3 is set. Medals inside BB1 where the decision to allow the occurrence of winning of BB1, which is the subject of determination, is carried forward on the condition that the payout rate is not appropriate and the number of bets is set to 2. In the structure in which the payout rate is appropriate, the winning of BB2 causes control to BB2, and the occurrence of winning of BB1 causes control to BB1. A in BB and B in BB, which are determined by internal lottery in BB2 and BB1, are common. BB2 and BB1 do not change A in BB and B in BB, which are determined by internal lottery, and the medal payout rate in BB2 and the medal payout rate in BB1 are changed. and can be adjusted.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can select and set one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player. In this configuration, the probability of occurrence of at least some winnings among target A in BB and B in BB differs according to a set value. With such a configuration, the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB2 or BB1 can be adjusted without changing A in BB and B in BB to be determined by internal lottery between BB2 and BB1. can be done.

[Effect 13]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can be controlled to an advantageous interval that can be controlled to an AT state that is advantageous to the player, and can update the number of ED transition games and the net increase counter value in the advantageous interval. When controlling, any value of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200 is determined as the third prescribed number, and any value of 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400 A value is determined as a fifth specified number, and the updated number of games transitioning to the ED reaches the third specified number, or the updated net increase number counter value exceeds the fifth specified number, thereby controlling to the ED state. be. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the advantageous section, the number of ED transition games reaches or the net increase number counter value exceeds the ED state, the third prescribed number and the fifth prescribed number that are controlled to the ED state Since the number fluctuates, it is possible to increase the interest associated with controlling to the advantageous section by changing the period until being controlled to the ED state each time control is performed to the advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the ED state has a configuration in which the navigation notification probability that an operation mode for generating a small winning combination with awarding of medals is notified differs from the navigation notification probability in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state. With such a configuration, the timing of transition to the ED state becomes ambiguous due to the change in the period until the state is controlled to the ED state. Since the added state and the navigation notification probability are different, the possibility of being controlled to the ED state can be inferred from the navigation notification probability.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment can execute an ED start effect or an ED effect that suggests that the ED state is being controlled in the ED state, and even after being controlled to the ED state, the ED start effect or the ED effect can be executed. may not be executed. With such a configuration, the ED start effect and the ED effect may not be executed even after being controlled to the ED state, so even in a situation where the ED start effect and the ED effect are not executed, the ED state is controlled. You can expect that

The sub-control section 91 of this embodiment is configured to determine whether or not to execute an ED start effect when a specific combination is won by an internal lottery in the ED state. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the ED start performance is executed when it is determined that the winning of the specific combination is permitted, that is, the control is made to the ED state.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has the third specified number of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200, which is relatively easy to reach 1900 or less, and the fifth specified number of 1150, 1200, and 1250. , 1300, 1350, and 1400, navigation effect B suggesting the possibility of reaching 1250 or less, which is relatively easy to reach, can be executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled to the ED state at an earlier stage by executing the navigation effect B.

[Effect 14]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling an advantageous interval that can be controlled to an AT state that is advantageous to the player. and an ED transition game number counter for counting the number of games, and the number of advantageous section games by the advantageous section game number counter is irrespective of whether the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. It is updated first, and is used when determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous section, and the number of ED transition games by the ED transition game number counter is established that the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. On the other hand, it is not updated when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is not RT1, and the ceiling value is reached in the advantageous section, the temporary ceiling value is reached, and the This configuration is used when determining whether the 3ED transition condition, that is, the AT state transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, as the number of games for determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous interval, the number of games in the advantageous interval, which is updated regardless of the conditions that occurred during the advantageous interval, is used. is not too long, the number of games for determining whether the AT state transition condition is met is not updated unless the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. By using the count value, it is possible to prompt the player to play the game under the recommended conditions.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured such that both the number of games in the advantageous interval and the number of games to transition to the ED are initialized at the end of the advantageous interval. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon of the finished advantageous section from affecting the next advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to control to the ED state that continues until the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth prescribed number. With such a configuration, when the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the game state is RT1 in the advantageous interval reaches the fifth specified number, the advantageous interval ends. The ED state can be controlled to continue until conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can indicate the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous interval in the ED state, and indicates the number of remaining games based on the number of advantageous interval games. With such a configuration, it is possible to indicate the correct number of remaining games in the ED state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment, when the number of ED transition games reaches a ceiling value (1000 in this embodiment) smaller than the fifth prescribed number (1150 to 1400 in this embodiment), the AT1 state, This is a configuration for controlling to the AT2 state. With such a configuration, it is possible to share the number of ED transition games for determining whether the condition for transition to the AT state is satisfied and for determining whether the condition for transition to the third ED is satisfied.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the number of ED transition games reaches a virtual ceiling value (333, 666, 999 in this embodiment) smaller than the fifth specified number (1150 to 1400 in this embodiment). , the first AT lottery for determining whether or not to control to the AT1 state is executed. With such a configuration, the number of ED transition games can be shared between the determination of execution of the 1st AT lottery and the determination of establishment of the 3rd ED transition condition.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate when the game is played with the number of bets of 3, and the number of games to be shifted to the ED is updated by playing the game with the number of bets of 3. It is a configuration that With such a configuration, since the number of games to be shifted to the ED is not updated unless the game is played with the number of bets of 3, the player is encouraged to play the game with the number of bets of 3, which makes the payout rate of medals appropriate. be able to.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is controlled by RT1 out of RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, and BB2, so that the medal payout rate becomes appropriate, and by being controlled by RT1, the number of ED transition games is reduced. Configuration to be updated. With such a configuration, the number of games to be shifted to the ED is not updated when RT1 is not controlled, so that it is possible to encourage the player to play the game at RT1 at which the medal payout rate is appropriate.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment counts the number of net increase in medals after shifting to the AT state, and sets the net increase in number counter value used when judging the end condition 2 of the advantageous interval to the number of bets of 3 and the game state. is updated regardless of whether it is established that is RT1. With such a configuration, even when the number of bets is 3 and the game state is not RT1, the net increase number counter value is updated, so that the number of bets is 3 and the game is played. The end condition 2 of the advantageous section can be determined by taking into consideration the amount of increase in medals in the game in which the state RT1 is not established. That is, even if the game is played without establishing that the number of bets is three and the gaming state is RT1, establishment of end condition 2 of the advantageous interval cannot be delayed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the bet amount is set using medals and credits as game values. It may be applied to a machine or a full-credit slot machine in which only credits are used as gaming value to set the bet amount. When game balls are used as game values, for example, one medal can correspond to five game balls. Equivalent to setting a bet using

Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to using only one of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls. For example, multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. can be That is, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls, and when a winning occurs, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be played. A slot machine that can pay out any utility value may be applied.

1 slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 start switch 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch 51 liquid crystal display 41 main controller 91 sub controller

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information that can be individually identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous section control means for controlling to an advantageous section that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player;
a numerical value update means capable of updating numerical values in the advantageous section;
specific advantageous state control means for controlling to a specific advantageous state based on the numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means reaching a specific value;
a specific value determining means for determining one of a plurality of values as a specific value when controlling to the advantageous interval;
with
The numerical value updated by the numerical value updating means includes a first numerical value and a second numerical value,
The specific advantageous state control means controls to the specific advantageous state based on the first numerical value reaching a first specific value, and the specific advantageous state based on the second numerical value reaching a second specific value. control to
The slot machine, wherein the specific value determining means respectively determines the first specific value and the second specific value when controlling to the advantageous section .

Images